FM 1-114 Air Cav Squad and Troop Ops
FM 1-114 Air Cav Squad and Troop Ops
FM 1-114 Air Cav Squad and Troop Ops
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A:
PCN 32000075200
*FM 1-114
PREFACE.......................................................................................................... vii Chapter 1 RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY HELICOPTER FUNDAMENTALS ............... 1-0 Section IPrimary Roles and Missions.......................................................... 1-0 Essential Characteristics of Army Operations ..................................................... 1-0 Squadron Mission............................................................................................. 1-1 Troop Mission .................................................................................................. 1-2 Capabilities and Limitations ............................................................................... 1-2 Section IIOrganizations .............................................................................. 1-3 Cavalry Organizations ....................................................................................... 1-3 Regimental Aviation Squadron ........................................................................... 1-3 Division Cavalry Squadron ................................................................................. 1-4 Air Cavalry Squadron ........................................................................................ 1-6 Troop Organization ........................................................................................... 1-6 Chapter 2 BATTLE COMMAND ........................................................................................ 2-1 Section ICommand and Control.................................................................. 2-1 Command and Control Process ......................................................................... 2-1 Military Decision Making Process ...................................................................... 2-1 Command and Control Techniques ..................................................................... 2-1
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution unlimited. *This publication supersedes FM 1 -114, 20 February 1991.
FM 1-114 _______________________________________________________________________________
Page
Section IICommand and Staff Responsibilities ............................................2-1 Squadron Commander .........................................................................................2-1 Executive Officer .................................................................................................2-2 Command Sergeant Major ...................................................................................2-2 Adjutant ...............................................................................................................2-3 Intelligence Officer ...............................................................................................2-3 Operations Officer ................................................................................................2-3 Supply Officer ......................................................................................................2-3 Air Defense Officer...............................................................................................2-4 Air Liaison Officer.................................................................................................2-4 Aviation Unit Maintenance Troop Commander .....................................................2-4 Chaplain...............................................................................................................2-4 Chemical Officer ..................................................................................................2-4 Signal Officer .......................................................................................................2-4 Engineer Officer ...................................................................................................2-4 Flight Operations Officer ......................................................................................2-5 Fire Support Officer..............................................................................................2-5 Headquarters and Headquarters Troop Commander.............................................2-5 Liaison Officer ......................................................................................................2-6 Regimental Support Squadron Commander .........................................................2-6 Squadron Maintenance Officer .............................................................................2-6 Surgeon ...............................................................................................................2-6 Squadron Tactical Operations Officer...................................................................2-7 Air Cavalry Troop Commander.............................................................................2-7 Air Mission Commander .......................................................................................2-8 Platoon Leaders ...................................................................................................2-8 Team Leaders ......................................................................................................2-9 First Sergeant.......................................................................................................2-9 Maintenance Officer .............................................................................................2-9 Instructor Pilot ......................................................................................................2-9 Safety Officer .....................................................................................................2-10 Aircraft Survivability Equipment Officer..............................................................2-10 Pilot-in-Command ..............................................................................................2-10 Section IIICommand and Control Facilities.................................................2-10 Tactical Operations Center .................................................................................2-10 Tactical Command Post .....................................................................................2-11
ii
Page
Alternate and Rear Command Posts, Assembly Areas, and Forward Arming and Refueling Points ........................................................................2-12 Assembly Areas ................................................................................................2-13 Tactical Assembly Area .....................................................................................2-13 Forward Assembly Area .....................................................................................2-13 Section IVCommand and Control Communications ...................................2-14 Purpose .............................................................................................................2-14 Responsibilities .................................................................................................2-15 Means of Communication ..................................................................................2-15 Regimental Aviation Squadron and Division Cavalry Squadron Communications............................................................................2-16 Troop Communications .....................................................................................2-22 Operations Security ...........................................................................................2-25 Section VCommand, Control, Communications, and Intelligence Enhancement ..............................................................................................2-25 Lines of Communication ....................................................................................2-25 Message and Document Delivery ......................................................................2-25 Personnel and Equipment Transportation ...........................................................2-26 Section VIDigital Communications Systems...............................................2-26 Digital Systems and Equipment .........................................................................2-26 OH-58D Kiowa Warrior ......................................................................................2-26 AH-64D Longbow Apache ..................................................................................2-27 Aviation Mission Planning System .....................................................................2-27 Aviation Tactical Operations Center ..................................................................2-28 Improved Data Modem ......................................................................................2-29 Maneuver Control System and/or Phoenix..........................................................2-29 Enhancement to Reconnaissance Operations.....................................................2-29 Enhancement to Security Operations .................................................................2-30 Enhancement to Close Operations .....................................................................2-31 Chapter 3 EMPLOYMENT ....................................................................................................3-1 Section ITask Organization ............................................................................3-1 General ................................................................................................................3-1 Regimental Aviation Squadron .............................................................................3-1 Division Cavalry Squadron ...................................................................................3-1 Air Cavalry Troop .................................................................................................3-1 Attack Helicopter Troop (Armored RAS Only).......................................................3-2
iii
FM 1-114 _______________________________________________________________________________
Page Assault Helicopter Troop (Armored and Light RAS Only)......................................3-2 Employment Considerations.................................................................................3-3 Section IIReconnaissance Operations ..........................................................3-4 Purpose ...............................................................................................................3-4 Fundamentals .....................................................................................................3-4 Planning Considerations.......................................................................................3-5 Capabilities .........................................................................................................3-6 Method of Reconnaissance .................................................................................3-6 Air Cavalry Reconnaissance Techniques .............................................................3-7 Actions on Contact ..............................................................................................3-8 Route Reconnaissance ......................................................................................3-10 Zone Reconnaissance ........................................................................................3-13 Area Reconnaissance.........................................................................................3-16 Reconnaissance In Force ...................................................................................3-19 Landing Zone and/or Pickup Zone Reconnaissance............................................3-19 Nuclear, Chemical, and Biological Reconnaissance............................................3-21 Section IIISecurity Operations .....................................................................3-26 Purpose .............................................................................................................3-26 Fundamentals ...................................................................................................3-27 Planning Considerations.....................................................................................3-28 Screen................................................................................................................3-29 Guard Operations...............................................................................................3-41 Covering Force Operations.................................................................................3-45 Area Security .....................................................................................................3-50 Section IVOffensive Operations...................................................................3-51 Movement-to-Contact.........................................................................................3-51 Search and Attack ..............................................................................................3-52 Hasty Attack ......................................................................................................3-53 Deliberate Attack................................................................................................3-54 Attack Position ..................................................................................................3-55 Raid ..................................................................................................................3-55 Exploitation and Pursuit Operations ...................................................................3-55 Exploitation Force ..............................................................................................3-56 Pursuit Force......................................................................................................3-56 Preassault Fires ................................................................................................3-57 Battle Handover ................................................................................................3-57
iv
Page
Passage of Lines ...............................................................................................3-58 Battle Handover Line .........................................................................................3-60 Feint...................................................................................................................3-60 Demonstration....................................................................................................3-60 Section VDefensive Operations ...................................................................3-61 Deep Operations ...............................................................................................3-61 Close Operations................................................................................................3-63 Rear Operations .................................................................................................3-64 Section VIRetrograde Operations ................................................................3-65 Purpose .............................................................................................................3-65 Delay..................................................................................................................3-65 Withdrawal .........................................................................................................3-66 Retirement .........................................................................................................3-66 Chapter 4 STABILITY OPERATIONS AND SUPPORT OPERATIONS................................4-1 Section IGeneral .............................................................................................4-1 Operational Concept.............................................................................................4-1 Principles of Stability Operations and Support Operations ....................................4-2 Employment Guidelines ......................................................................................4-2 Section IITypes of Operations .......................................................................4-3 Categories of Operations .....................................................................................4-3 Stability Operations .............................................................................................4-3 Support Operations .............................................................................................4-5 Chapter 5 COMBAT SUPPORT AND COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT ................................5-0 Section ICombat Support ...............................................................................5-0 Field Artillery .......................................................................................................5-0 Mortars ................................................................................................................5-0 Naval Gun Fire Support .......................................................................................5-1 Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses.....................................................................5-2 Fire Support Coordinating Measures ....................................................................5-4 Close Air Support ................................................................................................5-9 Ground and Air Alerts ........................................................................................5-10 Close Air Support Target Acquisition and Targeting............................................5-10 Close Air Support Capabilities and Limitations ...................................................5-10 Close Air Support Coordination and Control .......................................................5-11 Engineer Support ..............................................................................................5-11
FM 1-114 _______________________________________________________________________________
Air Defense Active and Passive Measures .........................................................5-12 Intelligence.........................................................................................................5-14 Electronic Warfare .............................................................................................5-15 Counterintelligence.............................................................................................5-16 Air Traffic Services.............................................................................................5-16 Section IICombat Service Support...............................................................5-17 Fundamentals ...................................................................................................5-17 Combat Service Support Operations for the Regimental Aviation Squadron ......5-17 Combat Service Support Operations for the Division Cavalry Squadron.............5-18 Combat Service Support Operations for the Air Cavalry Troop ..........................5-18 Supply Classes ..................................................................................................5-18 Forward Area Arming and Refueling Point..........................................................5-21 Vehicle and Other Ground Equipment Maintenance and Recovery.....................5-24 Aviation Maintenance Support Structure.............................................................5-24 Aircraft Recovery Operations and Battle Damage and Assessment Repair.........5-25 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix I Appendix J Appendix K RISK MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................... A-0 AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................... B-0 OH-58D SYSTEMS ............................................................................................. C-0 MOVEMENT AND RAPID DEPLOYMENT.......................................................... D-0 ASSEMBLY AREA OPERATIONS ..................................................................... E-0 TROOP ORDER GUIDE ..................................................................................... F-1 JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM ................................................................................G-1 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT ........................................................ H-0 FRATRICIDE PREVENTION................................................................................ I-0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS AND COMPLIANCE ........................................J-1 AIR-GROUND INTEGRATION ............................................................................ K-0 GLOSSARY .............................................................................................Glossary-1 BIBLIOGRAPHY ................................................................................ Bibliography-1 INDEX ........................................................................................................... Index-1
vi
Preface
The RAS is an organic element of the corps ACR and ACR/L. The DCS is an organic element of the armored, light infantry, and airborne divisions. The ACS is an organic element of the air assault division. The ACT is the basic element of the RAS, DCS, and ACS. The RASs, DCSs, ACS, and ACTs are organized and equipped to perform reconnaissance and security operations in support of the overall scheme of maneuver. In addition, the RASs, DCSs, and ACS each play a vital role in command and control enhancement for their higher headquarters. Successful employment of these units on the modern battlefield depends heavily on the proper use of the tenets of Army operations. This manual describes the organizational structure of the RAS, DCS, ACS, and ACT; as well as the doctrinal and tactical employment of these units on the modern battlefield. Appendixes A through K provide supplemental material on risk management, aircraft characteristics, OH-58D systems, movement and rapid deployment, assembly area operations, troop order guide, JAAT, ASE, fratricide prevention, environmental concerns and compliance, and air-ground integration. This manual is based on the doctrinal and tactical employment principles outlined in FMs 1-100, 1-111, 17-95, 100-5, 101-5, and 101-5-1. The RAS and DCS represent the smallest combined arms maneuver force on the battlefield. The versatility, maneuverability, and lethality these units bring to the battle can best be understood and used through the application of this manual in conjunction with FMs 17-95 and 17-97. This manual is intended for use by RAS, DCS, ACS, and ACT commanders, as well as a practical tool for ground commanders. This manual applies to commanders and staffs who will lead, employ, or fight with a RAS, DCS, ACS, or ACT and to soldiers assigned to these types of organizations. It also serves as a reference for flight crews learning to understand and conduct reconnaissance and security operations in the RAS, DCS, ACS, and ACT. The proponent of this publication is Headquarters, TRADOC. Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to Commander, USAAVNC and Fort Rucker, ATTN: ATZQTDS-D, Fort Rucker, AL 36362-5263. Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.
vii
Chapter 1
1-0
Chapter 1
DEPTH 1-4. Depth refers to time, distance, and resources available to the commander for the mission. Air cavalry is highly mobile, flexible and possesses the capability to report enemy intelligence throughout the depth of the commanders battlespace. This allows commanders to employ friendly forces to counter any enemy combat operation. Momentum in the attack and elasticity in the defense are derived from depth. Knowing the time required to move forces is essential in knowing how to deploy to destroy, disrupt, or delay the enemy. Commanders need adequate space for force disposition, maneuver, dispersion, and must see the whole battlefield. As the range and precision of weapon systems increase, commanders will need to expand their ability to maintain situational awareness throughout the battlespace. The mobility and sensors of the air cavalry provide the commander with the ability to detect the enemy and manipulate the battlefield. The air cavalry provide the reconnaissance, surveillance, and security capabilities to achieve these requirements. ORCHESTRATION 1-5. Orchestration means to arrange, develop, organize, or combine to achieve a desired or maximum effect. The commander achieves this maximization through an adequate and timely knowledge of both enemy and friendly forces. Orchestration describes the means by which commanders apply the complementary and reinforcing effects of all military and nonmilitary assets to overwhelm opponents at one or more decisive points. Air cavalry provides the commander with invaluable information to visualize the battlefield and to orchestrate his forces successfully. Effective orchestration requires anticipation, agility, mastery of time-space relationships, and a complete understanding of how friendly and enemy capabilities interact. Air cavalry elements must effectively integrate into the brigade, regiment, division, or corps commander's scheme of maneuver to achieve forceful and rapid operations. Air cavalry commanders, like their superiors, must make specific provisions in advance to exploit the opportunities that tactical success creates. VERSATILITY 1-6. Versatility is the pivot point from which the cavalry commander will accomplish the other tenets. Versatility is the ability of units to conduct different kinds of operations either sequentially or simultaneously and is synonymous with flexibility. It allows for a smooth transition between varying mission combinations and deploying from one area or region to another without degrading performance. Versatility requires competence in a variety of skills. The commander that plans and executes his missions from this perspective will be guaranteed success on the battlefield and in the units ability to react smoothly and accurately to changing mission requirements.
SQUADRON MISSION
1-7. The primary mission of the RAS, DCS (heavy, light, and airborne), and ACS is to conduct reconnaissance and security operations. When appropriately task organized, the unit may participate in other security
1-1
FM 1-114
missions. The air cavalry performs air combat as part of the counterreconnaissance effort, or to protect the overall force or organic units by providing local security. The air cavalry assists in C3I enhancement; in addition to reconnaissance and security. Through these missions, they provide timely intelligence concerning the enemy, terrain, and weather throughout the AO and early warning against enemy observation or attack. Today's cavalry regiments and squadrons must be able to conduct operations across a wide range (peace, conflict, and war) against threats ranging in size from major regional powers, lesser powers, and terrorist groups to insurgents. Cavalry regiments and squadrons may be among the first units to initially deploy into an area to conduct stability operations, support operations or operations as part of the postconflict phase of some other contingency operation.
TROOP MISSION
1-8. The primary mission of the air troop is to conduct reconnaissance and screening operations. The air troop extends the aerial reconnaissance and screening capabilities of their squadron and supports the squadrons economy of force role during offensive, defensive, rear, and retrograde operations. Through these missions they provide timely combat information concerning the enemy, terrain, and weather throughout the AO and early warning against enemy observation or attack. Air troops augment ground forces when conducting guard and cover operations. Other missions that the air troop normally performs are C3I enhancement, surveillance, counterreconnaissance, raids, deception, air assault security, convoy security, nuclear aerial and/or nuclear and chemical ground surveys, and assisting in ground unit passage of lines. Air cavalry may be transferred under the OPCON to other forces for specific missions or as part of a JTF.
1-2
Chapter 1
ACT
High degree of maneuverability. Demonstrated flexibility in changing battlefield situations. Adds depth in all reconnaissance and security missions.
Limitations
Limited, continuous 24 hour-a-day operations. Limited station time due to refueling requirements results in frequent situation updates as aircraft rotate in and out of the AO.
1-3
FM 1-114
1-4
Chapter 1
1-5
FM 1-114
TROOP ORGANIZATION
HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS TROOP 1-14. The HHT provides C2 and staff planning for the squadron. The squadron headquarters consists of the commander and his coordinating and/or personal staff. The headquarters troop consists of a headquarters, a supply section, a vehicle maintenance section, a food service section, a medical treatment squad, a Class III and/or Class V platoon (in the RAS), a unit ministry team, and a communications section. In the RAS, a separate CEWI flight platoon provides the ACR with its aerial signal intelligence asset. In the division cavalry, combat electronic warfare and intelligence support is available upon request. AIR CAVALRY TROOP 1-15. The troop headquarters consists of the commander, the first sergeant, the safety officer, and a vehicle driver (crew chief from one of the aeroscout platoons). The troop commander is overall responsible for the command, control, employment, and maintenance of the ACT. He is assigned an aircraft from one of the aeroscout platoons. The first sergeant coordinates external support such as supply, mess, personnel, medical, and vehicle
1-6
Chapter 1
maintenance. The first sergeant also monitors combat operations. He supervises virtually all operations in the AA. The vehicles assigned to the ACT will vary from unit to unit and are split between the headquarters section and the platoons based on the situation. 1-16. Each platoon consists of four aircraft. Each platoon is led by a lieutenant and includes a flight examiner, an instructor pilot, pilots, platoon sergeant, and crew chiefs. ATTACK HELICOPTER TROOP (ARMORED RAS ONLY) 1-17. Each ATKHT consists of a troop headquarters, an aeroscout platoon with three AH-64s, and an attack platoon with five AH-64s. The ATKHTs are the primary antiarmor forces of the RAS. They can fix and prevent enemy penetrations, exploit success, and provide long-range direct antiarmor fires. They can also perform reconnaissance and screening missions. ATKHTs are employed the same as the attack helicopter companies discussed in FM 1-112. ASSAULT HELICOPTER TROOP (RAS ONLY) 1-18. The AHT consists of a troop headquarters and three assault platoons. Each platoon has five UH-60s, totaling fifteen aircraft per troop. 1-19. The AHT provides the ACR and the RAS with CS and CSS by moving troops, supplies, and equipment within the combat zone. It may conduct air assault operations for up to one dismounted mechanized infantry company, conduct LRSD insertions, or augment aeromedical evacuation efforts. In addition, the AHT provides UH-60 aircraft for command, control, and liaison as required by the ACR commander. It also allows the ACR and RAS commanders to support their own extensive Class III, Class V, and maintenance requirements. The AHT is employed the same as the assault helicopter companies discussed in FM 1-113. AVIATION UNIT MAINTENANCE TROOP 1-20. The AVUM troop consists of a troop headquarters, a quality assurance section, an aircraft maintenance platoon, an aircraft component repair platoon, and a Class III and/or Class V platoon The AVUM troop provides AVUM support for organic squadron aircraft. In the armored DCS, the AVUM provides Class III and/or Class V support. AIR CAVALRY PLATOON 1-21. The commander organizes platoons to train and fight as a unit under the direction of the platoon leader. AIR CAVALRY TEAM 1-22. The ACTM is the basic building block of any troop mission and is the "eyes and ears" of the commander. ACTMs can cover wide frontages and add depth to the battle area. ACTMs can also rapidly report information about the tactical situation to provide real time intelligence to the commander. The commander task organizes the troop into ACTMs based on table of organization and equipment, aircraft availability, and METT-T. The ACTM
1-7
FM 1-114
can be any combination of two or more aircraft (OH-58A/C, OH-58D, AH64A, AH-64D, or AH-1) assigned a mission.
1-8
Chapter 2
Battle Command
SECTION ICOMMAND AND CONTROL COMMAND AND CONTROL PROCESS
2-1. The C2 system provides the commander with the structure and means to make and convey decisions and to evaluate them continuously. The decisions and higher-level intent are then translated into productive actions. The decisions are based on the information derived from the C2 process, which consists of the following four steps: Acquire information. Assess whether any new actions are required. Determine what these actions should be. Direct subordinates to take appropriate actions.
2-1
FM 1-114
follow and influence operations and maintains communications with higher, lower, and adjacent units. 2-7. The commander must know the enemy; his organization, his weapon systems, and how he fights. He must know the terrain over which his unit will fight and the adjacent terrain the enemy may use to support or reinforce. The commander must be aware of the operational limitations of his unit. He ensures air and ground cavalry efforts are fully synchronized to accomplish the mission.
EXECUTIVE OFFICER
2-8. The XO is second in command and the principal assistant to the commander. He directs, supervises, and ensures coordination of staff work except in those specific areas reserved by the commander. During combat operations, the XO is positioned in the TOC and his duties are as follows: Directs and coordinates CS and ensures continuous CSS. Assisted by the operations sergeant, the XO maintains routine reporting, coordinates the activities of the liaison personnel, and always plans ahead. During lulls in the battle, the XO may go to the trains and personally determine the status of CSS operations. Remains current on the tactical situation and is prepared to assume command on a moments notice.
2-2
Chapter 2
Makes coordination for a squadron passage of lines. Leads the squadron advance and/or quartering party during a major movement. Assists in the CSS effort during the battle when the XO is in the TOC or forward.
ADJUTANT
2-10. The S1 has primary responsibility for all personnel matters. The S1 normally operates from the CTCP collocated with the S4. He shares supervisory responsibility for logistics with the S4. The S1 and S4 must cross-train to enable them to conduct continuous operations.
INTELLIGENCE OFFICER
2-11. The S2 is responsible for collecting and providing current information and analyzed intelligence of tactical value concerning terrain, weather, and enemy for all commanders and the staff to facilitate planning and execution of combat operations. The S2 performs the following functions: Converts the information requirements of the commander into PIR. Facilitates the IPB process. Participates in the development of the decision support template. Coordinates intelligence activities in the TOC. Frequently updates the XO on the enemy situation. Works closely with the FS element and assistant S3 to ensure information is passed throughout the staff.
OPERATIONS OFFICER
2-12. The S3 is responsible for matters pertaining to the organization, employment, training, and operations of the unit and supporting elements. He monitors the battle, ensures the necessary CS assets are provided when and where required, and anticipates developing situations. The S3, assisted by his operations sergeant and assistant, maintains routine reporting, coordinates the activities of liaison personnel, and is always planning ahead. The S3 ensures his soldiers and equipment are organized, trained, and maintained to support the XO in the TOC. The S3 maintains close coordination with the S4 for CSS status.
SUPPLY OFFICER
2-13. The S4 provides logistics information to the squadron commander. He functions as the squadrons logistics planner. He coordinates with troop first sergeants and XOs about status of equipment and supplies. He coordinates with supporting units and HHQ staffs to ensure logistics support is continuous. The S4 is in charge of the CTCP.
2-3
FM 1-114
CHAPLAIN
2-17. The chaplain and chaplain assistant compose the UMT. The UMT operates out of the combat trains. The UMT provides pastoral care, counseling, and advice to the commander on matters of religion, morale, and morals.
CHEMICAL OFFICER
2-18. The chemical officer advises the commander on NBC defensive operations, decontamination, smoke and/or obscurants, flame, and NBC reconnaissance operations. The chemical officer, assisted by an NCO, also serves as an assistant operations officer in addition to NBC duties. The chemical officer works directly for the S3 and is responsible for integrating NBC defense into all aspects of unit training.
SIGNAL OFFICER
2-19. The signal officer advises the commander on all signal matters, including the location of CPs, signal facilities, best uses of signal assets, and the use of signal activities for deception. He monitors the maintenance status of organic signal equipment, coordinates the preparation and distribution of the SOI, and supervises the communications security accounting activities.
ENGINEER OFFICER
2-20. The squadron engineer is the commander or leader of the DS, attached, or operationally controlled engineer unit supporting the squadron. Because of his duties, he cannot be at the squadron TOC continuously, but he is in
2-4
Chapter 2
the TOC during planning and is part of the orders group. He is the terrain expert and works closely with the S2 in the IPB process to develop an accurate detailed analysis of the effects of weather on terrain and how these effects impact on the mission. The engineer officer provides the commander and staff information on the enemys engineer capabilities. In the absence of an engineer unit, the S3 assumes responsibility for engineer functions.
2-5
FM 1-114
LIAISON OFFICER
2-24. LNOs are in the S3 section of the regiment and squadron. They represent the commander at the headquarters of another unit for effecting coordination and for promoting cooperation between the two units. Through personal contact, they facilitate the exchange of information and ensure mutual understanding and unity of purpose before, during, and after combat operations. LNOs operate from the TOC where they are normally briefed and debriefed by the XO or TOC shift leader.
SURGEON
2-27. The squadron surgeon advises and assists the commander on matters concerning the fighting strength of the command to include preventive, curative, and restorative care. He advises the commander on the combat health support of the command and of the medical threat present in the occupied or friendly territory within the commanders area of responsibility. He determines requirements for the requisition, procurement, storage, maintenance, distribution, management, and documentation of medical equipment and supplies. The regimental surgeon is normally located at the clearing station in the regimental support area. The squadron surgeon and the physicians assistant operate the squadron aid station located in the combat trains. The division cavalry surgeon is also a qualified flight surgeon.
2-6
Chapter 2
2-7
FM 1-114
Choose the team and/or troop COA upon contact with the enemy and controls the execution of the COA. Coordinate with GCTs or other maneuver units operating in the ACTs AO. Coordinate indirect fires and TACAIR support. Coordinate with attack helicopters and/or ground troop commanders for target and/or battle handover. Update higher commanders on the current situation and submit required reports. Synchronize arming and refueling operations effectiveness and mission accomplishment. for maximum
Ensure combat information is disseminated properly both during and after the mission. Conduct the mission debrief and/or AAR. 2-34. The wide range of responsibilities and tempo of coordination for support and integration of fires demands that the AMC delegate responsibilities among the crew members in the flight based on their individual skills and troop SOP. If not delegated, the complexity of the duties in a combat situation can easily lead to task saturation and significantly reduce the troops combat effectiveness.
PLATOON LEADERS
2-35. When the ACT conducts tactical operations, platoon leaders may serve as air mission commanders and/or team leaders based on experience. The most senior platoon leader may also serve as the troop XO, and assist in logistics and operational duties of the troop commander. 2-36. During planning, recovery, and AA operations the platoon leaders role focuses on preparation for the next mission. The platoon leader will Ensure that each platoon member is prepared for the mission. Monitor the fighter management status of platoon members. Interface with the troop maintenance officer and platoon sergeant to verify aircraft status and monitor the maintenance effort. Supervise unit movements.
2-8
Chapter 2
Advise the troop commander on platoon issues such as aircraft maintenance, personnel status, and CSS requirements.
TEAM LEADERS
2-37. The ACT team leaders are responsible to the troop platoon leader for the tactical employment of the team. Team size is dictated based on the nature of the mission. Team leader selection should be based on tactical experience. The team leader duties include Accomplishing the assigned mission. Planning mission at the team level. Providing personnel to man and supervising the work of the planning cells. Conducting mission brief for team level missions, if directed. Providing tactical control of the team, such as determining formations, ASE configuration settings (see appendix H for detailed instructions), movement techniques, assigning and prioritizing tasks, developing the situation, choosing COAs, and method and execution of weapons employment. Interfacing with higher and supported units. Being prepared to assume responsibility as the platoon leader and/or air mission commander.
FIRST SERGEANT
2-38. The 1SGs executes the squadrons CSS plan at troop level. He ensures the continuous operation of the CP. He coordinates medical, mess, supply, administrative, and personnel support with HHQ and subordinates. He also supervises AA activities and establishing the AA.
MAINTENANCE OFFICER
2-39. The troop maintenance officers coordinate the troops AVUM in addition to their operational flying duties. The use of a consolidated program with maintenance officers and platoon sergeants dividing work into shifts, maximizes the effectiveness of the work effort, supports the AA security plan, and ensures fighter management cycles for maintainers.
INSTRUCTOR PILOT
2-40. During tactical operations, the troop IPs recommend appropriate TTP for each mission. Additionally, they assist in the crew selection process and act as the commander's SME on employment of aircraft systems and weapons.
2-9
FM 1-114
SAFETY OFFICER
2-41. The SO monitors all troop operations to ensure safe operation and identify potential hazards. He assists the commander during the risk management process.
PILOT-IN-COMMAND
2-43. The PC is responsible for the operation and security of the aircraft they command. The PC must be tactically, as well as technically, proficient in the units METL.
2-10
Chapter 2
SUPPORT CELL 2-46. The support cell maintains unit status, receives and processes routine reports, and provides routine support to the TOC. The TOC NCOIC supervises this cell. FUTURE PLANS CELL 2-47. The future plans cell is activated as required to conduct planning for future operations. This cell consists of the tactical operations officer and/or battle captain, S2, FS NCO, NBC NCO, an S3 representative, and also includes all staff members involved in the military decision making process and orders preparation. 2-48. The TOC functions to sustain operations and will control the battle when the TAC CP is not employed. In addition, TOC personnel Plan for future operations. Collate information for the commander. Provide reports to HHQ. Coordinate with higher and adjacent units. Coordinate A2C2. Analyze information for immediate intelligence. Acquire CS and CSS and coordinate their functions. Coordinate requirements for protection of rear operations. Coordinate and direct CS and CSS functions with the tactical and rear CPs to ensure that forward operating elements sustain operations. 2-49. The S3 selects the site for the TOC considering the factors of METT-T and recommendations from the HHT commander and signal officer. This location must allow good communications with HHQ, subordinate troops, and supported units. The TOC should be near suitable vehicular routes. It should also be out of the range of enemy medium artillery and away from prominent terrain features that the enemy could use as target-reference points. The TOC must be able to relocate frequently and operate with minimal electronic signature for extended periods. It must be well camouflaged to enhance survivability. The TOC displaces in either a phased movement or a single movement. The latter method is possible when a fulltime TAC CP is employed. Communications with HHQ must be maintained at all times. Set up must be in the following phased manner: Battle tracking and/or controlling current battle. Security. Establish briefing area. Establish full TOC set up when situation permits.
2-11
FM 1-114
location other than the TOC. The TAC CP is limited in physical size and electronic signature and can displace rapidly and frequently. The flow of the operation and the desires of the commander dictate movement of the TAC CP. The TAC CP is composed of required personnel from the S2 and S3 sections and is normally the responsibility of the commander or S3. An FSO, a TACP, and ATS assets may also be located at the TAC CP. A standard arrangement of the TAC CP may be stated in the unit SOP. 2-51. The TAC CP must maintain communications with the TOC, the troops, and HHQ at all times. The normal mode of communications at the TAC CP is frequency modulation (secured). The TAC CP assists the commander in controlling current operations. TAC CP personnel Control maneuver forces. Coordinate JAAT operations. Analyze information for immediate intelligence. Control and coordinate immediately available FS. Communicate CSS requirements (Classes III and V) to the TOC. Coordinate with adjacent units and forward AD elements. Develop combat intelligence of immediate interest to the commander.
ALTERNATE AND REAR COMMAND POSTS, ASSEMBLY AREAS, AND FORWARD AREA ARMING AND REFUELING POINTS
2-52. The squadron commander may designate an alternate CP to ensure continuity of operations during displacements or in case of serious damage to the TOC. The alternate CP may be the TAC CP, or a subordinate troop headquarters. Provisions for an alternate headquarters are normally established in unit SOPs. 2-53. The rear CP, located with the squadron CTCP, provides the CS and CSS required to sustain the squadron. It may be located in the BSA, RSA, DSA, corps support area, or another area where major organizational support facilities are located. The squadron S1 and S4 sections operate from this area and coordinate all required support with the TOC. The ranking or otherwise designated individual, normally the squadron S4 or S1, is the rear CP commander. The squadron XO monitors the operations of the rear area. 2-54. Troops are located near the TOC in dispersed AAs. This arrangement allows rapid reaction to mission requirements and provides limited security for the TOC. The squadron CTCP serves as the rear CP and consists of HHT support elements, the AHT, and the AVUM. These elements compose the squadron combat trains and are disposed to the rear of the TOC. Although its actual location depends on METT-T, the rear CP is usually collocated with a higher support area. Under some circumstances, the squadron HHT commander can control the squadron field trains and rear CP. 2-55. The HHT establishes FARPs in forward AAs to support combat operations. The location of the FARPs also depends on METT-T. The squadron S3 is responsible for coordinating the location and displacement of FARPs, and the XO is responsible for tracking statuses. Normally, the FARPs consist of Class III and/or Class V (fuel and/or ammunition) support,
2-12
Chapter 2
ASSEMBLY AREAS
2-56. An ACT will likely be employed to perform reconnaissance of the squadron field trains area or the troop AA before occupation. The following items must be considered when a site is being selected: Overall suitability of terrain. (Be aware of man-made obstacles such as radio and/or TV towers and wires. These are critical factors when considering the amount of air traffic in and around the AA.) Site security and natural camouflage. Space for adequate dispersion of aircraft. Openings in the area to position aircraft and vehicles. Terrain that facilitates communications and water drainage. Access to ground routes to facilitate CSS operations for the squadron. Protection from indirect fires by reverse slope positioning and adequate distancing from enemy artillery.
2-13
FM 1-114
ground elements. However, it increases the signature of the CP and therefore the probability of attack. Therefore, those selecting an FAA close to a CP must ensure that the aircraft signature will be minimized. Otherwise, FAAs should be located away from CPs. Aircrews occupying the FAA will monitor radio traffic to keep abreast of the tactical situation. They can then respond quickly if needed by the ACT commander. 2-60. Activities in the FAA are limited. Aircrews check their aircraft for possible battle damage and take care of personal needs. The FAA is positioned to support the ACT based on METT-T. Primary consideration is given to the vulnerability of the FAA to enemy indirect fires. 2-61. The FAA may also be located in an urban area where aircraft can be hidden behind or in the shadows of large structures. The ACT commander considers air avenues of approach into the FAA. Visual and radar detection by the enemy must be prevented. Varying covered and concealed routes into the FAA will help to ensure that the enemy does not locate the FAA.
2-14
Chapter 2
RESPONSIBILITIES
COMMUNICATION RESPONSIBILITIES 2-65. All levels of command gain and maintain communications with the necessary headquarters and personnel. The traditional communications responsibilities are Subordinate to senior. A subordinate unit is responsible for establishing and maintaining communications with a senior unit. An attached unit of any size is considered subordinate to the command to which it is attached. Supporting to supported. A supporting unit is responsible for establishing and maintaining communications with the supported unit. Reinforcing to reinforced. A reinforcing unit is responsible for establishing and maintaining communications with the reinforced unit. Passage of lines. During passage of lines, either forward or rearward, the passing unit is responsible for establishing initial contact with the stationary unit. However, the primary flow of information must be from the unit of contact. LATERAL COMMUNICATIONS 2-66. Responsibility for establishing (lateral) communications between adjacent units may be fixed by the next higher commander or SOP. If responsibility is not fixed by orders, the commander of the unit on the left is responsible for establishing communications with the unit on the right. The commander of a unit positioned behind another unit establishes communications with the forward unit. RESTORATION 2-67. Regardless of the responsibility, all units take prompt action to restore lost communications.
MEANS OF COMMUNICATION
2-68. Cavalry uses the full spectrum of communications means. WIRE 2-69. Wire is normally used for communications within the CP, support areas, and AAs. It is the primary means of communication whenever the situation permits. MESSENGERS 2-70. Messengers are used between the CP, trains, and higher and lower headquarters. Although ground messengers are slower than other means of communications, air cavalry provides a rapid capability. Aviation messengers may be particularly useful in carrying A&L messages when en route to and from rear AAs. They can be used even if units are in contact and especially
2-15
FM 1-114
or
interception
hampers
frequency
modulation
2-71. Sound and visual signals are in the SOI or the unit SOP. Signals not included in the SOI may be established by SOP. The battlefield will have many sound and visual cues. Commanders and staff planners carefully determine how sound and visual signals will be used and authenticated. Sound and visual signals include pyrotechnics, hand-and-arm, flag, metalon-metal, rifle shot, whistles, and bells. COMMERCIAL LINES 2-72. Commercial lines are used when approved by HHQ. If the unit is forced to withdraw, and with the approval of HHQ, existing wire lines (including commercial lines) are cut and sections removed so the enemy cannot use them. RADIO 2-73. Cavalry operations normally depend on radio as the primary means of communication. This is particularly so during reconnaissance and security missions. Network discipline and SOP minimize needless traffic. To avoid detection by enemy direction finding equipment, cavalry uses all other means of communication to supplement the radio. Once in contact, the primary means of communication will be FM voice. Radio communications include electromagnetic communications in FM, HF, UHF, and VHF spectrums. If equipped with properly used SINCGARS radios, the enemy should not be able to DF or jam the unit's radio communications while using frequency hop capabilities.
2-16
Chapter 2
Figure 2-1. Main TOC Internal Wire Communications Network (Armored DCS)
2-17
FM 1-114
INTERNAL RADIO NETWORKS 2-75. Internal radio networks for the RAS are established and maintained primarily with FM, UHF, and VHF secured radios. The radio and station and/or network should be set as follows: FM#1 Secure - Squadron CMD, FM#2 Secure - Supported Unit and/or FS network and/or O&I, UHF (Have Quick II) - Troop Command, and VHF - Platoon CMD (nonsecure). The squadron commander usually communicates with his troop commanders on the squadron command network, which is FM secured. UHF- and VHFsecured radios are also used as backups for the FM-secured radio. The TOC uses the FM-secured radio to communicate with FARP elements and the squadron trains through the squadron A&L network. Communications may also be maintained with the FARP on the squadron command network. If possible the FARP should monitor the command network. If the A&L network is inoperable, the O&I network may be used as an alternative to communicate administrative and logistic requirements. Table 2-1 illustrates the RAS internal radio networks and Table 2-2 illustrates the DCS internal radio networks. Table 2-1. RAS Internal Radio Networks
STATION/ NETWORK
Sqdn Cmd Grp Sqdn TAC CP Sqdn TOC Sqdn CTCP
SQDN CMD FM
X N X X
SQDN CMD AM
X N
SQDN O&I FM
A X N O
SQDN A/L FM
A O N X A O/A X X X
SQDN FS FM
XI X N
ARTY FS (DIG)
XI X
TRP/ CO CMD FM
TRP FS FM
Sqdn Rear CP A Trp/Co Cdrs X O Troop CP X X X Trp/Co Plts Trp/Co 1SG FARP X HHT Cdr X N - Network control station X - Enter network. A - Enter network as required. O - Monitor. I - FSO operates on this network.
A A A X X
A O/A A
2-18
Chapter 2
STATION/ NETWORK
Cmd Grp TAC CP TOC CTCP Rear CP Sqdn Atchs Air Trp Gnd Trp Cdr Troop CP Plts FIST 1SG FARP Trp Atchs
SQDN CMD FM
X N2
SQDN O&I FM
A X N
SQDN A/L FM
A N O X X A A O/A
SQDN FS FM
X1 X N
ARTY FS (DIG)
X1 N
GND TRP FS FM
A A O/A
X X
A X N X
A X X X X
A A O/A X X X X
A N A A
N - Network control station X - Enter network. A - Enter network as required. O - Monitor. 1 - FSO operates on this network. 2 - When deployed command NCS.
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION 2-76. The regimental commander normally employs the RAS. The division commander normally employs the DCS. The squadron TOC is primarily responsible for maintaining communications with adjacent and subordinate units. When deployed, the squadron tactical CP may communicate directly with these units. If the situation or terrain prohibits direct contact by the TAC CP, the TOC may act as a communications relay. When his aircraft is airborne, the squadron commander may communicate directly with HHQ, adjacent units, and subordinate elements. Again, the primary means of communication is FM-secured radio. The TOC, TAC CP (if deployed), and squadron commander normally operate command and O&I networks with HHQ. HF radios are also used for communications with HHQ. Other external radio networks may be established with supporting elements such as FA, A2C2, and forces participating in JAAT operations. In the division cavalry, the squadron maintains communications with the aviation brigade to transmit CSS requirements and to keep the brigade informed of the squadron situation. When employed by the aviation brigade or another maneuver headquarters, the squadron maintains its command and O&I networks with the brigade's main CP. Table 2-3 illustrates the radio networks required of the RAS in the ACR networks and Table 2-4 illustrates the external radio networks required of the DCS.
2-19
FM 1-114
STATION/ NETWORK
Regt Cmd Grp Regt TAC CP Regt Main CP Regt Rear CP RAS * Support Sqdn Separate Trp/Co ACS Cmd Grp TAC CP TOC RS1/RS4 Rear CP X N X X X X X X X X
REGT CMD FM
A X N
REGT O&I FM
X N X X A
REGT A/L FM
REGT FS FM
A X N X A
REGT CMD AM
X N A A A A X A
X O/A X X X A
A X A
A X
N - Network control station X - Enter network. A - Enter network as required. O - Monitor. * - Enter the A2C2 network as required.
2-20
Chapter 2
STATION/ NETWORK
Cmd Grp * TAC CP * TOC * CTCP * Rear CP *
DIV O&I FM
X X2 X O
DIV ACU
X3 X3 X3 X3
DIV 2 2 AC FM
X3
STATION/ NETWORK
BRIGADE CONTROL BDE BDE DIV BDE O&I A/L ACU CMD FM FM FM
O/A X X O A O/A X4 X4 X
Cmd Grp * X TAC CP * X2 TOC * O/A CTCP * Rear CP * X - Enter network. A - Enter network as required. O - Monitor.
Notes: 1 - When performing rear operations. 2 - When deployed; otherwise TOC. 3 - Always active. 4 - Network of brigade providing area support. 5 - Division command FM is normally an on-call network. * - Enter the A2C2 network as required.
MOBILE SUBSCRIBER EQUIPMENT 2-77. The MSE system is the ACU voice and data communications system in the corps and division AO. It is the backbone of the corps and division communications system and provides voice and data communications from the corps rear boundary forward to the division maneuver battalion's main CP. This includes the RAS. The MSE integrates the functions of transmission, switching, control, COMSEC, and terminal equipment (voice and data) into one system. MSE provides the user with a switched telecommunications system extended by mobile radiotelephone and wire access. Users can communicate throughout the battlefield in either a mobile or static situation. The MSE consists of five functional areasarea coverage, wire subscriber access, mobile subscriber access, subscriber terminals, and system control.
2-21
FM 1-114
TROOP COMMUNICATIONS
RADIO AND WIRE 2-78. Communications are the key to successful C2 of the ACT. They are critical to mission accomplishment regardless of the assigned mission. The primary means of communication within the troop and squadron are two FM(SINCGARS), UHF, and VHF radios. The FM1 and/or FM2 SINCGARS radios are generally used to cover a wide array of radio networks. They may be used for digital traffic (situational awareness on the squadron command network), configured as a secure network for voice traffic to the squadron commander, ground cavalry commander, or as a digital TACFIRE network. UHF Have Quick II is the primary network for internal troop operations and for TACAIR. VHF is used as a secondary network for air-to-air communications, and flight following. 2-79. The digital situational awareness network is a radio network designated primarily for the constant transmission of digital information on the battlefield. Digital information traffic along with digital communications shares the network. The squadron AMPS is the network hub at squadron level. Each of the troop AMPS link to the Squadron AMPS using a TCIM. The aircrews link to the network using the ATHS in the aircraft. The squadron AMPS collects SPOTREP, SIT and/or STAT, and BDA reports, and broadcasts updated enemy situation graphics and friendly position graphics. Subscribers can display this information using their company AMPS, aircraft digital map, or HSD. 2-80. To ensure that squadron command directives are met and the ACT is supported by CS and CSS assets, the troop first sergeant monitors both the squadron command network and the administrative and logistics network. 2-81. Logistics and supply operations that demand squadron support are coordinated on the A&L network. 2-82. ACTs have neither the wire nor the field telephone assets to link platoons to a troop network. When the troop is dispersed as in Figure 2-3, lack of wire communications can lead to slow reaction times. To overcome this, a runner can be designated to alert the platoons. In Figure 2-4, troop personnel are closely assembled rather than dispersed. This method should only be used in the squadron field trains area or in a BSA because of the inherent risk of losing those personnel all at once in an unexpected attack.
2-22
Chapter 2
Figure 2-4. Troop Closely Assembled NETWORK DIAGRAM 2-83. Division of radio networks within the team and/or troop is a critical task. The use of the FM1 for digital situational awareness with the squadron AMPS makes it a critical network to keep clear. This network keeps the squadron battle staff's moving map updated with the locations of all aircraft on the mission as it develops.
2-23
FM 1-114
2-84. The three major FM users in the squadron must be divided between all aircraft on the mission. The AMC must monitor the squadron command voice network. The team leader normally takes the GCT commander in sector, and one aircraft per team may be designated to link into the TACFIRE network. REPORTING PROCEDURES 2-85. Managing the flow of information is another critical task. Multitudes of techniques exist for this information flow. Digital networks present certain advantages coupled with complex C2 problems. Squadrons using an AMPS with a TCIM should direct crews to send SPOTREPs, BDA, and SIT and/or STAT reports digitally to take advantage of the AMPS position reporting capability and its ability to instantly portray critical combat information. 2-86. The situation (METT-T) and commanders intent will dictate the routing of digital information. 2-87. Digital traffic is commonly routed through the normal chain of command within the troop prior to being relayed to squadron to keep the team leader and AMC informed on all the combat information. However, depending on the volume of traffic, this technique tends to overload team leaders with routine reading, readdressing, and sending information while trying to perform their own duties in the reconnaissance or screening effort. This also increasingly ties up the digital network with messages being sent and resent during times with large numbers of contacts. 2-88. To reduce traffic on the digital network is to direct crews to report combat information directly to squadron, with a short voice SALT report (brevity is the concern and the reason for not using SALUTE) to the team leader and/or AMC on UHF internal. This keeps the combat information flowing rapidly to the squadron commander and minimizes the possibility of the team leader and/or troop commanders ATHS buffer from becoming overloaded and losing critical information. 2-89. In the event that aircrews conducting tactical operations are unable to transmit digitally to squadron due to LOS limitations, the AMC may elect to act as a digital retransmission, and collect digital reports for resubmission to squadron. This decision may restrict the AMCs ability to maneuver as desired but keeps critical lines of communication open and allows the troop to accomplish the mission. 2-90. Video imagery sent using Video Xlink requires the transmitting aircraft to address the image directly to the squadron AMPS where it will be linked to the spot report icon shown on the moving map display. In a situation where video imagery is required from the troop and direct digital communication is impossible, the only viable means for mission accomplishment may be the establishment of a permanent airborne or ground based retransmission station.
2-24
Chapter 2
OPERATIONS SECURITY
2-91. All measures taken to deny the enemy information about friendly forces and operations are called OPSEC. The OPSEC concept includes all security measures that allow units to achieve and maintain surprise. OPSEC consists of physical security, information security, signal security, deception, and countersurveillance. Since these categories are interrelated, the ACT commander normally chooses to employ multiple techniques to counter a threat. He analyzes hostile intelligence efforts and vulnerabilities, executes OPSEC countermeasures, and surveys the effectiveness of countermeasures. The troop commander can then counter specific hostile intelligence efforts. Aviation OPSEC is described in more detail in FMs 1-100 and 1-111. Some considerations for OPSEC include Downed aircraft destruction procedures. Power settings for FM radio transmissions. Radio communications restrictions (digital, KY, SINCGARS). Light usage (aircraft lighting, AA light discipline, IR searchlight). Staggered departures from TAA and/or FAA.
2-93. The electronic transmission of messages and documents may not be possible because of nuclear weapons or munitions employment or enemy jamming operations. The air cavalry may be used to deliver messages and documents in these cases or when radio listening silence is imposed or equipment is inoperable. Messages include combat plans and orders, written coordination and control measures, and graphics. Documents delivered include critical reports or reports essential for sustaining combat operations. They also include public affairs materials required to sustain public understanding and support for the Army's continued operations.
2-25
FM 1-114
2-26
Chapter 2
VIXL. The VIXL provides the KW with the capability to send and receive still frame images over one of the FM radios. The VIXL consists of a circuit card installed in the IMCPU. VIXL ground stations will consist of an AMPS with a TCIM and a SINCGARS radio. The ground stations will be used to provide VIXL images in TOCs on the ground. IMSP. The IMSP is a direct replacement for the existing MSP in the KW. The IMSP provides enhanced targeting through Improved tracking, lock-on, and reacquisition. TVS) and/or TIS split screen (provides TV and TIS images on the same display page). Auto cue (detects and highlights moving targets). Multiple target tracking (tracks up to six targets within the system FOV).
2-27
FM 1-114
postmission downloading of LBA and KW aircraft data for maintenance personnel. 2-103. AMPS data may be saved onto a DTC that is used to upload mission data to the host aircraft (LBA and OH-58D KW) via the data transfer module. The data created at squadron level are given to the troop level for detailed troop and/or platoon planning. Printed (hard copy) output products include weight and balance forms, strip maps, flight plans, OPORDs, route navigation cards, and communications cards. 2-104. AMPS map data bases are created from ADRG CD-ROM and DTED media available from the NIMA. The maps contained on the CD-ROMs are digitally cut and pasted for a particular AO and stored for ready access on the magneto optical drive disks or the AMPS hard drive. Databases of different AOs or various scale maps can be maintained and organized on disks. NOTE: DTED levels are identified as 1 through 5. At DTED Level 5, AMPS does not have sufficient storage or processing power for detailed terrain analysis. 2-105. AMPS can be used for detailed terrain analysis, for example, intervisibility LOS between a battle position and an EA. Using the perspective view feature, pilots can gain a feel for prominent terrain along the route to be flown. 2-106. AMPS is an additional automation tool that the aviation commander and staff have to manage battlefield information. AMPS is not a C2 system. It is a mission planner that applies the technical capabilities of modern aircraft to the tactical situation on the battlefield. AMPS and MCS are complimentary systems. MCS receives and transfers enemy locations, friendly locations, preplanned artillery locations, and forecast weather to AMPS. AMPS applies the technical characteristics of the aircraft (speed, range, and payload) to give the commander mission alternatives. AMPS also provides the digital transfer device to move this information to the onboard computers to initialize systems on selected aircraft. At the end of a mission, the mission history is downloaded to AMPS. Postmission products such as enemy locations and battle damage assessment can be provided to MCS to update the tactical situation. AMPS will also be used (with a TCIM) to view VIXL imagery sent from the KW.
2-28
Chapter 2
2-29
FM 1-114
tracking via split screen target track in both TIS and TVS modes. It is able to track up to six targets simultaneously. Target detection is aided by moving target detection and automatic reacquisition of targets lost due to obstruction. 2-115. With VIXL, the KW transmits still video images to the commander (via an appropriately equipped AMPS) at any time during the mission. These images are supplemented with supporting voice and/or embedded message comments on NAI, TAIs, EEI, PIR, and CCIR. The KW can act as a photograph and/or HUMINT source with which the commander can clarify his picture of the battlefield. Unlike UAVs, the KW can provide the ability to immediately maneuver and develop the situation with direct and indirect fires. VIXL is used when near real-time images are required for decision support. When immediate images are not required, and imagery will be reviewed at a later time, a more efficient method is for the KWs to video tape the areas of interest. VIXL-use criteria should be part of mission planning and crew briefing. 2-116. The ASAS-RWS should be used to receive any possible enemy locations, these locations should then be sent to the aircraft to conduct the reconnaissance. The ground commander should coordinate with the aviation commander to have areas of interest reconnoitered. The aircraft then pass this information to the commander in the AVTOC or C2 aircraft and ground commander by voice over secure communications. SPOTREPs and SITREPs should be sent to the commander every 10 to 15 minutes regardless of the situation. A report of "no enemy contact" or "continuing mission" can be just as informative as a report of positive enemy locations. 2-117. The position of the commander is METT-T dependent. If enemy contact is likely, the commander may be in the C2 aircraft to readily employ the air assets and receive and/or send information to HHQ. If enemy contact is not likely, the commander may remain in the AVTOC and develop the situation of the reconnaissance as reports are received. 2-118. To sustain the reconnaissance over long periods of time, FARPs must be established and moved frequently to support the operations. With the AMPS new FARP locations are graphically viewed for favorable ground conditions and proper concealment. After the locations are determined, the new grid locations are passed to the aircraft conducting the reconnaissance. The LBA and KW can plot the new locations in the aircraft to appear on the aircraft's map display to assist with navigation. Coordination with FARP and CTCP personnel is conducted via the Appliqu. 2-119. Reconnaissance objectives and/or missions should be tape recorded for subsequent review and analysis. 2-120. If available, UAVs may be used to precede (focus), complement (simultaneous), or confirm (follow-on) aircraft reconnaissance efforts.
2-30
Chapter 2
dispersion, which equates to survivability, stealth, and greater coverage. These must be weighed against factors such as with greater distance soft targets may go undetected. Passage of lines coordination may also be complicated by the dispersion of multiple teams rather than the coordinated movement of platoon or troop formations. However, digital connectivity aids ground and/or air situation continuity. 2-122. The increased lethality and sensor capabilities of the LBA may reduce the number of assets required to provide security over a given area. Dispersion will be limited by LOS radios and/or FCR coverage (overlapping coverage). KWs used in the security role have non-LOS radios for communications over extended ranges; however, dispersion will also be limited by sensor connectivity. In either case, the ATF is not able to hold terrain with its organic assets, but can dominate a larger area given the same number of assets than a nondigitized force. Decreased reliance on visual detection and the ability to leverage theater assets for enemy detection, cueing, and tracking shifts security operations from terrain orientation to force orientation.
2-31
FM 1-114
AH-64D IN REAR OPERATIONS 2-127. Rear area operations are particularly susceptible to varying levels of attack. The threat could be a Level-I raid into a supply area where LBA ground targeting would be of limited value because of the chaotic situation and intermingling of friendly and enemy forces. On the other extreme the threat could be a break through element in an area isolated from friendly forces. In this situation a LBA unit could rapidly strike the armor formation. The FCR is also of great value in locating enemy en route to their objectives.
2-32
Chapter 3
Employment
SECTION ITASK ORGANIZATION GENERAL
3-1. This chapter describes the employment of the RAS, DCS, and their associated ACTs in the execution of their primary missionsreconnaissance and security operations. In addition to conducting reconnaissance and security operations, the squadron enhances and conducts special-purpose, JAAT, and air combat operations. It also assists in the passage of lines.
3-1
FM 1-114
3-8. Based on a 75-percent availability rate for planning, the ACT will have six aircraft operational. Considering the factors of METT-T, the troop commander can organize in several ways. The troop can either be divided into ACTMs of two aircraft or by platoons. 3-9. Teams of two use the wingman concept. The lead aircraft is primarily responsible for the reconnaissance and the wingman for the protection of the aircraft conducting the reconnaissance or security mission. Relief on station is conducted by another team. The following situations favor using teams of two: Close terrain that does not allow full standoff capability. Threat that is mostly dismounted. Widely separated NAIs or other reconnaissance objectives. 3-10. Using platoons allow for a wider frontage to be covered. Aircraft still maintain contact with other platoon members and provide mutually supporting fields of observation. The platoon leader rotates individual aircraft to and from the FARP. The following situations favor the use of platoons: Open terrain that makes use of standoff capability. Threat that is mostly mechanized or armor. Wider frontages with multiple NAIs. Greater than 1.5 hour employment periods.
3-2
Chapter 3
AHT commander organizes his assets on a mission-by-mission basis. Rarely will the AHT operate as a whole, and often elements of the AHT will be under the DS of a squadron to conduct missions. 3-15. The Armored RAS and divisional GSAB have 4 EH-60 Quickfix helicopters assigned. The 4 EH-60s in the armored RAS are organic to the HHT. During combat these aircraft will normally be under operational control of an MI company and will receive missions directly from that company. The EH-60 Quickfix gives the commander the capability to direction find, monitor selected frequencies, and jam.
EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
3-16. The ACR, division, or corps commander and squadron commanders have a number of options available to them when employing ACTs. Options of employing troops in attack or R&S mode must be weighed carefully against the METT-T requirements. Some possible options followed by advantages and disadvantages are noted below (these listed options are not all inclusive)(see Table 1-1, below).
R&S
Advantages 24-hour operations. Best benefit gained from acquisition systems. Supports ground commander R&S tasks. Provides greatest reaction and maneuver space. High concentration of air cavalry throughout sector. Optimal Class III and/or Class V support. Limited counterattack capability.
Attack
24-hour operations. Dedicated counterattack force. Maximum offensive operations.
Disadvantages
No dedicated R&S which is Limited 24-hour operations. their primary mission. Smaller sector of attack and No ground commander R&S coverage. support of R&S tasks. Limited early warning and reaction time provided by aviation. Increased III and/or V usage based on attack missions. OH-58D has limited firepower and crew protection compared to AHs. NOTE: Sustained 24-hour operations greater than 72 hours is impacted by maintenance and fighter management.
3-3
FM 1-114
FUNDAMENTALS
3-21. The air cavalry conducts reconnaissance according to six fundamentals. These fundamentals are as follows: Orient on the location or movement of the reconnaissance objective. The objective may be a terrain feature, a locality, or an enemy force. Air cavalry must orient on the objective and position itself to retain freedom of maneuver. Report all information rapidly and accurately. Information that initially appears unimportant may become valuable when used with other information. Knowing that an enemy force is not in one location
3-4
Chapter 3
can be just as important as knowing it is in another. Reconnaissance reports must be relayed in a timely manner for the information to be useful to the commander. Retain freedom to maneuver. Air cavalry must move to survive. It obtains information by stealth, when possible, but fights as necessary to accomplish the mission. Overwatch, suppressive fire, cunning, and constant awareness of the tactical situation to the flanks help retain freedom to maneuver. The air cavalry commander maneuvers his elements to avoid decisive engagement. Once engaged, the air cavalry will lose some of its capability to continue the reconnaissance. Therefore, air cavalry engagements during reconnaissance operations consist only of those actions required to prevent decisive engagements and to continue the reconnaissance mission. Gain and maintain enemy contact. Contact reduces the enemy's ability to achieve surprise. Once contact is made, it is not voluntarily broken; orders must be received to break contact. The air cavalry may be the first friendly element that establishes contact with the enemy. Once the air cavalry establishes contact, it reports the information immediately. The air cavalry commander should be continually updated on the tactical situation. The air cavalry may maintain visual contact from a great distance, or it may engage with organic and/or attached AH fire. The degree of contact desired is determined before the mission begins. Ensure maximum reconnaissance forces forward. The maximum number of intelligence-gathering assets and their capabilities are involved in the reconnaissance effort. Air cavalry is most valuable when it is providing essential battlefield information. To do this, it must be positioned as far forward as METT-T factors allow. It operates at a distance supported by CS and CSS assets. Develop the situation rapidly. When the enemy situation is vague or unknown, the air cavalry deploys to gather information for the supported commander. Immediately on gaining enemy contact, it deploys to cover, maintains observation, and reports and develops the situation. It develops the situation based on the tactical order, unit SOP, or the directions of the commander.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
3-22. The air mission commander verifies the location of the FARP, active times, and Class III and/or Class V availability during mission planning. The squadron S4 and III and/or V platoon leader are responsible for all FARP operations in support of the ACTs mission. Refueling and rearming times and the requirement to maintain continuous operations dictate the FARPs location. The air mission commander must maintain close coordination with the squadron and possibly other aviation brigade elements in the area, to ensure that the location of the FARP supports the reconnaissance mission. When possible, FARP operations should be part of the mission rehearsal.
3-5
FM 1-114
3-23. ASE and/or EW considerations must be part of the mission planning process to minimize risks while accomplishing the mission. Detailed instructions are contained in Appendix H.
CAPABILITIES
3-24. Air cavalrys ability to conduct reconnaissance is a function of the enemy situation (especially enemy ADA and direct fire systems), terrain in the AO, weather conditions, and the logistics support availability. 3-25. An ACT can reconnoiter two routes simultaneously. It can conduct a zone reconnaissance on 8-10 kilometer-wide zone (terrain dependent). An ACT can conduct a zone reconnaissance at a rate of 10 kilometers per hour (terrain dependent).
METHODS OF RECONNAISSANCE
3-26. The three methods of reconnaissance at the ACT level are aerial, reconnaissance by fire, and dismounted. The air mission commander and/or team leader may use any method or combination of methods to accomplish the reconnaissance mission under the considerations of METT-T, and the higher commanders intent and guidance. Aerial reconnaissance may also include conducting coordinated reconnaissance forward of a GCT. When conducting reconnaissance forward of ground troops, coordination must take place to prevent fratricide. AERIAL RECONNAISSANCE 3-27. The ACT uses this technique in most of its reconnaissance efforts. It is characterized by The need for rapid reconnaissance. The use of aircraft TIS and/or TVS systems to acquire targets and/or reconnaissance objectives at the maximum standoff distance. Use of onboard video imagery to acquire the combat information. Low probability of enemy ADA threat. The need to clear the area forward of the ground cavalry to accelerate the reconnaissance tempo. The requirement to maintain reconnaissance over extended distances. (Circumstances and/or terrain may preclude the use of ground cavalry to execute missions, forcing the air cavalry to maintain a presence in an AO.) RECONNAISSANCE BY FIRE 3-28. When conducting reconnaissance by fire the troop and/or team places direct and/or indirect fire on positions the enemy is suspected of occupying. If using the OH-58D with ordnance for direct fire, more FARP rotations are required. The intent of the action is to cause the enemy to disclose his presence by moving or returning fire. The commander may use reconnaissance by fire when Situation meets strict engagement criteria.
3-6
Chapter 3
Time is critical. Encountering obstacles that could be overwatched by an enemy. An enemy position is suspected. Enemy locations are known. 3-29. The technique has advantages and disadvantages. It is more advantageous with a poorly disciplined enemy that will likely react when engaged. The disadvantages of reconnaissance by fire are the obvious loss of surprise, exposing the location of the firing element, and the possibility of becoming decisively engaged. Requires more frequent FARP rotations. 3-30. Once the decision is made to employ this technique, the weapons should be used in the following priority: indirect fire, machine gun and/or rockets, (Hellfire) missiles. The limited organic firepower in an ACT emphasizes the use of indirect fire as the primary means of engagement. DISMOUNTED RECONNAISSANCE 3-31. The ACT commander may direct aircrews to conduct dismounted reconnaissance in extreme circumstances when information is required on a specific reconnaissance objective. This technique is time intensive, can place the aircraft in a vulnerable position, and does not make the best use of aircraft systems.
3-7
FM 1-114
Bounding overwatch. The bounding overwatch technique is also normally used when conducting reconnaissance and enemy contact is expected. It is the slowest movement technique and requires the overwatching and bounding aircraft to occupy successive positions that offer observation and fields of fire. Each aircraft bounds separately while the other aircraft overwatches the movement. Length of the bound depends on the terrain, visibility, and the effective range of the overwatching weapon system. Overwatch. Overwatch includes both observation and suppression. The overwatching aircraft, in its concealed position, continues to observe the area as well as the moving or bounding aircraft. Primarily, the overwatching aircraft enhances the survivability of the bounding aircraft by alerting the team member of an enemy sighting or suspicious activity. If the enemy is contacted, the overwatching aircraft assists by providing suppressive fire if needed. Reporting. Reports of direct visual observation are the most important and timely combat information available. Therefore, reports must be accurate, concise, and timely. Reports of no enemy sightings are as equally important as actual enemy sightings. 3-33. When tasked to conduct reconnaissance operations the ACT can split its area into team zones depending on METT-T. Use of waypoints on the HSD to visually define the reconnaissance zone simplifies the reconnaissance effort. Use of the MMS to prepoint NAIs at maximum standoff and overwatch team and/or troop members adds depth to the zone. 3-34. When an ACT conducts a zone reconnaissance to a screen in nonrestrictive terrain, the troop can operate up to 10 kilometers forward of ground troops due to the quality of communications, target acquisition capability MMS, and onboard armament of its aircraft. Close coordination and continuous communication between forces is critical to preventing the possibility of fratricide. 3-35. Because of its ability to conduct long range observation, the ACT is placed forward, and if possible, to the flanks of ground elements, adding depth to the commanders zone. To increase operational tempo, the ACT focuses its reconnaissance effort on areas that impede ground cavalry movement (battalion avenues of approach or likely enemy reconnaissance and/or infiltration routes).
ACTIONS ON CONTACT
3-36. Actions on enemy contact are a series of steps the troop takes when it encounters an enemy force or situation that warrants or demands action. Actions on contact are important because they allow the troop to maintain its tempo of operation by rapidly developing the situation and taking action before the enemy can gain the initiative and force the troop to react. At troop, platoon, or team level, actions on enemy contact consist of the following four steps: Deploy to cover and report.
3-8
Chapter 3
Maintain contact and develop the situation. Choose a COA. Recommend or execute a COA. 3-37. While the team that makes contact executes actions on contact, the AMC must continue to maneuver the remainder of the troop to ensure a clear picture of the enemy situation across the entire troop front. The following steps demonstrate the actions taken by the team in contact and the corresponding actions at the troop level: Deploy to Cover and Report 3-38. Team Action. The team that makes initial contact with the enemy immediately deploys to terrain that affords them both cover and good observation. If necessary, the team returns fire to suppress the enemy, and then deploys to a covered position and reports (digital). 3-39. Troop Action. All other team leaders monitor the contact report. The AMC assesses the information and maneuvers to a position to monitor the action. However, the troop must not lose focus on the reconnaissance mission. Maintain Contact and Develop the Situation 3-40. Team Action. The team in contact further identifies the threat. The team maneuvers to determine the enemys size, composition, and orientation, and the exact location of weapon systems. The team may also use reconnaissance by fire to determine the enemys tactical intentions. The reconnaissance-by-fire technique should, however, be conducted with indirect-fire assets when possible to avoid revealing the aircrews position. The ACT and/or AMC needs to establish indirect and/or direct fire control measures to control fires. To determine if the enemy can be supported by any other forces, the team should search for enemy flanks and all adjacent terrain. They identify good counterattack routes into the flanks or rear of the enemy. Once the team leader determines the extent of the situation, he forwards a follow-up spot report (digital). 3-41. Troop Action. The AMC will most likely tell the team not in contact to continue its reconnaissance to a designated LOA to develop the situation across the entire troop front. By doing this, the troop can determine if there are any other enemy forces in the area that will affect the situation. The team not in contact will establish hasty OPs along the LOA oriented on likely enemy locations or avenues of approach. Choose a Course of Action 3-42. Team Action. Once the enemy situation has been developed, the team leader selects the best COA within the commanders intent, concept of the operation and the teams capabilities. Resuming the mission as soon as possible is normally the main criteria for COA selection. The possible COA may be Hasty attack. The team leader can conduct a hasty attack if the target meets the engagement criteria for the mission and the team possesses sufficient combat power to defeat the enemy quickly. In most cases the
3-9
FM 1-114
team does not have the capability to defeat an enemy in prepared positions and is normally under specific instructions not to become decisively engaged. Bypass. If the team chooses to remain undetected and continue the reconnaissance mission, the team may maneuver to bypass the enemy. The team leader must receive the AMCs permission (either verbally or as stated in the OPORD) to bypass any elements. Unless directed otherwise, the team leader should leave an aircrew in contact with the enemy until conducting a BHO. Hasty screen. If the team cannot conduct a hasty attack and cannot bypass, it establishes a hasty screen and maintains contact through observation. The team concentrates on maintaining contact with the enemy and fixing it in place with indirect or possibly direct fire until additional support comes from the troop or other unit. Support by another team. The team in contact may support a BHO for a hasty attack by another team or an ATKHT, if available. 3-43. Troop Action. The AMC must approve or disapprove the recommended COA, based on its effect on the troop and squadron mission. The overriding considerations in selecting a COA are the intent of the squadron commander and the troops ability to complete the mission with minimum losses. The decision to conduct a hasty attack requires the AMC and/or team leader to conduct hasty attack planning. This planning should consist of the following: Select an ABF or SBF position. Define the EA. Define the target. Determine the method of engagement. Establish criteria for success. Establish a trigger point. Divide the EA for troop and/or team level fire coordination and establishing control measures for direct and/or indirect fire planning. Coordinate for CAS, JAAT, and artillery. Plan the BHO. Coordinate the change to CSS requirements, i.e., adjust weapons loads, adjust relief-on-station rotation. Deconflict direct and indirect fires with ground troops.
ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE
3-44. A route reconnaissance is conducted to obtain information about a specific route and all adjacent terrain from which the enemy could influence movement along the route. The reconnaissance may be oriented on a road, an axis, an air route, or a general direction of advance or attack. The squadron normally does not conduct a route reconnaissance. The route reconnaissance is usually conducted as part of a zone reconnaissance. The
3-10
Chapter 3
mission is best accomplished by employing ACTMs with ground cavalry teams. ACTMs and ground cavalry teams gather information about the designated route and all adjacent terrain from which an enemy could engage friendly forces with direct fires. ACTMs begin the operation and reconnoiter adjacent terrain to the front, flanks, and rear providing early warning, uncover ambushes, and provide overwatch so that the ground cavalry team can concentrate on conducting a reconnaissance of the route. The ACTM may periodically dismount to physically inspect key terrain, if the situation allows. Command of the route reconnaissance will normally be assigned to the ground force because they do not rotate crews like aviation, instead they remain on station. Further information on route reconnaissance is in FM 5170. Figure 3-1 shows the troop graphics for a route reconnaissance.
3-11
FM 1-114
Figure 3-1. Troop Graphics for a Route Reconnaissance 3-45. The following critical tasks are for a route reconnaissance: Reconnoiter all terrain the enemy can use to dominate movement along the route. Reconnoiter all terrain within the zone, assist scout platoon(s) with built-up areas. Locate sites for constructing hasty obstacles to impede enemy movement. Reconnoiter all defiles along the route for possible ambush sites and locate a bypass. Locate a bypass around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas. Find and report all enemy that can influence movement along the route. Report route information. 3-46. Before conducting a route reconnaissance, the air cavalry element must know certain information about the route. This information includes Critical tasks to be accomplished by ACTM and scout platoon, when used. Any tasks that may be deleted during the reconnaissance are identified. Task organization. Any reinforcements, especially engineers, and their relationship to the troop are identified. Supporting artillery relationships are also defined. SP, RP, and designation of the route. Mission to be performed to the SP and after reaching the RP. Time the mission is to start and, if required, to be completed. Critical points along the route identified as checkpoints. IPB information on the route and enemy situation. Any constraints or restrictions. Expected weather conditions for the time of movement. Type of unit or vehicles expected to use the route, if applicable. Time of day or night the route is expected to be used, if applicable. 3-47. When time is not available, scout platoon assets are not available, or the mission does not require detailed information, cavalry assets may have to conduct a hasty route reconnaissance. In this case, information gathering is limited to the type of route (X--unlimited or all weather, Y--limited or fair weather, or Z--poor weather) and obstacle limitations (maximum weight, height, and width). The commander may also identify certain additional information that must be gathered. 3-48. ACTM(s) and scout platoon(s) should keep records on all routes reconnoitered. Several methods are acceptable for recording this information. One method is to assign each key terrain feature (bridge,
3-12
Chapter 3
fording site, bypass site) a number on the map and detail the intelligence information on a separate work sheet. This method ensures completeness and simplicity and reduces map clutter. 3-49. The use of the AVTR or Video Xlink to record areas of interest along the route provides superior combat information to the requesting headquarters. If the AVTR is used, planning must be conducted to return the 8mm tape to the requesting headquarters and crews must use a standardized video reconnaissance technique to clearly associate terrain with the targets portrayed on the video image. If phototelesis (the sending of real time or still frames of video) is used, the squadron AMPS operator may print the video image and transmit the image by fax or courier to the using headquarters. 3-50. The principles of an air route reconnaissance are the same as for a route reconnaissance except that the areas of interest are different. Aviation forces moving along an air route are primarily concerned with the location of enemy forces, ease of navigation, suitability of landing sites and zones, and hazards to flight. Hazards to flight include suspected enemy AD locations, mountainous areas, wires, large bodies of water, open terrain, and other natural and man-made features.
ZONE RECONNAISSANCE
3-51. A zone reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain information concerning all routes, obstacles (to include chemical or radiological contamination), terrain, and enemy forces within a zone defined by boundaries. The boundaries of a zone are restrictive, unlike those of an area reconnaissance, which are permissive. ACTMs require permission from the ground commander to extend their reconnaissance outside of the zones boundaries. It is the most time-consuming of the reconnaissance missions. The purpose may be to find the enemy or suitable avenues of approach for the main body. A zone reconnaissance is normally conducted when information on cross-country trafficability is desired or when the enemy situation is in doubt. Every route within the zone must be reconnoitered unless otherwise directed. The zone to be reconnoitered is defined by lateral boundaries, a LD, and an objective or LOA. 3-52. Certain tasks must be accomplished during a zone reconnaissance unless specifically directed otherwise by the commander. Based on time and the commander's intent, the cavalry commander may direct the reconnaissance towards specific information only. The following critical tasks are for a zone reconnaissance: Find and report all enemy forces within the zone. Reconnoiter specific terrain within the zone and assist scout platoon(s) with built-up areas. Report reconnaissance information. Reconnoiter all terrain within the zone and assist scout platoon(s) with built-up areas.
The commander, time permitting, may also direct the ACTM to accomplish this critical task.
3-13
FM 1-114
Find suitable covered and concealed air avenues of approach.* Determine significant adverse weather. Locate a bypass around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.* Inspect and classify all bridges, overpasses, underpasses, and culverts within the zone.* Locate fords and crossing sites near all bridges in the zone.* Locate all mines, obstacles, and barriers in the zone within its capability and assist ground cavalry units in their clearance.* 3-53. The squadron, depending on time and the commanders intent, normally conducts a zone reconnaissance by employing ACTMs in concert with scout platoons. The ACTMs can perform the zone reconnaissance with or without support from scout platoons. The ATKHTs or OPCON AH company, if available, can be held in reserve or if time is critical they can support the zone reconnaissance effort using their onboard sensors (TIS, FLIR, FCR, and video recorder). The commander assigns boundaries between elements to specify zones of responsibility. Sectors should be near easily recognizable terrain features such as roads, streams, and prominent structures. After establishing zones, the unit designates an LD and specifies a crossing time. PLs, contact points, coordination points, and checkpoints ease essential coordination between adjacent elements. PLs are established as needed to control and coordinate forward movement. Failure to keep reconnaissance elements abreast may result in the bypass of enemy elements, envelopment by enemy forces, or engagement of friendly forces. Like boundaries, PLs should generally follow features that are easy to recognize, particularly for night operations or periods of limited visibility (smoke, haze, fog). Contact points are designated on boundaries to ensure physical coordination between adjacent elements. Contact points are designated at Points that ensure proper coverage of the zone. Critical points (such as, a route crossing from one troop sector into another). Points that ease movement, lateral coordination of fires or positions, passage of lines, or logistics support. 3-54. Troops report crossing PLs but do not stop unless ordered to do so. Once the operation begins, the enemy may be alerted. Forward momentum should be maintained to gain and maintain enemy contact and to keep the enemy off balance. The zone is systematically reconnoitered from the LD to the objective or LOA. Figure 3-2 shows the graphics for a RAS zone reconnaissance. Figure 3-3 shows the graphics for a division cavalry troop zone reconnaissance.
3-14
Chapter 3
The commander, time permitting, may also direct the ACTM to accomplish this critical task.
3-15
FM 1-114
Figure 3-3. Graphics for a Division Cavalry Troop Zone Reconnaissance 3-55. If enemy contact is made, ACTMs maintain contact, report, and develop the situation. Reconnaissance forces may be instructed to bypass, engage and destroy, or maintain contact until an AH or ground maneuver unit arrives to engage. The squadron may direct specific engagements and/or bypass criteria for the ACTs. To ensure continuity of effort, the squadron designates the forward movement of the operation and tells each element what to do after mission completion. If the squadron is not given a follow-on mission, the ACTMs should be assigned objectives on dominant terrain to maintain surveillance and ensure enemy situation in zone remains as reported. In addition to reporting significant activities in the zone, the ACTMs report all appropriate control measures (PLs, checkpoints, contact points). 3-56. Generally, when working with a ground troop, the ACT will perform a well coordinated zone reconnaissance forward of the ground troop and will reconnoiter terrain not assessable to the ground troop. If time is critical, the ACTM may perform the zone reconnaissance alone with the understanding that the combat information obtained will be less detailed. 3-57. The air mission commander uses multiple teams to conduct a zone reconnaissance. Team leaders are assigned the responsibility for planning the reconnaissance within the team sectors. Team leaders select the method of reconnaissance, the mode of terrain flight, and movement technique based on the IPB with specific emphasis on hazards to navigation and enemy ADA. Starting with the LD, the teams reconnoiter each zone in a systematic manner based on terrain, number of aircraft in the team, and the width of the zone 3-58. Zones are divided into troop and/or platoon zones. Boundaries designate areas of responsibility when more than one troop and/or platoon are deployed abreast. PLs assist in controlling movement to ensure that reconnaissance elements remain abreast. 3-59. Before departing on the mission, the team leader selects significant checkpoints for examination and plans a route between the checkpoints, using terrain and vegetation to conceal the aircraft movements. The team leader also coordinates to ensure any specific tasks for support of the ground force commander are integrated into the reconnaissance plan. Specific tasks that may be assigned to an ACT while working with ground forces may include Reconnoitering terrain not easily accessible to ground vehicles. Rapidly checking key points in zone. Locating and reporting the flanks of enemy forces encountered by air or ground scouts.
3-16
Chapter 3
Locating, reporting, and bypassing obstacles and enemy positions. Providing security on the far side of obstacles while ground forces reconnoiter and clear them.
AREA RECONNAISSANCE
3-60. The purpose of an area reconnaissance is to gather intelligence or to conduct surveillance of a specified area. The target may be key terrain, a farm, a bridge, a ridgeline, a wooded area, a proposed AA, an LZ, or other features that will be critical to an operation. The specified area to be reconnoitered is designated by boundary lines enclosing the area. METT-T will determine the movement technique the reconnaissance element will use to reach the area and the method by which the area will be systematically reconnoitered. The ACTM also reconnoiters dominant terrain outside the specified area from which the enemy can influence friendly operations. 3-61. During a area reconnaissance, the following critical tasks apply, unless directed otherwise: Reconnoiter specific terrain within the area and dominant terrain outside the specific area from which the enemy can influence friendly operations. Report reconnaissance information. Find and report all enemy within the area. Reconnoiter all terrain within the area and assist scout platoon(s) with built-up areas. Determine significant adverse weather.* Locate a bypass around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.* Inspect and classify all bridges, overpasses, underpasses, and culverts within the area.* Locate fords and crossing sites near all bridges in the area.* Locate all mines, obstacles, and barriers in the area within its capability and assist ground cavalry units in their clearance.* 3-62. The squadron commander first considers the factors of METT-T. Rapid movement to the objective is important, but the main consideration usually is security. Avoidance of known enemy locations and enemy surveillance elements is imperative. Primary and alternate routes to the objective area are therefore selected based on security and speed. Terrain flight techniques are used to move to the area. The commander treats the assigned area like a zone reconnaissance. The area is enclosed in a boundary. Upon completion of the reconnaissance, the squadron departs the area on a different route. 3-63. The primary difference between a zone and an area reconnaissance is the nature (restrictive versus permissive) of the boundaries. A zone reconnaissance has restrictive boundaries that define the ACTM mission area. Because of this, a zone reconnaissance does not have an implied task to reconnoiter dominating terrain that is outside of the zone. The boundaries of
The commander, time permitting, may also direct the ACTM to accomplish this critical task.
3-17
FM 1-114
an area reconnaissance are permissive and allow the ACTM greater freedom in selecting their ingress and egress routes. The squadron may move to and reconnoiter one large area or several small, air cavalry dispersed areas. It may also assign this mission to one or more ACTs. An area reconnaissance may be performed behind friendly lines or deep behind enemy lines. Emphasis is normally placed on reaching the objective area quickly. The squadron usually moves over several routes to reduce mission execution times. 3-64. The squadron commander may divide the area into troop zones with designated objectives for each respective unit. The flanks of the overall objective area are secured first, reconnaissance efforts may then be focused inward. ACTMs may establish a screen on the flank to provide security for the ground reconnaissance forces. ACTMs may have to dismount and physically reconnoiter a specific area. Figure 3-4 shows the graphics for an area reconnaissance.
3-18
Chapter 3
3-65. Long range observation should be used whenever possible to reduce the enemys ability to determine the reconnaissance objective. If a flyover is required in a hostile environment, crews must be able to collect the desired information rapidly while flying over an area only once, if possible, but never from the same direction twice.
3-19
FM 1-114
RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE
3-66. A reconnaissance in force is a limited objective operation. It is conducted by a larger than squadron force to obtain information and to locate and test the enemy's disposition, strength, and reaction. As the name implies, a reconnaissance in force is an action to develop battlefield intelligence and to reduce uncertainties about the enemy. Initially, as part of the force, the squadron conducts a zone reconnaissance to update the force commander. The squadron may also screen the movement of the force. If enemy contact is made, squadron assets continue reconnaissance to find weaknesses or to develop the situation. The augmenting forces must have the firepower, mobility, and agility required for this role. 3-67. Reconnaissance in force mission is assigned when limited information about the enemy is available. It is also assigned when the commander desires more specific information on the enemy, and when this information cannot be gathered by any other means. 3-68. The C2 function for a reconnaissance in force is similar to that for any other operation. However, a reconnaissance in force is characterized by violent, high-tempo actions that are integrated and coordinated throughout the entire effort. Engineer assets in a mobility role may augment squadron elements. Armor, infantry, and cavalry units make up the main force, and FA assets provide flexible DS to the force. AD assets may also augment squadron forces to enhance the overall AD effort of the force. When enemy contact is established, squadron elements direct and secure movement of the main force. They call for and adjust fires and assist engineer and AD forces in support of the main force.
Security. Recommendations are made on the force that will be required to provide security during the air assault.
3-20
Chapter 3
3-21
FM 1-114
Technical characteristics of the LZ and/or PZ. These characteristics include Size of the available landing area. Obstacles and hazards in the landing area and vicinity. Ground slope of the landing area. Surface condition of the landing area. Specific Requirements. If the ACTM can determine specific requirements, recommendations are made on the following additional technical requirements: Approach and departure directions. Landing formations. Suitability for heavily loaded aircraft. Number and type of aircraft that LZ and/or PZ can support. Meteorological conditions. If meteorological conditions observed during the reconnaissance are expected to be present during the air assault, then ACTMs assess the impact of the following meteorological factors: Ceiling and visibility. Density altitude. Winds.
3-22
Chapter 3
If an agent is present, what type is it? Where was the agent first detected? What are the boundaries of the contaminated area? Is a clean route available through the area? 3-72. Before conducting an NBC reconnaissance, the troop commander ensures that the equipment is available and properly prepared. Equipment normally used by the reconnaissance element for chemical and biological reconnaissance includes an automatic alarm, CAM, M256 detector kit, M9 paper, M272 water test kit, and M34 sampling kit. Equipment normally used by the element for radiological reconnaissance include radiacmeter, IM-174 or AN/VDR-2 and dosimeter, IM-93 or pocket radiac, AN/UDR-13. The commander also determines areas of priority. These areas include possible movement routes and unit locations. Finally, the commander designates an area to which the reconnaissance element can return for decontamination. 3-73. During NBC reconnaissance planning, the squadron or troop commander designates areas of responsibility and determines distances between checkpoints. (The distance between each checkpoint depends on the factors of METT-T.) The reconnaissance team initially conducts checks at 500-meter intervals. The team concentrates on areas where chemical agents collect such as low spots, valleys, and sheltered locations. It uses the M256 kit to detect vapors and M9 paper to check liquids. When time is critical, the team uses samplers or detectors only when necessary. Upon detecting a chemical agent, the reconnaissance team marks the area and then moves back to a clean area. It moves laterally a predetermined distance and direction, usually 500 meters, and then moves forward again. The team follows this procedure until it reaches the unit boundary or finds a clean route through the contaminated area. 3-74. The manner in which the information is reported depends on how urgently the information is needed. If time is critical, the information is transmitted by radio using the NBC 4-report format. If time is not critical or if radio assets cannot be used, the information is recorded and carried back to the unit. DA Form 1971-2-R (Chemical Data Sheet - Monitoring or Survey) is used to record and transfer reconnaissance information. FM 3-3 describes reporting procedures in detail. Figure 3-6 shows a completed DA Form 1971-2-R. RADIOLOGICAL MONITORING 3-75. The ACS is responsible for conducting radiological monitoring in its AO to determine the presence and intensity of residual radiation hazards. The radiation may be from fallout or NIGA areas. The IM174/PD radiacmeter or AN/VDR-2 radiac set is used to monitor radiation. The procedure is outlined in FM 3-3-1. Figure 3-7 shows an example of a completed DA Form 1971-R (Radiological Data Sheet - Monitoring or Point Technique) and Figure 3-8 shows an example of a completed DA Form 1971-1-R (Radiological Data Sheet - Route or Course Leg Technique [Ground and Aerial Survey]).
3-23
FM 1-114
3-24
Chapter 3
3-25
FM 1-114
3-26
Chapter 3
SURVEY 3-76. Both nuclear and chemical surveys are conducted. Nuclear surveys are conducted to determine the extent and intensity of contamination. Chemical surveys are conducted to determine the size of a contaminated area. Surveys provide information on which future operations are based. Surveys in the covering force area or forward of the FLOT are not normally performed unless the information is critical and the loss of survey assets is acceptable. The squadron and the NBC center (division, corps, area support group, and theater level G3s) coordinate all survey missions. A group composed of a control team and one or more survey teams conducts a survey. The control team is normally formed at squadron level, and survey teams are formed at troop level. The control team controls and directs the survey teams or troops. In radiological surveys, only the minimum number of personnel is exposed to radiation. The control and survey teams may perform aerial and ground radiological surveys. FMs 3-3, 3-3-1, and 3-19 describe in detail nuclear and chemical surveys.
3-27
FM 1-114
commander assigns the guard mission when he expects contact or has an exposed flank that requires greater protection than a screen provides. Cover 3-81. A covering force accomplishes all the tasks of screening and guard forces. Additionally, a covering force operates apart from the main body to develop the situation early and deceives, disorganizes, and destroys enemy forces. Unlike screening or guard forces, a covering force is tactically selfcontained and capable of operating independently of the main body. Area Security 3-82. Area security is a form of security that includes reconnaissance and security of designated personnel, airfields, unit convoys, facilities, main supply routes, lines of communications, equipment, and critical points. An area security force neutralizes or defeats enemy operations in a specified area. It operates in an area delineated by the headquarters assigning the area security mission. It screens, reconnoiters, attacks, defends, and delays as necessary to accomplish its mission. Area security operations focus on the enemy, the force being protected, or a combination of the two.
FUNDAMENTALS
3-83. The squadron conducts security operations according to the five security fundamentals. These fundamentals are briefly discussed below. ORIENT ON THE MAIN BODY 3-84. A security force operates between the main body and known or suspected enemy units. The air mission commander maneuvers the troop to positions to provide screening support to the main body commanders scheme of maneuver. The screen should be positioned to remain between the main body and the enemy force. This distance should be based upon the relative vulnerability of the main body and the expected enemy rate of advance. As a rule, main body required preparation time multiplied by the expected enemy rate of advance in kilometers per hour equals the minimum distance to emplace security. If this distance cannot be achieved, additional combat power and an extensive obstacle plan may be required. PERFORM CONTINUOUS RECONNAISSANCE 3-85. A security force performs continuous reconnaissance to gain all possible information about the enemy and the terrain within the assigned AO. (For information concerning the doctrinal frontages and/or distances of ground cavalry units in conjunction with security operations, refer to FM 17-95, FM 17-97, and FM 17-98.) An ACT operating independently will normally operate on an 8- to 10-kilometer front based on METT-T. PROVIDE EARLY AND ACCURATE WARNING 3-86. Early warning of enemy activity includes accurate reports about the enemys size, composition, location, movement, and special equipment. This
3-28
Chapter 3
gives the main body commander the time and information needed to seize the initiative and choose the time and place to engage the enemy. PROVIDE REACTION TIME AND MANEUVER SPACE 3-87. Air cavalry security force elements operate as far from the main body as possible and according to METT-T. It fights using its organic firepower and screens within range of the main body artillery to maximize its ability to employ long-range indirect fire to gain time and maneuver space for the main body commander to concentrate combat power. During cover operations, the covering force may be out of the main bodys artillery range. MAINTAIN ENEMY CONTACT 3-88. Once gained, contact is maintained to ensure a continuous flow of combat information. Contact is never broken unless specifically directed by the commander.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
3-89. The main body commander should give the security force commander the following critical items of information to facilitate planning: Dimensions of the security mission (normally depicted on graphic overlay). Minimum reaction time required. This allows the security force commander to determine if the depth of the security zone is sufficient to accomplish the mission and determines how long the security force must delay before falling back to successive PLs. Minimum sized enemy force that must be detected. This allows the commander to determine required density of the screen. 3-90. The squadron commander follows general planning principles in preparing for a security mission and determines the troop or troops required to perform the mission. He specifies the area of the security and the time the security must be effectively established with battalion-size avenues of approach into the identified area. The depth of the area should provide enough distance for the main body to react in minimal time. The squadron must not establish its initial security too close to the main body, but within range of the main body artillery. During cover operations, the covering force may be out of the main bodys artillery range. The initial screen also follows advantageous terrain for observation of avenues of approach. It is delineated by a PL and is located behind critical control measures such as CFLs and FSCLs. Passage points and routes through stationary units are also coordinated. 3-91. Consideration must be given when assigning air cavalry its own terrain. ASE and/or EW considerations must be part of the mission planning process to minimize risks while accomplishing the mission. Detailed instructions are contained in Appendix H. Limited visibility conditions and weather may affect air cavalry's ability to cover a zone and/or sector. On the other hand, there are times when ground cavalry is limited by mobility, terrain, vegetation, or time, and air cavalry is the only asset capable of conducting the mission.
3-29
FM 1-114
3-92. The squadron commander, in conjunction with the main body commander, must determine the width and depth of the security and establish a rear boundary between the main body and the security force. The squadron may initially assume responsibility for the area between the main body and the security force. The squadron may conduct a zone reconnaissance from the main body to the initial screen line and then maintain surveillance between the security force and the screen line. The main body may be required to conduct patrols or establish OPs near their positions. Cavalry units MUST carefully plan and coordinate their subsequent rearward movement and passage of lines. 3-93. Unique requirements posed by the mission may require assets not organic to the screening unit. The squadron may need AHs, ground assets, and/or CS assets to effectively perform the mission. 3-94. Fires are planned, and the emplacement of man-made obstacles is coordinated to impede the enemy's advance. The combination of fires and natural and man-made obstacles allows the squadron to impede enemy lead elements, maintain contact, and avoid decisive engagement. The squadron may also continue reconnaissance forward to identify enemy second echelon and follow-on forces. Upon contact, the squadron focuses its effort on the destruction of enemy reconnaissance elements by direct and indirect fires before the enemy can penetrate the initial screen line.
SCREEN
PURPOSE 3-95. The primary purpose of a screen is to provide early warning to the main body through the communication of real-time combat information. This gives the protected force reaction time and maneuver space to orient to meet the threat. The screen provides the protected force with the least protection of any security mission. Air cavalry screens forward, to the flanks, or to the rear of a stationary main body and to the flanks or to the rear of a moving main body. Screening operations are not performed forward of a moving force because that would be an advance guard or zone reconnaissance. Based on the higher commanders intent, the squadron and ACTs may be required to impede and harass the enemy with organic and supporting fires and, within its capabilities, destroy or repel enemy reconnaissance elements without becoming decisively engaged. See figure 3-9 for screen locations. Critical Tasks for Squadron Screen Missions 3-96. Critical tasks of the squadron conducting a screen mission are as follows: Provide early warning of enemy approach. Maintain continuous surveillance of all battalion-size avenues of approach into the sector. Gain and maintain enemy contact and report enemy activity. Destroy, repel, or suppress enemy reconnaissance units (within capabilities) without becoming decisively engaged.
3-30
Chapter 3
Impede and harass the enemy with indirect fires. Guide reaction forces. Critical Tasks for the Air Cavalry Troop 3-97. The critical tasks for the ACT conducting a screen mission are as follows: Maintain continuous surveillance of all battalion-sized avenues of approach into the sector. Destroy or repel all enemy reconnaissance elements within capabilities and as directed by higher commander. Locate the lead elements of the enemy order of battle and determine their direction of movement. Maintain contact with the elements, report their activities, and harass the enemy while displacing.
3-31
FM 1-114
Air Combat Operation 3-98. Though not a specific critical task, the air combat operation is an implied task during security operations. To be effective, security operations must prevent interdiction by enemy air and ground maneuver forces. CAPABILITIES 3-99. Air cavalry is ideally suited for screen missions due to its superior mobility, day and/or night target acquisition ability, and long range digital and/or voice communication capabilities. ACTs may conduct screen operations independently or as an integral part of a larger units task organization. When participating in guard and cover operations, ACTs normally screen or conduct zone reconnaissance as part of a larger forces guard or cover mission. SQUADRON PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 3-100. Squadrons normally perform a screen with organic assets. However, attachments such as engineers, MI assets, or artillery are sometimes needed. For division cavalry, DS artillery will be required when the squadron is operating out of main body artillery range. In the RAS, a ground troop may be attached to assist the air assets in screening a vulnerable part of the regiment. When a brigade is conducting independent operations, an air or GCT from the DCS may be OPCON or attached to screen in support of the brigade's operations. When this occurs the troop should receive DS artillery. 3-101. Squadrons can screen broad areas to the front, to the flanks, or to the rear of a stationary main body or to the flanks or rear of a moving main body. It must impede and harass the enemy with organic and supporting fires and, within its capabilities, destroy or repel enemy reconnaissance elements without becoming decisively engaged. OFFENSIVE ENGAGEMENTS 3-102. To exploit enemy vulnerabilities and weaknesses, the squadron may maneuver to the flanks and rear of the enemy to conduct offensive engagements. It may also use this employment principle to perform other security tasks as well as special-purpose and JAAT operations. TROOP PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 3-103. The ACT commander plans his concept using the following critical considerations: Aircraft Rotation 3-104. Based on the rotation method selected by the SCO, the troop commander determines methods of rotating aircraft to sustain an aerial screen. He must consider all aspects of the missiontime required for the mission, aircraft availability, the use of AHs, relief on station. ACTM Organization
3-32
Chapter 3
3-105. The troop commander organizes ACTM s based on the SCO's guidance, likelihood of enemy contact, size of assigned sector, duration of the mission, and aircraft availability. If large frontages or several avenues of approach need to be covered, the troop commander may break the unit down to teams instead of platoons. When augmented with AHs, they may remain immediately available in a FAA or task organized into the platoon and/or team elements, to use their onboard sensors. COORDINATION 3-106. The troop commander ensures the location of AHs, FARPs, supporting fires, and FAAs are known by all aircrews. The commander coordinates his concept closely with the ground commander. He must pay particular attention to OP locations, artillery positions, and ground scheme of maneuver. Coordinating the air passage of lines when operating forward of ground troops is essential. DISPLACEMENT TO SUBSEQUENT SCREEN LINES 3-107. As the enemy situation threatens the security of the screening force, the squadron and/or troops report and request movement to the next screen line. Staggered movement off the screen line allows the commander to identify the flanks and rear of attacking forces. The screening force commander usually decides when to move from a screen line. However, the main body commander decides when the screening force may move behind the rear boundary PL. Prompt, accurate reporting is essential to prevent decisive engagement. Maximum use is made of surveillance, acquisition, and aircraft sensors. POSITIONING OF COMMAND AND CONTROL AND COMBAT SERVICES SUPPORT ASSETS 3-108. The commander positions himself to where he can best control the screen. Normally this is at a vantage point from which he can move freely, maintain communications with both higher and subordinate commanders, and best influence the battle. In the RAS, the SCO typically performs this function in his aircraft. In the DCS the SCO normally commands from the TAC CP, TOC, or a C2 designated aircraft. Combat trains are normally positioned behind masking terrain close enough for rapid response. They are best placed along routes providing good mobility laterally and in-depth. In the DCS and the RAS, FARPs are placed forward to facilitate rapid turnaround of aircraft supporting the screen. CSS assets prepare for extended operations as necessary. STATIONARY SCREEN Successive Screen Lines 3-109. Successive screen lines are located one behind the other on the battlefield and provide the screening force maneuver space. A stationary screen is accomplished by establishing successive screen lines. These lines enable the screening element to observe the identified avenues of approach throughout the squadron's AO. Avenues of approach are not split between
3-33
FM 1-114
units. The ACTM should be assigned no more than three battalion-size avenues of approach. A screen line may consist of OPs placed along a PL overwatching avenues of approach into an area. OPs may be mounted or dismounted from both air and ground assets. If the factors of METT-T dictate, ground scouts of the regiment and/or squadron may dismount from their vehicles and establish OPs. If OPs are used, air and ground reconnaissance forces actively patrol between them. Patrols reconnoiter areas that cannot be observed from an OP. Initial Screen Line 3-110. The most secure method of establishing an initial screen line is to conduct a zone reconnaissance from the rear boundary to the initial screen line. When squadron units reach the general trace of the screen line, they reconnoiter and refine it. They also select positions for good observation and fields of fire. Reconnaissance elements seek to remain undetected while reporting enemy forces and engaging them with indirect fires at maximum range. Fires are planned along with both natural and man-made obstacles to impede the enemy's advance. The combination of obstacles and coordinated fires allows the squadron to impede enemy lead elements, maintain contact, and avoid decisive engagement. This gives the main body reaction time and maneuver space to effectively engage the enemy. The squadron may also continue reconnaissance forward to identify enemy second echelon and follow-on forces. Upon contact, the squadron focuses its efforts on the destruction of enemy reconnaissance elements by direct and indirect fires before the enemy can penetrate the initial screen line. 3-111. As enemy pressure threatens the security of the screening force, or the movement of the main body dictates, the squadron or ACTs report and request to move to the next screen line. Reconnaissance elements rapidly move from a screen line while maintaining visual contact with the enemy. Staggered movement off the screen line allows the commander to identify the flanks and rear of attacking forces. This procedure ensures that gaps occurring during movement are quickly closed. The procedure is repeated as necessary. Figures 3-10 and 3-11 illustrates the RAS and DCS graphics, respectively, for screening operations of a stationary force. The main body commander decides when the screen force is no longer necessary and allows the screening force to conduct follow-on missions. Therefore, the screen force commander must be prepared to conduct guard operations. Maximum use is made of surveillance, target acquisition, and night observation equipment. 3-112. The ACT conducts a screen for a stationary force when the main body commander is preparing for future tactical operations. During reconstitution activities or planning and preparation phases, the main body commander may remain stationary. The ACT may be assigned screen operations when ground forces are preparing for defensive or offensive operations before actual movement begins. Initial occupation of a unit BP may also require screening activities.
3-34
Chapter 3
3-35
FM 1-114
Figure 3-11. DCS Stationary Screen Graphics Task Organization 3-113. The ACTM is task organized by the air mission commander to accomplish its screen mission. The AMC assigns teams to occupy the screen and establishes a troop or team rotation to maintain continuous surveillance. If the troop requires relief on station from elements from another troop, the AMC coordinates with the relieving unit to determine the technique to be used. ACTMs relieve each other by aircraft, by team, or by troop. In each case the AMC for the screening troop links up with the incoming air mission commander and communicates the current friendly positions, enemy situation, and plan for relief. When the squadron AMPS is used to maintain a situational awareness net, the relieving troop should arrive with updated graphics requiring less time to conduct handover. Initial Contact 3-114. When contact is made the ACTM responds by immediately reporting and maintaining contact. Spot reports from the ACTM update the squadron commander on the tactical situation. This gives the main body commander time to maneuver the ground units to engage the enemy. If directed, the ACTM may use indirect FS or organic fires to destroy or repel the enemys reconnaissance elements. Cover and Concealment 3-115. ACTMs make maximum use of cover and concealment and employ supporting fires to harass and impede enemy elements. Each screen is situated to maximize the ACTMs ability to maintain observation of the battlefield. Team leaders work together to ensure that FOVs overlap to prevent the enemy from passing unnoticed. Air routes to and from succeeding screen lines should provide good cover and concealment. Cover may be difficult to obtain along a route, but concealment is critical. During movement, the teams ensure that visual contact with the enemy is continuously maintained. MOVING SCREEN 3-116. A moving screen is conducted when the main body is moving either in the attack or in retrograde. The squadron commander determines the technique of screening a moving force based on METT-T, the maneuver force commander's intent, and the squadron's orientation. The maneuver force commander assigning the screening mission provides the parameters of the screen and the times and locations the screen is to be established. He also identifies the unit or units to be screened and provides the HHQ graphics (operations overlay and control measures). The two types of moving screens are flank and rear. Flank Screen
3-36
Chapter 3
3-117. The moving flank screen is the most difficult screening mission. Elements screening on the flank of a moving force move on a route parallel to the axis of the main body movement. The squadron commander defines the area to be initially screened and subsequent screen lines. He designates the last line as the squadron rear boundary. Squadron elements occupy a series of OPs on the screen line parallel to the route of advance. A ground reconnaissance troop is well suited for this mission. The forward element maintains contact with the forward element of the lead elements on the near flank of the main body. The main body and the screening unit must maintain contact at all times. When operating with ground troops in a moving flank screen mission, ACTMs are well suited to maintain contact with the main body and to perform reconnaissance forward of the ground units. When maintaining contact with the main body, the ACTM must be aware of the distance of the ground troops from the main body to prevent the over extension of the screen. 3-118. The most forward OP is positioned abeam of the rear of the leading battalion and/or TF and the subsequent OPs are arrayed along the length of the main body. Movement along the flank screen line may be controlled using one of three methodssuccessive bounds (similar to bounding overwatch), alternate bounds (similar to traveling overwatch), and continuous (similar to traveling). The most secure technique is one in which aircrews move from the trail OP to the most forward OP and works best when the main body is moving slowly. The successive bounds method is shown in Figure 3-12. A less secure technique may be used when the main body is moving faster. It involves all OPs moving forward simultaneously on command to the next OP. The alternate bounds method is shown in Figure 3-13. The screening force may move continuously, using a technique similar to a hasty zone reconnaissance in-depth along the main bodys flank. This method is the least secure and least preferred. The continuous method is shown in Figure 3-14. When operating with ground troops in a moving flank screen mission, ACTs are well suited to maintain contact with the main body and to perform reconnaissance forward of the ground units. 3-119. An ACT screening to the flank of a moving unit plans a line of OPs and prepares to occupy each, in turn, as the main body advances. If possible, the ACT reconnoiters out to the maximum range of supporting fires. Except for these procedures, the mission is planned and conducted the same as a stationary screen. Rear Screen 3-120. Screening the rear of a moving force is essentially the same as a stationary force. As the protected force moves, the squadron occupies a series of successive screen lines. Movement is regulated by the requirement to maintain the time and distance factors desired by the main body commander. Sectors and responsibilities are assigned as in the stationary screen. ACTMs may assume the screen during ground troop movement. In a rear screen, a unit may move to subsequent screen lines without enemy pressure as long as it remains within friendly artillery range and can effectively screen the rear. If enemy contact is made, the squadron executes the screen mission the same as a stationary screen.
3-37
FM 1-114
3-38
Chapter 3
3-39
FM 1-114
3-40
Chapter 3
Figure 3-14. Traveling or Continuous Method of Maneuver REAR AREA OPERATIONS SCREEN 3-121. During rear area incursions conducted by enemy forces, squadron elements may conduct a screen. The purpose of this operation is to maintain contact with and contain the enemy while friendly units maneuver to engage and destroy the rear threat. In this role, squadron forces may guide friendly quick-reaction forces and/or assist in the attack and destruction of the enemy force. Figure 3-15 shows the squadron conducting a screen during a rear area operation.
Figure 3-15. Squadron Conducting Screen During Rear Area Operation SCREENING AGAINST ENEMY AIRCRAFT 3-122. The ACT may operate as a screening force with the mission to alert the squadron and engage approaching enemy aircraft. It is positioned on the flanks and forward of other aviation and ground units conducting operations. The ACT establishes a screen along probable air avenues of approach. It maintains surveillance of these air avenues similar to the way it maintains surveillance of ground avenues of approach. Reports of incoming
3-41
FM 1-114
aircraft would alert all assets in the area to take appropriate action. To effectively maintain an aerial screen requires the air cavalry unit to be linked with the AD warning system to maintain situational awareness of incoming enemy aircraft. 3-123. To be successful in a screen against the enemy, the ACT should fight as a unit, using maneuver and making the most of available weapons. The troop should also observe the principles of air combat operations. These principles include Avoiding detection. Seeing the enemy first. Recognizing the enemy. Fighting unpredictably.
GUARD OPERATIONS
PURPOSE 3-124. A guard operation protects the main body from enemy ground observation, direct fire, and surprise attack. A guard force reconnoiters, screens, attacks, defends, and delays to destroy enemy reconnaissance elements and to disrupt the deployment of enemy first echelon forces. It accomplishes all the tasks of a screening force. A guard operation is normally conducted within the range of friendly artillery. The squadron may serve as the guard force headquarters, or it may operate under another maneuver headquarters. The guard mission is not normally assigned to an air squadron unless it is augmented from the regiment, division, or corps with ground assets. The intent of the main body commander in assigning the mission determines the nature and extent of attachments required. ACTs within the squadron perform zone reconnaissance, screen, or hasty attack missions. Ground troops within the squadron perform the same missions but also conduct movement to contact, defend, and delay missions. The guard mission requires the squadron to fight the enemy. A guard mission may be conducted to the front, rear, or flanks of the main body. MISSIONS Stationary Guard 3-125. A stationary guard is performed when the main body is not moving. It may be conducted to the front, rear, or flanks of the main body but is normally conducted to the front. As part of a stationary guard, the squadron deploys forward of a designated PL, usually within friendly artillery range, and conducts reconnaissance and screening operations. The main guard force does not displace behind the designated PL without the permission of the main body commander. A PL designating the rear of the squadron's area is farther from the main body than the effective range of enemy direct fire weapons (roughly 4,000 meters). The squadron conducts a zone reconnaissance from the rear to the BPs or OPs, reconnoiters the BPs or OPs, and establishes a screen line. It provides reaction time for the main guard force and, consequently, the main body. The squadron determines the
3-42
Chapter 3
enemy's disposition, destroys enemy reconnaissance elements, and assists the main guard unit in forcing the enemy to deploy. It also disrupts the enemy's forced deployment and guides main body reaction forces for the counterattack. Figure 3-16 shows a squadron conducting a stationary flank guard.
Figure 3-16. Squadron Conducting a Stationary Flank Guard 3-126. Advanced Guard. An advance guard force is offensive in nature. It finds and defeats enemy units along the axis or route of advance and prevents surprise and premature deployment of the main body. The squadron, augmented by brigade, regiment, or division, is given the overall advance guard mission. As a member of an advance guard, the air cavalry deploys forward in a zone or a route reconnaissance. 3-127. Flank Guard. As a flank guard, the squadron performs the same tasks as it does for a stationary force. However, a flank guard for a moving
3-43
FM 1-114
force advances systematically to a series of BPs or OPs parallel to the main body's axis of advance and clears the area between its route and the main body, as the main body advances. The guard force orients on enemy battalion-sized avenues of approach. Flank guard activities are primarily reconnaissance oriented. Air cavalry can be integrated as part of the guard force by screening between and in front of BPs as they are established. Air cavalry may also be used to reconnoiter the area between the guard force and the main body, maintaining contact with both elements and freeing the ground cavalry flank guard force to concentrate on its BP tasks. 3-128. Rear Guard. The squadron performs the same tasks for a moving force as it does for a stationary force. During the advance of the main body, the rear guard detects and defeats enemy units that threaten the rear of the protected force. It conducts a delay without contact at a distance prescribed by the main body commander. The delay operation is normally within friendly artillery range and is oriented away from the main body's rear on the same axis of advance. The squadron's primary role is to screen the guard force as it delays, while the main body advances. Air cavalry screens forward or between BPs and may reconnoiter the area between the rear guard and main body. Moving Guard 3-129. Moving guard operations may be conducted to the front, flank, and rear of the main body. 3-130. Advance Guard. An advance guard for a moving force develops the situation to the front along specific routes or axes to prevent surprise or premature deployment of the main body. It plans as in a zone or route reconnaissance but will usually have a more lenient engagement criteria. An advance guard must have artillery coverage. The main body is normally in a movement to contact. The advance guard develops the enemy situation by fighting to gain intelligence. Air cavalry is expected to plan its part of the mission the same way it would a zone reconnaissance. Primary emphasis is on early development of the enemy situation in the area of the main bodys route or axis of advance. 3-131. Flank Guard. As a flank guard, the squadron performs the same tasks for a moving force as it does for a stationary force. However, the flank guard for a moving force advances systematically to a series of BPs. It moves along a designated route parallel to the main body's axis of advance and clears the area between its route of advance and the main body. Flank guard activities are primarily reconnaissance-oriented. During a flank guard, air cavalry can be used to screen between the guard force and the main body. It can also be used to screen forward of the guard force during the movement to BPs. In both situations air cavalry uses the techniques for a movement to contact forward of a moving force (a zone reconnaissance moving to successive screen lines). Figure 3-17 shows the squadron with augmentation conducting a flank guard for a moving force. 3-132. Rear guard. The squadron performs the same tasks for a moving force as it does for a stationary force. However, it must periodically move rearward to stay within the range of the main bodys artillery.
3-44
Chapter 3
3-45
FM 1-114
Figure 3-17. Squadron (Augmented) Conducting a Flank Guard for a Moving Force
3-46
Chapter 3
AIR CAVALRY SQUADRON AND AIR CAVALRY TROOP CRITICAL TASKS 3-133. The following tasks are critical tasks performed by the ACS or ACT: Perform reconnaissance along the main bodys axis of advance. Maintain continuous surveillance of enemy battalion-size avenues of approach. Maintain contact with the lead combat element of the main body. Reconnoiter the zone between the main body and the guard force BPs. Destroy or repel enemy reconnaissance and security forces. Defeat, repel, or fix enemy ground forces before they engage the main body with direct fire. PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 3-134. The commander assigning the guard mission must indicate the type and level of protection required. Because guard forces are expected to force and disrupt enemy deployment, they normally operate on narrower fronts than screening forces. A commander directing a guard mission must consider the requirement to clear the area between the main body and the units' guard-designated positions. The guard force may need additional assets to clear this area while keeping enough combat power forward to protect the main body. Guard units may have FA in DS or priority of fires from designated FA units. This assistance depends on the amount of artillery support available and the type and level of protection required by the commander who assigns the guard mission. Normally, guard units occupy BPs across the most likely avenues of approach. They do not withdraw to successive positions without the permission of the main body commander. The guard force commander may direct movement to successive screen lines. Troops within the squadron will often have different missions. For example, one troop may screen a less vulnerable zone while the remaining troops screen an area with critical avenues of approach.
3-47
FM 1-114
destruction of the enemy's first echelon. The covering force operation is conducted as a zone reconnaissance to fully develop the situation. The RAS is tailored to augment the ACR and accomplish this task. It may be required to destroy enemy reconnaissance and advance guard units and to force enemy first echelon elements to deploy. The covering force also locates and breaches the defenses of a deploying or deployed enemy force. The covering force may not bypass an enemy force without the permission of the covering force commander. Adequate close support for the covering force is one FA battalion per maneuver squadron or TF. Organic FA assets consist of one FA battery per armored cavalry squadron. The covering force develops situations earlier, fights larger enemy forces longer, and defeats more enemy forces than a guard force. The two basic types of covering forces are offensive and defensive. OFFENSIVE COVER 3-137. An offensive cover force operates to the front and flanks, preventing surprise and establishing contact with the enemys main body. They also protect the main body from detection or engagement by enemy security forces bent on stopping the momentum of the attack. Offensive Covering Forces 3-138. Offensive covering forces perform the following functions: Deny the enemy information about the size, strength, composition, and objectives of the main body. Develop the enemy situation to determine enemy strengths and disposition. Destroy enemy reconnaissance and security forces. Advance Covering Force 3-139. The RAS's role as part of an advance covering force is to conduct a zone reconnaissance or movement to contact in concert with the armored cavalry squadrons to develop and influence the situation. The RAS will augment the armored cavalry squadrons in the reconnaissance and may conduct a screen. The RAS, as an integral part of the covering force, assists in locating and penetrating the security and forward defensive zones of an enemy force deployed or deploying to defend. It also assists the covering force in destroying enemy reconnaissance and advance guard units and in forcing first echelon regiments of a moving enemy force to deploy. As the covering force headquarters, the ACR may be reinforced with such assets as AHs, air assault forces, FA, TACAIR support, engineers, AD, TFs, and CS units. An advance covering force conducts movement to contact boldly on a broad front. The distance it operates forward of the main body depends on the intentions and instructions of the main body commander. This distance also depends on the terrain, the enemy's location and strength, the main body's rate of march, and the ACR's advance. 3-140. While conducting covering force operations, the ACR normally retains a reserve. The reserve force may be attached infantry or tank assets and may include elements of the RAS. The reserve force may be centrally located, ready to deploy anywhere in the squadron zone, or located in the most
3-48
Chapter 3
dangerous part of the zone. It may be positioned to support the commander's tactical scheme of maneuver by executing a mission such as attacking a vulnerable flank identified earlier by an ACT. The reserve must be prepared to attack, counterattack, or occupy BPs. When the covering force can advance no farther, the reserve defends and assists in the main body units' passage of lines. Enemy flanks and gaps are actively sought and immediately reported and exploited. The RAS may guide main body units as they attack through and around the covering force. Figure 3-18 shows the RAS as part of an advance covering force. 3-141. Air cavalry normally reconnoiters forward of advancing ground squadrons and battalions. Upon enemy contact, the air cavalry reports the enemy location to the ground unit in that zone and maintains contact. Once contact is made, the situation is rapidly developed. Air and ground scouts call in supporting artillery fires, and the enemy force is fixed and destroyed by fire and movement. The covering force will not bypass enemy forces without the permission of the main body commander. Flank Covering Force 3-142. The flank covering force normally covers only one flank of the main body. As part of a flank covering force operation, the RAS may conduct flank screening or guard operations (when augmented). Tasks differ in the scope of operations and the distance from the main body. The main body commander specifies how and when a covering force will assume a flank covering force mission. DEFENSIVE COVER 3-143. A defensive covering force operates to the front, flank, or rear of the main body. As part of a defensive covering force, the RAS may conduct reconnaissance and screening operations and act as a rapid-reaction force for counterattacks and reinforcements. Defensive Covering Force 3-144. A defensive covering force forces the enemy to deploy into attack formations. It identifies, disrupts, and destroys enemy follow-on forces. It deceives the enemy about the location of the FLOT or FEBA and forces it to deploy first and second echelon elements prematurely. It destroys AD elements of enemy first echelon forces. The defensive covering force determines the strength of the enemy and the location of its main attack. It destroys enemy reconnaissance, advance guard, and first echelon elements. It also reinforces the terrain with barriers and obstacles to slow the enemy's advance.
3-49
FM 1-114
3-50
Chapter 3
Rear Covering Force 3-145. A rear covering force for a unit moving away from the enemy first deploys behind forward maneuver units of the main body. Then it defends or delays. This line may be behind the main body's forward brigades or divisions, depending on available space and whether the main body is already disengaged. Usually, the RAS deploys behind forward brigades or divisions. Troops establish passage points; assist with the withdrawal of the main body, if necessary, and prepare to reorient in any direction. AIR ASSAULT SECURITY OPERATIONS Air Assault Operations 3-146. Air assault operations are conducted to rapidly disperse and concentrate forces at the critical time and place to influence the tactical situation. These forces can be extracted quickly and employed in a different area. Air assault forces can quickly bypass forward enemy units and achieve surprise in a swift, violent, and bold operation to deceive, destroy, and disrupt. Air assault operations are directed primarily toward destroying enemy personnel and equipment and disrupting C2. They also obtain information about enemy installations, units, and activities and force the enemy to concentrate in more than one area. Air cavalry assets are a key element in air assault operations. The aviation brigade and the AATF commanders must integrate air cavalry assets into the scheme of maneuver. ACTs are normally employed as part of a squadron mission to conduct reconnaissance, screening, or overwatch operations during all five phases of an air assault operation. These phases are staging, loading, air movement, landing, and ground tactical. 3-147. Staging Phase. Air cavalry assets may conduct screening operations to provide early warning and limited security while friendly troops form on or near the PZs. If enemy forces are close by or contact is likely, the cavalry may conduct special-purpose operations, such as feints or demonstrations away from the staging areas or PZs. 3-148. Loading Phase. ACT reconnoiters PZs before the arrival of assault helicopters. Once the PZ is cleared, air cavalry elements may screen a vulnerable flank or likely avenues of approach. NOTE: Ground troops are also well suited to participate in providing security in the first two phases of an air assault operation. 3-149. Air Movement Phase. Air cavalry elements normally precede the AATF along the air route. They conduct a route reconnaissance followed by an area reconnaissance of the LZs and possibly the objective, depending on the factors of METT-T. Air cavalry assets penetrate the FEBA or FLOT at a time interval dictated by the mission and conduct or assist with an air passage of lines. Along the route, they locate enemy AD weapons and radars and suppress those systems or develop a bypass route for the AATF. Air cavalry assets also provide pertinent information about a route that poses a threat to flight, including all natural and man-made obstacles. Although AHs normally provide en route security or overwatch, air cavalry assets may perform this mission. This is accomplished by a moving flank or security or
3-51
FM 1-114
by occupying BPs along the route. Air cavalry assets provide early warning of the enemy's approach and can then engage the enemy with organic weapon systems or through adjusting indirect fires. They may also be assigned responsibility for the recovery of all downed aircrews throughout the operation. 3-150. Landing Phase. Air cavalry assets perform the same tasks during the landing phase as it does during the staging and loading phase. They may occupy BPs to overwatch the LZs as well as the objective. 3-151. Ground Tactical Phase. As the ground force moves toward and seizes its objective, air cavalry assets may again conduct reconnaissance and screening operations. They can rapidly reconnoiter the ground route to the objective as well as the objective itself from stand-off ranges. Air cavalry assets can also screen the main body's movement to the objective and provide close in FS on the objective from BPs. Air cavalry assets can also provide overwatching fires during the extraction. Fire Support 3-152. Planned fires along the route of flight support aircraft flying past areas of known or suspected enemy positions. These fires should be intense and of short duration because of aircraft speed past specific locations. They are planned on areas and scheduled at times when flights are endangered. Fire plans may cover PZs, LZs, flight routes, and suspected enemy avenues of approach to LZs. FS plans include lethal SEAD, nonlethal SEAD, and smoke to protect formations from enemy detection. Plans should ensure the friendly FS elements do not use ordnance that obscures aircrew vision, especially during NVG missions. Whenever possible, operations should take advantage of the coordinated effects of all elements of the combined arms team. Coordinating and synchronizing actions with USAF support packages provides greatly enhanced effects and increases survivability. 3-153. Available FS is used to suppress or destroy enemy weapons. FS is provided by TACAIR, FA, mortars, and NGFS. Support may consist of smoke (rocket fired or projectile or canister delivered), chaff (air dropped), or other countermeasures for SEAD operations. On-call fires are planned along the flight route to ensure rapid adjustment on targets of opportunity. Requests for FS are made through the squadron FSO. TACAIR may be coordinated directly if the FAC is on station. The FS request used is frequently of an immediate nature.
AREA SECURITY
3-154. An area security force performs screen, guard, or cover to protect forces within a specified area. The area is delineated by the headquarters assigning the area security mission. 3-155. It is commonly employed around an airhead or lodgment following airborne, air assault, or other forced entry operations. It is also used extensively in stability operations and support operations and will become the norm for operations on the nonlinear, noncontiguous battlefield. Area security should be used to provide early warning to any isolated force that cannot tie its flanks into a friendly unit.
3-52
Chapter 3
3-156. A screen is established, integrating OPs, ground surveillance radar, and patrols. If available, tanks and antiarmor weapons systems are placed on restrictive or highly restrictive terrain and high-speed avenues of approach. Likely enemy DZs or LZs are identified and kept under observation. Air cavalry assets are integrated into the R&S plan. 3-157. Route security is performed to provide early warning and reaction time to forces moving along, or dependent upon, a route or line-ofcommunication. ACTs within the regiment or squadron could conduct any of the following missions: Screen. Zone, area, and limited route reconnaissance. Hasty attack. 3-158. Convoy security is a variation of route security that is performed when conducting security for the entire route is not feasible. This may be because of the length of the route, strength of enemy forces, or the limitations of available security assets. The integration of air and ground forces during convoy security operations works best. Air cavalry may conduct limited route reconnaissance in conjunction with a zone reconnaissance forward of the scout platoons that are better suited for the escort element. Air cavalry may additionally conduct a flank and rear screen as the convoy moves along the route. Finally, AHs (RAS) or armed scouts make an excellent quick reaction force in the event of an ambush.
3-53
FM 1-114
guard during a division movement-to-contact. The squadron assigns this mission to troops during a squadron advance guard or movement-to-contact. 3-162. The movement-to-contact terminates when the unit reaches the objective or limit of advance without enemy contact or upon contact with an enemy force. The squadron gains contact with the smallest element possible. This is normally ground scouts or ACTMs performing reconnaissance for their troop. Actions on contact occur rapidly at platoon and troop level to defeat the enemy force within its capability and prevent unnecessarily deploying other squadron assets. Should the enemy prove to be too strong, the cavalry establishes a hasty defense, delays, or conducts close reconnaissance as appropriate within the intent of the higher commander. Follow-on main body forces then deploy, conduct battle handover, and assume the fight. 3-163. Using direct and indirect fires and CAS, the ACTMs harass and impede enemy elements to preclude their influence on the main body. The ACT commander can direct ground elements to the vicinity of enemy units and can support those ground elements with fires. If ATKHTs (ACR only) or ATKHB are employed, the ACTMs maintain contact with the enemy and coordinate a target handover with the ATKHT or ATKHB. If the main body is directed to bypass the enemy after initial contact, air cavalry is ideal in the economy of force role. With its organic fire power, air cavalry can maintain surveillance and contain small forces until follow-on elements arrive to destroy them. 3-164. If the DCS is well forward of the division, a FARP may move with the squadron to reduce aircraft turnaround time. In the ACR, the RAS establishes its FARPs far enough forward to support deployed air cavalry assets.
3-54
Chapter 3
3-167. The fix portion may be accomplished in a variety of methods. The most common task would be to block an enemy element from moving along his most likely avenue of departure from the area. This task can be accomplished by mounted or dismounted forces, aviation forces, or by mines and obstacles that are covered by fire. The key to the fix portion of the operation is to ensure your fixing unit is appropriate for the type of enemy force in question, and has the capability to react to the enemy in unanticipated locations. 3-168. The finishing portion may be accomplished by any maneuver force with the combat power to destroy the enemy force in question. The key to success for this portion of the mission is the ability to bring the finishing forces combat power to bear on the enemy at the key time when he has been located by the finding force, and his egress has been halted by the fixing force. 3-169. The search and attack mission should not be assigned any lower than the squadron level. The squadron has the assets to C2 the different aspects of this mission and also has the combat power to apply to accomplish the desired results. The squadron must tailor the subordinate troops tasks to clearly define their role in the operation. The troops must clearly understand their role as that of reconnaissance to locate, or attack to destroy. The squadron may find itself in the position of conducting one of these subordinate roles in a regimental level search and attack mission. 3-170. The effective search and attack operation is conducted with a great deal of cross talk and coordination between the subordinate elements. Sufficient graphic control measures from the controlling headquarters are essential to the close coordination between the subordinates. The subordinate unit commanders must keep abreast of the current activities and the locations of the other elements to ensure they have their units in the proper location and mission posture to deal with enemy contact when it is made. The clear situational awareness is extremely important due to the fluid environment in which this mission will be conducted.
HASTY ATTACK
3-171. A hasty attack is an attack for which a unit has not made extensive preparations. It is conducted with the resources immediately available to maintain the momentum or to take advantage of the enemy situation. The objectives are to overwhelm the enemy quickly and seize the initiative. Speed is paramount. If momentum is lost, the hasty attack can fail. An attack with speed, audacity, and boldness can offset the lack of thorough preparation. 3-172. The hasty attack depends on timely and accurate information as well as speed. When contact is made, commanders must immediately evaluate their chances of success. Situational information must be passed to HHQ. Possible courses of action include enveloping or bypassing enemy forces or reinforcing the attack. 3-173. When the attack begins, the air cavalry commander employs direct and indirect fires to develop the situation. The air cavalry supplies
3-55
FM 1-114
battlefield information and situation updates on which the commander can base immediate decisions concerning the attack. It provides suppressive fires for a maneuvering ground element and security to the attacking force through early warning. If additional firepower is needed, the air cavalry facilitates the sequencing of the ATKHB into the battle. 3-174. When planned ATKHB assets arrive, the air cavalry returns to its reconnaissance and security missions. It continues to provide information about alternate attack routes and aerial or ground envelopment routes. 3-175. The air cavalry commander can orchestrate all the FS assets used in a hasty attack, as well as assist ATKHB assets. In the hasty attack, air cavalry primarily provides information to the commander and then orchestrates firepower and maneuver.
DELIBERATE ATTACK
3-176. A deliberate attack is usually necessary when the defender is well organized and cannot be turned or bypassed. A deliberate attack is planned and carefully coordinated with all concerned elements based on thorough reconnaissance, evaluation of all available intelligence and relative combat strength, analysis of all COAs, and any other factors affecting the situation. It has a scheme of maneuver and an integrated FS plan. In the initial phase of the attack, both sides employ all firepower, to include FA and armor. Due to the vulnerability to accurate ground fires, commanders must plan to use maximum standoff ranges, and hours of darkness, when engaging well established enemy defensive positions. Cavalry units seldom conduct deliberate attacks on their own. The security efforts of air cavalry are oriented towards protecting the attacking force from flank and rear area attacks in an economy of force role. This may be the air cavalry's most critical contribution. It allows the ground commander to mass all his forces in the deliberate attack. Surveillance of possible enemy LZs is included in the security role. 3-177. A commander's IPB will determine how the attack is planned and initiated. Because the primary attack route could be modified before the attack begins, situational development is essential. After the initial phase of the attack begins, air cavalry can identify weak points. As the attack continues, immediate reports from air cavalry enable the main body commander to direct his attack at the most vulnerable points. If a feint becomes more successful than the main attack, the air cavalry commander relays this information to the supported commander and can direct forces to the newly defined main attack area. 3-178. If the initial phase of the attack succeeds and friendly forces breach the enemy defenses, the air cavalry moves through the penetration and outward on the flanks where the enemy is weak and fragmented. The air cavalry also locates counterattacking enemy forces, C2 centers, logistics centers, and other priority targets. After these have been located, the air cavalry employs indirect fires to destroy them. When ATKHB assets are available, the air cavalry commander identifies and hands over the targets to the attack elements. The air cavalry then resumes its reconnaissance of other targets in the area.
3-56
Chapter 3
3-179. An attack at night or during limited visibility provides several advantages to the attacker. Surprise and deception are enhanced and opportunities that are impractical during daylight conditions may succeed. Concentration and movement of forces are more difficult to detect and remain concealed longer. The availability of air cavalry assets is carefully weighed during consideration of these attacks. Air cavalry assets are more survivable at night due to the reduced effectiveness of enemy direct fire weapon systems. Planning for night attacks begins as early as possible to allow for daytime preparation and to incorporate sleep plans. The plan is kept simple to facilitate execution. Control measures at night are usually more restrictive than those used during daylight conditions. Route reconnaissance and marking of the direction of attack facilitate rapid execution.
ATTACK POSITION
3-180. The attack position is the last covered and concealed position an attacking force may occupy before crossing the LD. It may also be a PZ, HA, or an AA.
RAID
3-181. A raid is an attack into enemy-held territory for a specific purpose other than to gain or hold terrain. It usually ends with a planned withdrawal when the assigned mission has been completed. A cavalry squadron or troop may be assigned the raid mission or it may provide reconnaissance and security for the raiding force. Air cavalry forces seldom accompany a ground force as it moves to the objective. These units usually link up at the objective. Air cavalry missions during a raid include Reconnoitering air routes for raiding aircraft. Screening air assault elements en route to objectives. Provides area security while air assault forces board aircraft for the withdrawal. Controlling preparatory fires on objectives before air assault forces arrive. Screening raid forces while at the objective by identifying enemy reinforcement attempts. Providing local security for AH units as they engage targets in the objective area.
3-57
FM 1-114
EXPLOITATION FORCE
3-183. By maintaining constant pressure on and contact with the fleeing enemy, air cavalry allows the ground exploitation force to advance rapidly. It provides continual reports about escaping enemy forces, enemy reinforcements, and heavily and lightly defended areas. Air cavalry moves ahead of the lead elements in the exploitation to gather information that the ground commander uses to direct his assets. Key intelligence includes information about artillery positions, abandoned vehicles, supply installations, CPs, and signal installations. After identifying these locations, air cavalry suppresses and isolates them while waiting for stronger forces to arrive and destroy them. Air cavalry units should have indirect artillery assets available. The air cavalry commander coordinates with ATKHB leaders in moving their assets into battle. After ground forces penetrate the enemy's defenses, many tasks in an exploitation are similar to those in a movement-to-contact. The air cavalry commander's main concern during an exploitation is that his elements may outrun their support. Timely relocation of FARPs is critical to sustained operations. FARPs may be best located with the exploiting ground forces.
PURSUIT FORCE
3-184. The pursuit force is organized into two elementsdirect pressure force and encircling force. The direct pressure force conducts a series of hasty attacks to maintain attack momentum and to inflict maximum casualties. Armor heavy forces are ideally suited for this role. The encircling force moves swiftly to cut off the retreating enemy. It advances parallel to the enemy's line of retreat to reach key bridges, road intersections, and mountain passes ahead of the enemy. Air cavalry may be organized as part of the direct pressure force. In this role, it secures the force from flank attack by reinforcements. When air cavalry precedes the direct pressure force, it provides intelligence information to support hasty attacks. Air cavalry also maintains contact with isolated enemy strongpoints until ground elements can attack and destroy them. 3-185. The air cavalry is usually part of the encircling force. In this role, it maintains contact with the fleeing forces to identify locations that can be used to block the enemy's retreat. If air assault forces are used to establish these blocking positions, air cavalry reconnoiters the air routes, LZs, and strongpoints. It may also provide en route security for the air assault force. When armor forces attempt to encircle the fleeing force, air cavalry conducts hasty route reconnaissance to expedite the movement of ground forces to blocking positions. Throughout the operation, air cavalry employs direct and indirect fires to further disrupt and destroy the enemy. Air cavalry assets provide continual reports about any changes in the enemy's direction of movement, location, or disposition. It also assists in directing AH units into BPs to complete the enemy's destruction.
3-58
Chapter 3
PREASSAULT FIRES
3-186. PAF is a special purpose raid conducted to set favorable conditions for airborne or air assault operations. Preassault fires normally are initiated with an area reconnaissance of the DZ or LZ and the initial assault objectives. This confirms or denies enemy presence and detects any threat forces that could endanger the friendly assaulting force prior to their assembly. Following the reconnaissance, ACTMs occupy SBF positions to overwatch the DZ and/or LZ and conduct hasty attacks against observed enemy forces. Engagement priority is normally ADA suppression to protect the assault force aircraft, followed by the destruction of threat mortars and/or artillery that could disrupt the assembly of the assault troops. 3-187. Timing of the PAF mission is critical. ACTMs must be given adequate time in the area prior to the assault so that they can detect and engage the enemy. If the ACTMs are employed too early, the element of surprise may be lost. Fuel must either be airdropped with the assault force or air landed, so fuel is normally the major limiting factor in the amount of time the aircraft can devote to PAF. The RAS commander should employ the AH-64 ATKHTs in the PAF role due to their extended range capability and heavier weapons load. If the DCS is assigned this mission, the KWs must be forward deployed within appropriate range of the objective. Fat Hawk UH-60 (Black Hawks with ERFS and fuel pumps) can be used to extend the operational range of the KW. 3-188. Communications during PAF from the ACTM to the force commander must be planned with redundant capabilities. ACTMs should also be able to communicate with any special operation forces, long-range surveillance teams, overwatching the DZ and/or LZ. During airborne operations, ACTMs will provide a critical countermortar role following the assault until counterfire radars (Q36, Q37) can be air landed. Enemy mortars are located through crater analysis and a thorough IPB. IPB identifies probable mortar positions and tasks ACTMs to orient on these areas during a reconnaissance mission.
BATTLE HANDOVER
3-189. A BHO is a coordinated operation between two units that transfers responsibility for fighting an enemy force from one unit to another in the close-in battle. It is designed to maintain continuity of the combined arms fight and protect the combat potential of both forces involved. BHO is usually associated with a passage of lines. BHO may occur during both offensive and defensive operations. A clear SOP allows units to quickly establish the necessary coordination to preclude a loss of momentum in the attack. The control measures used are simple and standardized. In the conduct of air and ground operations, the air and ground troop commanders often pass an enemy force in contact to another. BHO governs this process in terms of close coordination, FS, and mutual understanding of responsibilities. No method of communication is better than face-to-face contact. Whenever the situation permits, face-to-face, air-to-ground, and airto-air linkups between individuals should be made. There are innumerable benefits to landing next to your relieving counterpart, getting out and showing that person, on a map, the battlefield situation that you gathered.
3-59
FM 1-114
PASSAGE OF LINES
3-190. A passage of lines is an operation in which one force moves either forward or rearward through another force to gain or break contact with the enemy. The squadron frequently conducts a passage of lines as a part of reconnaissance, screening, and air assault security operations. The passing force is particularly vulnerable during a passage of lines as personnel may be overly concentrated, stationary fires may be temporarily masked, and the passing unit may not be properly dispersed to react to enemy actions. Reconnaissance and coordination are critical to ensure the passage is conducted quickly and smoothly. If a unit must pass laterally through another unit, movement is conducted as a forward passage. A passage of lines is often necessary because the factors of METT-T do not permit one unit the freedom of bypassing another friendly unit. Hence, the units must pass through each other. A passage of lines may be conducted to Envelop an enemy force. Pursue a fleeing enemy. Continue an attack or counterattack. Pass forward or withdraw reconnaissance units. Pass forward or withdraw a covering force or MBA forces. 3-191. Air cavalry frequently conducts a passage of lines as a part of reconnaissance, screening, and air assault security operations. It may assist the passage of lines of the GCTs. 3-192. When air cavalry is involved in a passage of lines, timely and specific coordination before the operation is essential. The most desirable method is a face-to-face exchange of information. As a minimum, the exchange of information should include Period of time required for the passage. Locations of passage points along the FEBA or FLOT. Disposition and scheme of maneuver of friendly units. Enemy situation in sector, to include air activity. Types and numbers of aircraft to make passage, if applicable. Methods of communication, to include frequencies and nets, visual and backup communications, and recognition signals. Control of friendly supporting fires, to include restrictive FS coordination measures and AD weapon control status. Friendly unit locations. ADA weapon and/or control status. Alternate passage lanes. Contingency plan if stationary and/or passing units are attacked during passage. 3-193. Forward passages of lines are normally executed during offensive operations to continue an attack; to conduct a penetration, an envelopment, or a pursuit; or to pass another unit. In the defense, a forward passage of lines may be used to counterattack one unit through another.
3-60
Chapter 3
3-194. During an air assault operation, coordination may be accomplished at the air mission briefing. After coordination, the commander begins troop leading procedures, issues orders, and allows time for subordinate planning and preparation. C2 elements participating in the passage may also be collocated for more effective coordination. In an air assault, collocation will not be possible. During a passage of lines, air cavalry may conduct a reconnaissance of the passage points, initiate and maintain liaison, and conduct screening operations. During reconnaissance operations for preparation for a forward passage of lines, air cavalry covers routes to, through, and beyond the area of passage. It also includes existing unit locations and proposed positions. Care must be taken not to compromise unit locations and intentions during passage. 3-195. When air cavalry returns from a reconnaissance or security mission, it performs a rearward passage of lines in the same manner as other maneuver units. The squadron must ensure contact is maintained with the enemy during a rearward passage of lines. Contact points should be located along the designated passage PL. This allows the stationary unit to provide overwatching fires. Contact points should be at easily identifiable terrain features such as road junctions or towns. 3-196. Either at the contact point or at the stationary unit's TOC, stationary unit personnel brief passing unit personnel on all pertinent information. The squadron's plan of how the passage will occur is exchanged at this contact if it has not already been delivered or transmitted. The squadron normally passes CSS assets first and CS, TOC, and combat forces last. Squadron elements are responsible for overwatch of the designated PL. This is essential so that elements do not get cut off. 3-197. The squadron commander or S3 prepares a tentative plan for the passage of lines and analyzes METT-T and the higher commander's intent. The squadron commander or S3 places additional emphasis on the factors listed below. Organization 3-198. When possible, unit integrity is maintained to provide better C2. Order of Movement 3-199. An order of movement is prescribed based on the number of passage points and degree of security required. The enemy situation and the terrain also influence the order of movement and the priorities on who moves when. Security 3-200. Squadron elements assist in a passage of lines by screening between the enemy and the passing force to provide early warning and limited protection. Noise, light, and radio discipline must be enforced. The air reconnaissance squadron may occupy a screen line or serve as the controlling element for a divisional or brigade passage of lines. Command and Control
3-61
FM 1-114
3-201. The techniques of C2 depend on the number of passage points. Ideally, multiple passage points are established to facilitate decentralized control. Commanders of units involved in the passage of lines must decide how they can best influence the action and then position themselves accordingly.
FEINT
3-203. A feint is a limited attack to divert an enemy's attack or to deceive the enemy as to the friendly force's intentions. Doctrinally, brigade and smaller units conduct feints before or during a main attack to deceive the enemy. To succeed, the feint must appear as a serious attack. Additional feints are conducted to cause the enemy to reveal its defensive posture and disrupt its decision making cycle. These feints reduce the resistance that the attacking force will encounter. The squadron normally conducts reconnaissance and screening operations during a feint. However, the situation may require the squadron to engage targets more aggressively than normal with or without augmentation. The squadron may have to develop the situation more thoroughly in the objective area to compensate for the lack of reinforcements. The squadron screens the flanks and rear of the force conducting the feint, or it moves to join operations in the main attack area. The RAS can assist in feint operations by having the AHT execute false insertions. However, the force commander must assess the risks and determine whether reconnaissance assets will be employed in this role.
DEMONSTRATION
3-204. A demonstration serves the same purpose as a feint, but it differs in that it does not involve contact with the enemy. The objective of a demonstration is to deceive and confuse the enemy as to the real intentions of the attacking force. For a demonstration to succeed, the enemy must observe the demonstrating force's operation and be deceived by it but not actively engage the force. The nature of a demonstration allows for the use of decoys, simulations, and tactically inoperable equipment to portray additional strength. Squadron's will normally employ heavy volumes of indirect fires and an increase in air traffic to perform a demonstration. It may also be used to provide security for a demonstrating force or to conduct reconnaissance to assess the enemy reaction. Air cavalry's principal role in a demonstration may be to be seen and heard conducting operations in a given area. The AHT of a RAS, in conjunction with an ACT, may simulate an air assault operation. A DCS will seldom conduct a demonstration as a whole unit. The force commander should assess the risks for this operation as he would for a feint.
3-62
Chapter 3
3-63
FM 1-114
WEAPON
Launcher, guided missile aircraft (Hellfire) Launcher, rocket aircraft 2.75-inch 7-tube M260 Launcher, guided missile aircraft XM292 (ATAS) Machine gun .50 cal: XM296
Self-protection 3-211. KW aircrews use 2.75-inch rockets or .50 cal machine gun to engage close-in targets or unexpected contacts for protection of themselves or their wingman. The crew of a "heavy missile" KW relies upon its wingman solely for this critical support. As a result, a mix of rockets and .50 cal should always be used by KWs when conducting deep operations where such instances of close-in enemy targets or unexpected contact is likely. Survivability 3-212. Table 3-3 compares and contrasts survivability aspects between the Apache and KW. Table 3-3. Survivability: KW to Apache
FACTOR
ASE Signature (radar, IR, visual) Systems Speed Ballistic Protection
KW TO APACHE
Less robust package Smaller (MMS great advantage) Fewer redundant Slower Less for aircraft systems and crew
Range 3-213. Ninety knots is the planning airspeed for a KW that is loaded (gas and ammunition) which yields a combat radius of approximately 150 km with a 10-minute station time and 20-minute fuel reserve. A Fat Cow (CH-47 with extra fuel and pumps carried internally) or Fat Hawk (UH-60 configured with auxiliary fuel tanks and FARE equipment) in the vicinity of the FLOT could increase the distance of a KW unit's attack. See FM 1-111, Appendix J for details on FARP operations.
3-64
Chapter 3
TIME 3-214. Unlike the Apache, the KW can not carry an external fuel tank to extend its mission duration, time on station, or combat radius for the attack. COMBINED KIOWA WARRIOR AND APACHE DEEP OPERATIONS 3-215. A technique of task organizing KWs and Apaches for a deep operation provides commanders with an extremely flexible, robust, and comprehensive attack package. KWs are well suited for target acquisition, designation, security, and final engagement and/or BDA of EAs.
CLOSE OPERATIONS
3-216. Air cavalry conducts close operations in two separate areasthe security area and the MBA. SECURITY AREA 3-217. As in a movement to contact, air cavalry provides security for the main body by screening the covering force. As part of the covering force, air cavalry may be tasked to screen the entire division front. In this role, air cavalry is employed as an integral part of the cavalry squadron. A zone reconnaissance is conducted during movement to the initial screen. If the division occupies a broad front, air cavalry assets will be limited in their time on station due to the larger area to be covered. Therefore, air cavalry must have long range indirect fire assets available to rapidly respond in order to impede and harass the enemy. During the screening mission, air cavalry continually passes spot reports concerning the enemy's movement, location, and disposition. Roles of air cavalry in the security area include the following: Provide security for the air assault movement of light infantry forces. Orchestrate CAS, artillery, and AHs in JAAT operations. Orient assets on high-speed avenues of approach and areas not sufficiently covered by ground elements. Develop intelligence for a hasty attack and secure the attacking forces with a screening operation. Conduct aerial route reconnaissance for ATKHB when they are maneuvering to attack follow-on elements. Operate within the squadron and/or regiment in an economy of force role to free ground units so they can mass in other areas of the battlefield. Screen the flanks of the division and/or corps to maintain contact with friendly forces and prevent the enemy from conducting flank attacks. Provide overwatch for moving ground elements. This is essentially a screen mission designed to gain reaction time and maneuver space). MAIN BATTLE AREA 3-218. The decisive battle is fought in the MBA. Security force elements will have developed the situation to slow the enemy and buy time for the main
3-65
FM 1-114
body. The BHO is critical and includes a passage of line and a shift of responsibilities from the security force to the main battle commander. This handover must occur quickly and efficiently to reduce vulnerability. The principal duty of air cavalry is to provide security during the handover phase as it helps to ensure an orderly handover. Specific air cavalry missions may include the following: Secure the flanks and rear of the main body. Orchestrate JAAT operations within the MBA. Act as a rapid reaction force to counter enemy penetrations. Counter nemy airborne operations into the MBA. Maintain lines of communication and supply in the MBA by conducting reconnaissance and security along the routes. Conduct air combat operations.
REAR OPERATIONS
3-219. Air cavalry gives commanders a highly mobile and lethal combat force able to respond to enemy incursions in the rear areas. As the commanders most mobile means to gain and maintain contact, air cavalry units might be tasked as part of a tactical combat force able to respond to enemy incursions. 3-220. As the battlefield becomes less linear, rear area operations must be anticipated. Rear battle planning should be included in all tactical plans. Rear combat operations rarely come in places of our choosing. Information can be confusing, even contradictory, as to the location and size of the enemy force. Commanders must be prepared to move rapidly to positions from which they can assess and act. 3-221. Even though enemy and friendly lines may not be clearly discernible, rear operations will occur in and around base clusters, logistics sites, and storage facilities. From a battle command viewpoint, it will be fought much like a close battle. The possibility of fratricide during rear battle places a premium on all control measures. However, the fluid nature of the rear battle does not lend itself to static control measures. Based on the enemy COAs and friendly response, contingency control measures can be developed and distributed as part of the planning process and activated as appropriate, based on the situation. This planning should include air routes, indirect fires reference points, and location of known or planned ground unit locations. 3-222. The variety of possibilities that may be encountered does not allow for any one way to conduct rear operations. The situation will dictate how air cavalry can best be employed.
3-66
Chapter 3
PURPOSE
3-223. A retrograde operation is an organized movement to the rear or away from the enemy. It may be forced by the enemy or voluntarily done. The three types of retrograde operations are delay, withdrawal, and retirement. The basic reason a squadron conducts a retrograde operation is to improve a tactical situation or keep a worse one from occurring. Air troops normally assist the squadron in conducting this operation. FM 17-95 contains further details on retrograde operations. A retrograde operation may be conducted to Gain time. Preserve forces. Shorten lines of communication. Reposition forces on the battlefield. Avoid combat under undesirable conditions. Draw the enemy into an unfavorable position. Permit the withdrawal of a force for use elsewhere.
DELAY
3-224. A delay is normally conducted as part of a defensive battle. The intent of a delay is to gain time. The destruction of the enemy is of secondary importance. The integration of air cavalry is crucial to a successful delay operation. The firepower and mobility of air cavalry units allow the squadron to bolster any delay through filling gaps within the squadron, providing depth during the movement of ground troops, and helping the commander see the entire battlefield. However, integrating all combined arms and an extensive obstacle plan enhances effectiveness of the delay. The delaying force must simultaneously Preserve the force by not becoming decisively engaged. Preserve freedom to maneuver. Maintain operational coherence. Cause the enemy to deploy and react to successive attacks. Maintain contact with the enemy. 3-225. Air cavalry accomplishes several of the missions identified above during their normal reconnaissance and security missions. Air cavalry compliments the ground elements by controlling long-range fires as the friendly elements disengage and move to alternate or successive positions. They maintain surveillance of high-speed avenues of approach to ensure that the delaying force is not bypassed or encircled. Sometimes, the organic firepower of ACTs is not enough. When this happens, the squadron will ask for additional firepower in the form of ATKHBs. 3-226. In regimental cavalry, the aviation squadron provides a fourth maneuver squadron. During delay operations, the RAS may be assigned its own sector (with augmentation), may operate in conjunction with the ground under control of the RAS commander, or have its air troops placed under
3-67
FM 1-114
OPCON of the ground squadrons. Additionally, the attack troops provide the regiment with a highly mobile reserve force. 3-227. Assault helicopters are often used to move light infantry forces to alternate and successive positions. Air cavalry supports these operations by conducting an aerial route reconnaissance. They also provide security for the air assault forces and conduct PZ and/or LZ reconnaissance and security missions.
WITHDRAWAL
3-228. Commanders conduct withdrawals to extract subordinate units from combat, adjust defensive positions, or relocate the entire force. A withdrawal occurs when a force in contact with the enemy frees itself for a new mission. The force may withdraw to continue the defense in-depth or to perform a different mission. There are two types of withdrawalunder enemy pressure and not under enemy pressure. 3-229. Under enemy pressure, the unit depends on fire and maneuver to break contact with the enemy force and then withdraw. 3-230. Not under enemy pressure, the unit depends on speed of execution and deception. If the unit is not under attack, the withdrawal is not under pressure. 3-231. Air cavalry performs the same missions during a withdrawal operation as they would during a delay. In addition to performing reconnaissance and security operations, air cavalry provides the force commander with battlefield intelligence in the form of spot reports. They assist the ground forces in passage of lines and BHO and can provide the ground forces with a highly maneuverable antitank capability. Air cavalry can also coordinate FS and CAS. Air cavalry assets may also be included in deception and security operations in support of the withdrawal.
RETIREMENT
3-232. Retirements are rearward movements conducted by units not in contact. Retirement is when a unit not in contact moves away from the enemy. Movement to the rear is conducted in an orderly fashion. Retirement may be the continuation of a withdrawal. Air cavalry assists retiring units by providing reconnaissance and security. Air cavalry should use the same planning considerations for a retirement that they would for a withdrawal. Contingency missions, such as screens or route reconnaissance, can be assigned to air cavalry units if contact with the enemy is made.
3-68
Chapter 4
4-1
FM 1-114
upon their standard reconnaissance and security roles. Generally, the major differences in unit operations during stability operations and support operations will be in the C2 relationships between the squadron and its HHQ and the greater requirement for restraint in potentially hostile situations.
Legitimacy. Sustain the willing acceptance by the people of the right of the government to govern or of a group or agency to make and carry out decisions. Perseverance. Prepare for the measured, protracted application of military capability in support of strategic aims. Restraint. Apply appropriate military capability prudently.
EMPLOYMENT GUIDELINES
4-9. There are several key employment guidelines provided in FM 1-111 for the aviation commander to consider in the planning process. The current ACS doctrinal roles and missions as outlined in this manual also apply in the stability operations and support operations environment. The air cavalry commander will have to tailor his mission and assets as the situation requires. 4-10. The unit should expect a wide variety in the tempo of operations and plan accordingly. A staff must be able to adjust rapidly to many different operational considerations. The unit must plan ahead and have developed contingency plans for numerous situations not normally addressed in the unit's METL. These can be identified and trained for at home station with STX. Some subjects that should be addressed are civilians on the battlefield, media relations and public affairs, and defense against terrorism. 4-11. The operational conditions of stability operations and support operations frequently require the integration of specialty personnel with the aviation unit staff, including civil affairs, psychological operations, SJA, and
4-2
Chapter 4
special forces personnel. Besides the specialty staff personnel, the units may be required to operate with infantry, armor, artillery, engineer, CSS, or a combination of these assets. Whatever the composition, the unit must have a fully integrated staff that can coordinate and plan operations. Liaison officers from the squadron to other units and from supporting units to the squadron will be critical. 4-12. The A2C2 process, civil and military laws, airspace restrictions, radio frequency usage, ground convoy clearances, aircraft operating time restrictions, flight clearances, refueling procedures, and product disposal procedures vary in almost every country in the world. The aviation unit commander must be prepared to adapt his unit to the host nation operating environment or operational considerations. Serious complications can develop when host nation requirements are not met by the force, possibly resulting in restrictions on the unit or even mission failure. In some situations, Army aviation conducting stability operations and support operations may be required to be included on the air component commanders air tasking order to ensure situational awareness and reduce the possibility of fratricide. 4-13. The squadron commander must clearly understand the ROE and be prepared for them to change at any time during an operation. All personnel should be briefed on the ROE prior to every mission. For ROE assistance, the unit commander should consult with the SJA representative. The aviation unit commander should plan for an SJA representative to deploy with the force.
4-3
FM 1-114
STABILITY OPERATIONS
4-15. There are seven types of operations that have some potential to result in armed conflict, therefore involving air cavalry combat capabilities. SHOW OF FORCE 4-16. A show of force is a mission carried out to demonstrate U.S. resolve in which U.S. forces deploy to diffuse a volatile situation that may be detrimental to U.S. interests. It may take the form of combined training exercises, rehearsals, forward deployments of military forces, or introduction and buildup of military forces in a region. Air cavalry assets (mobility, flexibility, agility, and firepower) make them ideal for employment in such operations. Typical missions would include area and route security, screen, and tactical demonstration. NONCOMBATANT EVACUATION OPERATIONS 4-17. NEO relocates threatened civilian noncombatants from locations in a foreign country or host nation. NEO may be conducted in a peaceful, orderly fashion or may require forcible means. Noncombatants may be evacuated by a ground maneuver force or by using aviation. KWs can conduct reconnaissance to aid in locating noncombatants and provide security for all stages of their assembly and movement. COUNTERDRUG OPERATIONS 4-18. The U.S. military has the lead role in detection and monitoring of drug trafficking activities outside U.S. territory and plays a major supporting role to the interagency community involved in counterdrug operations. Air cavalry may be used to support interdiction efforts by monitoring and detecting drug movements, locating production facilities, and reconnaissance of suspected drug production areas at night under FLIR, TIS, and NVDs. The Posse Comitatus Act restricts active duty military units from performing certain reconnaissance functions when these operations are conducted within CONUS. SJA augmentation may be required. SUPPORT FOR INSURGENCIES AND COUNTERINSURGENCIES 4-19. U.S. forces may directly support a host nation's counterinsurgency operations. COMBATING TERRORISM 4-20. Combating terrorism includes the full range of offensive measures taken to deter, prevent, and respond to enemy activity. Air cavalry conducts area security of key locations and route and/or convoy security along critical LOCs to detect or deter enemy activity. PEACE ENFORCEMENT 4-21. These operations are conducted in support of diplomatic efforts to restore peace between hostile factions. Since peace enforcement implies the use of force or its threat to coerce hostile factions to cease hostilities, a squadron assigned to support these efforts must be prepared to apply combat
4-4
Chapter 4
power to restore order, separate warring factions, and return civil order and discipline. Air cavalry units can expect R&S missions and security missions to protect the U.S. and allied forces involved, in addition to tightly controlled applications of force. ATTACKS AND RAIDS 4-22. The Army conducts attacks and raids to create situations that permit seizing and maintaining political and military initiative. Attacks by conventional air, ground, and aviation forces independently or in conjunction with SOF are used to destroy high value targets or demonstrate U.S. capability or resolve. Aviation forces will conduct these attacks and raids with attack or assault helicopter units, or both, often with air cavalry reconnaissance and security elements.
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
PEACEKEEPING OPERATIONS 4-23. These operations support diplomatic efforts to maintain peace in an area of potential conflict. Peacekeeping differs from peace enforcement in that it is conducted with the consent of all parties involved. Air and ground assets are normally employed in screening a demilitarized zone. HUMANITARIAN ASSISTANCE AND DISASTER RELIEF 4-24. When disaster relief, refugee assistance, or damage control missions are conducted outside OCONUS they are categorized as humanitarian assistance operations. These missions can be performed in response to foreign or international agency requests for immediate help. Air cavalry elements may be employed to augment C2 requirements, search for casualties, assess damage, and prevent looting and disorder. The requirements for force protection and security should not be disregarded because hostile factions within a country may oppose these efforts. MILITARY SUPPORT TO CIVILIAN AUTHORITIES 4-25. These are humanitarian assistance and disaster relief missions that are conducted in CONUS. The squadron's effort with those of the civilian authorities requires effective coordination and liaison.
4-5
Chapter 5
MORTARS
5-4. Mortars are organic to heavy DCSs, regimental squadrons but not organic to light DCSs. Mortars are indirect fire weapons organic to the maneuver troops. Mortars provide a responsive and accurate indirect fire capability. They are ideal weapons for attacking targets on reverse slopes, in narrow ravines, and in other areas difficult to strike with low-angle fires. Mortars are also ideal weapons against dismounted troops in the open. They are most effective in suppression, smoke or obscuration, and illumination missions. Suppression missions force the enemy to button up or move to less advantageous positions. Obscuration missions can place smoke directly on the enemy to obscure its vision or between the enemy and friendly forces to conceal movement. During illumination missions, special rounds are used to illuminate the enemy. This illumination allows a daytime engagement
5-0
Chapter 5
capability during periods of limited visibility. Mortar support for the ACT will often be required on short notice or in an immediate reaction situation. This support needs to be coordinated directly with the appropriate GCT. PLANNING 5-5. Mortar fires are planned in the same manner as FA. They are planned on all known or suspected enemy locations. These locations include areas in front of the objective, on the objective, and beyond the objective. Targets are also planned along the most likely enemy avenues of approach. If time allows, planning is detailed, closely coordinated, and disseminated. COORDINATION 5-6. The RAS commander or S3 and the regimental FSO normally accomplish coordination. The situation may dictate that the RAS coordinate directly with the nearest GCT that can provide the mortar support. FS coordination measures and a communications net are established during the coordination process. A quick-fire net is also established to allow the troops to directly request and adjust immediate FS. EMPLOYMENT 5-7. Mortars are best employed to support a squadron operation with immediate suppression or immediate smoke or both. These employment roles will most likely occur during reconnaissance and screening operations. Factors to consider during employment are the locations of the mortars and the locations of squadron assets conducting these operations. Range limitations may frequently preclude the use of mortars for the needed FS. However, mortars should always be considered if available and within range.
5-1
FM 1-114
5-12. known, some suppression assets should be immediately available to pilots or observers. Units to support this effort are designated before the operation immediate SEAD fires when aircraft are used in the area.
5-13. opportunity. Because of the mobility and small size of most AD targets, aircrews use observed fire techniques and engage targets immediately upon
5-2
Chapter 5
detection. Fire is adjusted on these targets by forward observers, attack or scout helicopter pilots, and USAF pilots either directly or through the TAC(A). Commanders may order the forward observer to locate and bring under attack enemy AD systems in the vicinity of the target just before the arrival of friendly aircraft. FIRE SUPPORT 5-14. The potential of FS as a combat multiplier can be realized only through meticulous planning and thorough coordination at all levels. This is especially true of SEAD operations in which the squadron FSE must continually plan to use any and all available assets in a FS role (except mortars due to limited range and/or effect). With coordinated SEAD operations, the commander can protect his assets and fully exploit the capabilities of the air cavalry assets. CLOSE AIR SUPPORT SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR DEFENSES 5-15. Tactical fixed-wing and rotary-wing aircraft may be threatened by highly active and accurate threat ADs. AD suppression sorties and EW missions are conducted to enhance the survivability of tactical aircraft. The squadron must give high priority to SEAD when being supported by tactical aircraft. SEAD is initiated when the squadron calls for FA suppressive fires. 5-16. Effective SEAD will depend on the timely and accurate intelligence of positions and types of enemy weapons. Priority targets for SEAD should be enemy AD systems or sites in the immediate target area. The squadron commander's area of responsibility extends from his FLOT to the limits of observed fire. During the actual air strike, an artillery check-fire need not be imposed. Instead, the ALO, TAC(A), or individual controlling the strike can ascertain the intended attack track of the aircraft. He can then impose an airspace coordination area or shift fires to suspected or actual enemy AD sites. The weapons control status for AD systems should be changed to at least weapons tight during the air strike to reduce the probability of attack by friendly AD fire. Direct fire of organic weapons on the enemy generally will not affect the attack of the target by friendly aircraft. ELECTRONIC WARFARE SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR DEFENSES Contributions 5-17. EW SEAD contributes significantly to the battlefield by reducing the enemys ability to destroy friendly air resources. Typically, AD is a structured activity that is rigidly controlled and assigned target priorities through redundant communication links from AD commanders located in remote C2 posts. Suppression is accomplished by destructive means, disruptive means, or a combination of the two. 5-18. Destructive Suppression. Destructive suppression is used to destroy surface-to-ADs or personnel. Its affects are cumulative and friendly aircraft attrition is steadily reduced. But large demands are placed on combat power when destructive means are employed alone. Therefore, destructive means must be integrated and used with disruptive means, such as jammers, which generally are reusable resources.
5-3
Disruptive Suppression. degrade, deceive, delay, or neutralize surface-to-air defenses or personnel. There are two types of disruptive suppressionactive and passive. Active and avoidance or evasive flight maneuvers and/or profiles. Passive suppression includes camouflage, IR shielding, warning receivers, and 5-20. Disruptive means complement destructive ones, and are best used to Assist destructive ground-based and airborne suppression systems in Temporarily degrade or neutralize enemy AD systems when
5-21. During EW SEAD operations, Army and Air Force suppression systems system, the complexity of the suppression requirement, and the mission unity of effort. The following is a list of suppression capabilities: and observed and unobserved fires, jammers, unmanned aerial The Air Force has visual and sensor target acquisition, attack fighters,
5-4
Chapter 5
Figure 5-1. Restrictive Fire Area No-fire Area 5-24. The NFA (Figure 5-2) is an area into which no fires or their effects are allowed. The two exceptions to the NFA are when the establishing headquarters allows fires on a mission by mission basis; or when a friendly force is engaged by an enemy located within the NFA, and the commander returns fire to defend his force.
5-5
FM 1-114
No-fire Line 5-25. The NFL (Figure 5-3) is a line short of which artillery or ships do not fire except on request or approval of the supported commander, but beyond which they may fire at any time without danger to friendly troops.
Figure 5-3. No-Fire Line. Restrictive Fire Line 5-26. The RFL (Figure 5-4) is a line between converging friendly forces that prohibits fires, or the effects of fires, across the line without coordination with the affected force.
5-6
Chapter 5
Airspace Coordination Area 5-27. Informal ACA (Figure 5-5) is normally used for immediate air strikes, and can be established at battalion or HHQ. Informal ACA can be established by using lateral, altitude, or timed separation. They are usually in effect for a very short period of time. 5-28. Formal ACA (Figure 5-5) is a three-dimensional block of airspace that provides lateral and altitude separation between aircraft and other FS assets, and is established by brigade or HHQ.
Figure 5-5. Airspace Coordination Area PERMISSIVE MEASURES Coordinated Fire Line 5-29. The CFL (Figure 5-6) is a line beyond which conventional (both direct or indirect systems) may fire at any time within the boundaries of the establishing headquarters without additional coordination.
5-7
FM 1-114
Fire Support Coordination Line 5-30. The FSCL (Figure 5-7) is a line established and adjusted by the appropriate land or amphibious force commander (in the Army usually the corps commander; in amphibious operations usually the CLF after coordination with the CATF) within their boundaries in consultation with superior, subordinate, supporting, and affected commanders. Forces attacking targets beyond an FSCL must inform all affected commanders in sufficient time to allow necessary reaction to avoid fratricide, both in the air and on the ground. Supporting elements may attack targets beyond the FSCL, providing the attack will not produce adverse effects on, or to the rear of, the line that may affect current tactical operations.
Figure 5-7. Fire Support Coordination Line Free-fire Area 5-31. An FFA (Figure 5-8) is a specific, designated area into which any weapon system may fire without additional coordination with the establishing headquarters.
5-8
Chapter 5
5-9
FM 1-114
flown. Response to immediate requests may involve launching general alert aircraft, using ground or air alert sorties, or diverting airborne aircraft from other missions.
5-10
Chapter 5
LIMITATIONS 5-41. CAS aircraft are limited by resource scarcity and delivery restrictions caused by limited visibility, adverse weather, and/or the proximity of friendly forces. CAS flight restrictions caused by enemy ADs may impose delayed response and short loiter times or may limit reattack capabilities.
ENGINEER SUPPORT
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 5-44. Combat engineer assets are not organic to ACSs. Engineer support is provided by the regimental engineer company to the RAS and by the division's engineer brigade to the DCS. The RAS may receive engineer support for a specified mission or time. The RAS usually receives this support during route reconnaissance, covering force operations, or guard operations. The engineer platoon leader serves as the RAS engineer and advises the commander on the use of engineers and their equipment. For division cavalry, they will also usually receive an engineer platoon to support similar type missions. When planning engineer support, the commander should consider that the engineers will accompany the lead elements and be employed as far forward as possible. FUNCTIONS 5-45. When required, engineer units provide the squadron with countermobility, survivability, and sustainment engineer support and need to be incorporated into the perimeter defense plan. Engineer units can also perform infantry combat missions, if necessary. Air cavalry's air mobility negates the need for much ground mobility engineer support.
5-11
FM 1-114
Countermobility Engineer Support 5-46. Countermobility engineer support enhances and complements the effectiveness of the ACTMs. Part of the countermobility task is to disrupt enemy attackers or turn them into selected areas such as EAs. These operations canalize the enemy into EAs, degrade its ground mobility, and increase its time in the killing zone. They also ensure that maximum combat power is massed on enemy concentrations. The AHT of the RAS has the capability to support these operations through the emplacement of aerial delivered minefields, i.e., Volcano installed on UH-60s (see FM 1-113). Survivability Engineer Support 5-47. Engineer survivability operations protect semifixed positions of air cavalry from enemy observation and direct and indirect fires. The engineers provide this protection for CPs, FARPS, and maintenance facilities. They can also build revetments for helicopters. Infantry Combat Mission 5-48. When engineers perform infantry combat missions, their ability to accomplish specialized missions is significantly degraded. The infantry mission is one of last resort. Air cavalry must provide its own perimeter defense; perimeter defense is not an engineer function. FM 5-100 contains detailed information about engineer combat operations.
5-12
Chapter 5
ACTIVE AIR DEFENSE 5-51. Air cavalry units have a limited AD capability. The small arms of the squadron or troop can destroy an attacking aircraft or disrupt its attack. FM 44-8 explains the use of small arms in the AD role. PASSIVE AIR DEFENSE 5-52. Target detection from the air is difficult. Threat pilots may or may not be required to see and identify a target to attack it. However, the effectiveness of high-performance aircraft is greatly reduced when units take advantage of terrain for cover and concealment. 5-53. When a unit is stopped, it should Occupy positions that offer cover and concealment. Wipe out vehicle track marks around stationary positions just after movement. Avoid silhouetting vehicles against the skyline or against an area of a different color. Rotate air guards frequently because scanning for long periods dulls visual perception skills. Disperse vehicles. Dispersion not only makes detection difficult, it ensures that a single aircraft on a single pass can attack only one vehicle. Post air guards in dismounted positions to provide warning of approaching aircraft. Air warning signals, visual and audible, must be specified in the unit SOP. Place camouflaged coverings on the windshields and headlights of ground vehicles and on the canopies of aircraft. Exposed vehicles should be thoroughly camouflaged. Open hoods of the vehicles to break up silhouettes and allow for more rapid cooling of the engines to counter enemy IR devices. Establish a scatter plan from the AA if attacked by enemy air or artillery. 5-54. When a unit is moving, it should Maintain communications security. Use covered and concealed routes when available. Rotate air guards frequently because scanning for long periods dulls visual perception skills. Post air guards on vehicles to provide warning of approaching aircraft. Specify air warning signals, visual and audible, in the unit SOP. Turn vehicles 90 degrees to the direction of attack, if attacked. Aircraft normally attack parallel to the movement of the convoy and this countermeasure will quickly get vehicles out of the line of fire. Add aircraft for convoy security to provide additional protection from enemy air attacks.
5-13
FM 1-114
INTELLIGENCE
5-55. Intelligence enables the commander to see the battlefield. The commander's ability to visualize the battlefield directly influences the effectiveness of maneuver and FS and the protection of the force. Properly analyzed intelligence will aid in graphically depicting the enemy, weather, and terrain to support the timely and effective employment of CS assets. 5-56. The squadron S2 is the expert on the enemy, weather, and terrain. Accurate intelligence, sound assessments, and target development can reduce many uncertainties about the battlefield. The IPB process is the principal tool the S2 uses to analyze the enemy, weather, and terrain. FM 34-130 contains detailed information on the IPB process. DS engineer topographic teams, directed by the corps G2, provide the terrain products. The weather team, attached to the regiment, provides the weather products. The squadron can overcome terrain obstacles, but the weather can adversely affect squadron operations. Therefore, direct weather support is required at the regiment and division. The regiment or division relays weather information to the squadron. The weather team can reduce many of the uncertainties in planning combat operations. This team is more critical to aviation maneuver forces than any other force on the battlefield. The forward area limited observation program, pilot reports, and forward observers are other sources of observed weather information. 5-57. The S2 section of the squadron provides graphic displays of doctrinal, situational, event, and decision support templates. The decision support template is important because it translates intelligence estimates and the OPLAN into graphic form. While the S2 may be responsible for coordinating the development of the decision support template, the S3 has overall responsibility for the template. This template is a total staff effort to assist the commander in synchronizing assets and making timely decisions through the war-gaming of friendly and enemy COAs. The commander can use the template to confirm or deny enemy COAs, exploit assailable enemy flanks and select high-value targets for engagement. He can also interdict critical points that will force the enemy to abandon a COA. Further explanation of the decision support template is in FM 34-130. 5-58. Collection management by the S2 is based on intelligence requirements not answered by the IPB process. R&S planning must be thorough. The plan must be continuously updated as the situation changes. The great distances traveled by squadron aircraft require the S2 to continuously interface with the regimental S2 and the support element in the corps TOC. The S2 can then better predict enemy actions in selected areas of interest. Periodic R&S adjustment of high-value targets will ultimately give the commander a timephased picture of the battlefield. It will also give him viable options for using critical assets in a timely manner. 5-59. GSR, remote sensors, UAV, or other MI assets may be placed OPCON or attached to the squadron to enhance reconnaissance and security capabilities. The S2 incorporates these assets into the R&S plan and recommends employment methods to the commander.
5-14
Chapter 5
ELECTRONIC WARFARE
5-60. EW employs electromagnetic energy to determine, exploit, reduce, or prevent hostile use of the electromagnetic spectrum while retaining its use for friendly forces. Both friendly and enemy forces depend on electronic devices and are vulnerable to actions that adversely affect their use of these devices. EW techniques also locate critical enemy units and CPs by identifying communication and noncommunication emitters. Successful integration of electronic deception or jamming can enable the commander to degrade, influence, or possibly destroy the enemy's C2 systems at critical times and places. 5-61. The squadron may receive EH-60 (Quick Fix) assets on a mission basis to perform the direction finding or jamming task. The EH-60 is effective against communication devices but not against radar systems. When CEWI platoon assets are employed, mission profiles vary from far forward at low altitudes to standoff locations at high altitudes. The exact altitude and standoff ranges will vary, depending on the mission and the AD threat. The CEWI platoon is frequently employed in a direction finding or an electronic countermeasure role. An air assault operation across the FLOT is an ideal opportunity to integrate CEWI assets with RAS elements. Screening operations may require the use of EW aircraft along with reconnaissance forces. The three functional areas of EW are EW support measures, electronic countermeasures, and electronic counter-countermeasures. ELECTRONIC WARFARE SUPPORT 5-62. These support measures involve the interception, location, and identification of enemy forces. The CEWI platoon provides combat information for the S2 to meet the commander's requirements for FS, maneuver, and force security. EWS are the primary sources for electronic attack actions by the S3. The S2 must establish priorities for electronic attack plans, orders, and requests. He continuously coordinates the operations of regiment or division MI resources through the regiment or division tactical operations center support element and the battlefield information control center. ELECTRONIC ATTACK 5-63. These countermeasures involve actions taken to prevent or reduce the effective use of the electromagnetic spectrum by hostile forces. The squadron S3 plans and coordinates EW operations. He primarily directs electronic attack actions in jamming and deception roles. With the limited resources available, the S3 must extensively plan those necessary electronic attack targets. Along with the S2 and FSO, the S3 establishes target priorities. Electronic attack actions are taken against targets that will degrade the enemy's ability to respond effectively. Electronic attack tasking and requests are similar to those discussed in paragraph 5-62. ELECTRONIC PROTECTION 5-64. These actions are taken to retain effective friendly use of the electromagnetic spectrum. The S3 coordinates with the C-E officer in establishing the EP to protect friendly C-E operations. Training in the
5-15
FM 1-114
proper employment of the emitters and the emitter design is necessary for effective EP. FM 34-1 provides details about IEW.
COUNTERINTELLIGENCE
5-65. Counterintelligence supports those actions necessary to protect the force; for example, the OPSEC needs of the command. Counterintelligence will support actions that counter the hostile intelligence threat; safeguard the command from surprise; deceive enemy commanders; and counter enemy sabotage, subversive, and terrorist activities. FM 34-60 contains more information on counterintelligence.
5-16
Chapter 5
It provides a primary communications link between the terminal facilities of the division airfields, other airfields, the division TOC, and the flight operations center. The FCC provides a liaison with associated AD fire units that provide low altitude radar coverage over the division and beyond the FLOT. Through voice and data link, this information is forwarded via AD, Army aviation, and Air Force systems to aircraft operating in and forward of the division area. REGIMENTAL AND SQUADRON AIRSPACE MANAGEMENT 5-70. At regimental and squadron levels, ATS elements cannot manage airspace using positive control methods. They will use procedural control methods. At these levels, airspace management and FS coordination functions are closely interwoven. These functions involve detailed coordination and integration of tactical fire and maneuver operations. Therefore, those individuals directly involved in the conduct of localized combat operations perform airspace management functions as part of the corps airspace control system. These individuals include squadron and troop commanders, FS coordinators, air liaison officers, and forward air controllers. Although commanders will communicate directly with Army aviators to accomplish tasking and coordinate tactics and techniques, ATS elements will make every effort possible to provide advisory information or other needed assistance. For example, ATS elements may establish passive landing sites or nonprecision passive navigation systems.
5-17
FM 1-114
replacement company, and postal company. The RSS of the ACR coordinates with these units for any support the RAS needs. The COSCOM is tailored for flexibility and provides support consistent with the mission. FMs 1-111, 63-3, and 100-10 describe COSCOM operations in detail.
5-73. Division cavalry CSS operations are conducted primarily through the HHT and AVUM troop. The armored DCS receives support from the DASB. In squadrons assigned to light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions, CSS is provided primarily by FSSE from the DISCOM. The support relationship established with division influences the location of the SSA. In squadrons assigned to light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions the field trains normally are collocated within the DSA or aviation BSA. In the heavy division, the squadron will normally fall under the OPCON of the division commander and be located in a position where it can be best supported by both ground and air CSS operations. This is frequently well forward in the vicinity of a maneuver brigades BSA. The squadron receives AVIM support from the DASB or DISCOM. The DASB (armored division) or DISCOM (light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions) provides AVIM support for the AVUM troop including allied shops support, backup AVUM, aircraft recovery support, and aviation Class IX repair parts.
SUPPLY CLASSES
CLASS I 5-75. The normal basic load of MREs for the RAS and DCS is a three-day supply. The RAS S4 consolidates ration requests from subordinate troops and sends them to the regimental S&T troop. The S&T troop then consolidates all squadron requests and sends them to the RMMC. The RAS S4 requests replenishment of the Class I basic load through the RMMC. In the RAS, regimental food service personnel draw rations from the regimental S&T troop Class I point in the RSA using supply point distribution. The consolidated food service section in the squadron HHT then prepares and distributes the food according to unit SOP.
5-18
Chapter 5
5-76. Subsistence for DCSs in the light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions is provided by the FSB. HSCs of the FSB or the HSC of the MSB provide Class I or ration breakdown points. 5-77. In the armored division cavalry, ration requests are sent from the squadron through the DASB to the DMMC or FSB with area support responsibility. The DASB supply platoon coordinates for delivery based on feeder reports and operates a Class I break point and distributes rations to the squadron. WATER 5-78. For the RAS, water is located at the Class I distribution point. The S&T troop of the RSS is responsible for water potability and distribution, to include the establishment of water points. Squadrons draw water from the nearest water point, using supply point distribution. Water is delivered forward on the troop supply trucks as part of the LOGPAC. 5-79. For the division cavalry, water is supplied to the division by the MSB S&S company (armored divisions) or MSB HSC (light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions). These water points are normally in the DSA and in each BSA. Resupply at the squadron level is similar to the RAS. CLASSES II, III (PACKAGED), IV, AND VII 5-80. The RAS receives its Classes II, III (packaged), IV, and VII supplies from the S&T troop of the RSS. In the armored division cavalry, these supplies are provided by the DASB in the Aviation BSA, a DASB supply platoon, area supporting FSB or the DMMC. In the light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions, these supplies are provided by the MSB HSC in the DSA or by the forward HSC in the BSA on an area basis. 5-81. Requirements for Classes II, III (packaged), IV, and VII supplies, flow from the RAS through the RMMC to the COSCOM MMCs. Normally, RAS elements are forward and send requirements to the field trains (S4). CLASS III (BULK) 5-82. In the ACR, the S&T troop of the RSS receives, temporarily stores, issues, and distributes Class III (bulk) fuel supplies. The petroleum storage and issue section of the S&T troop in the RSA operates Class III distribution points. The S4 forecasts fuel requirements for the squadron during the planning process and transmits this request to the Class III section of the regimental MMC. COSCOM may throughput Class III(A) bulk directly to the RAS. 5-83. In the division cavalry, the air troop commanders in conjunction with the Class III and/or Class V platoon sergeant and flight operations officer forecast Classes III(A) and V(A) and submit to the S4. These forecasts and reporting times are established in the division SOP. Depending on the support relationship in effect, the forecast is submitted through the aviation brigade S4 or DASB supply platoon and/or FSB, to the MSB, or directly to the DMMC. In the light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions, MSB
5-19
FM 1-114
HSC in the DSA or by the forward HSC in the BSA on an area basis, receives, temporarily stores, and issues Class III (bulk). 5-84. Emergency aerial resupply of fuel is accomplished using collapsible 500-gallon drums. In the RAS, the AHT may be used to deliver fuel from the S&T troop Class III point to squadron trains, troop trains, or direct to the FARP. In the division cavalry, this type of utility helicopter support is requested through the aviation brigade headquarters from the GSAB (armored divisions), assault battalion (light infantry and airborne divisions), or command aviation battalion and/or medium helicopter battalion (air assault division). CLASS V 5-85. In the ACR, the S4 initiates Class V and V(A) requests. The ACR or corps ammunition officer authenticates the requests. If an emergency shortage of ammunition occurs, the corps can use PLS or stake and platform trailers to deliver ammunition by throughput distribution directly to the squadrons combat trains. It may also arrange for aerial resupply. The Class III and/or Class V platoon and the AHT are the primary RAS assets that handle and transport Class V. Cross-leveling Class V(A) supplies within the ACR may be necessary to meet emergency requirements. 5-86. For the division cavalry, the DAO, located in the DMMC, performs ammunition management for the division and exercises staff supervision over all ATPs. Division or higher commanders determine the ammunition basic loads based on the situation and availability. 5-87. The majority of aviation ammunition is usually issued at an ASP. To meet the needs of the squadron, the S4 must coordinate through the DASB support operations and DAO to route ammunition from COSCOM directly to an ATP providing area support or to a temporary ATP in the FLE. The aviation brigade may have a supporting ATP for some operations that can be used by the squadron to reduce turnaround time. The S4 must ensure that he coordinates for the movement of any Class V(A) in area supporting ATPs. In the light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions, the forward HSC ATP in the BSA, or DS ammunition company ATP on an area basis provide the ammunition requested. CLASS VI 5-88. Class VI supplies consist of Army and Air Force Exchange Service items for sale to troops and other authorized individuals. This class of supply should not be confused with the ration supplement (sundries) pack. The sundries pack contains items necessary for the health and welfare of troops, such as essential toilet articles. It is made available in theaters of operation for issue through Class I channels. The S1 submits requests for support through administrative channels when an Army exchange facility is not available. CLASS VII (MAJOR END ITEMS) 5-89. Class VII items are not stocked in squadrons. Major end items are issued on daily battle loss reports by formal requisition. The COSCOM may
5-20
Chapter 5
deliver large items to the RAS or division cavalry. For aircraft, the nondivisional HESC may stock replacement aircraft. These aircraft are generally command regulated and released at the direction of the corps commander. CLASS VIII 5-90. In support of the RAS, the medical troop of the RSS establishes a regimental medical supply section distribution point. 5-91. For the DCS, the DMSO, which is part of the MSB medical company, is responsible for providing medical supply and unit level medical maintenance support. Supplies are distributed to the supported medical units using the supply point distribution method. Request for Class VIII is forwarded to the DMSO and the Class VIII supplies are forwarded to the squadron at the forward medical company providing area support. CLASS IX 5-92. The AVUM troop maintains the aviation PLL for the RAS. Requests for PLL replenishment are submitted to the AVIM SSA, which maintains the regimental ASL for Class IX(A). The SSA either issues the part or forwards a request to the COSCOM MMC. 5-93. In the division cavalry, a PLL is maintained in the squadron by each ground troop, HHT , and the AVUM troop and/or aviation service troop. These PLLs are continuously reconstituted from the ASL in the ASB. MAPS 5-94. For the RAS, the RMMC maintains required stockage levels of unclassified maps. The S&T troop stores the maps. The RMMC directs the issue of maps, using established automated procedures for Classes II, III (packaged), and IV. Requirements are computed under the staff supervision of the G2 (S2 if ACR level), who establishes issue priorities. The RAS S2 submits classified map requirements through the regimental S2. 5-95. In DCSs, the DMMC maintains required stockage levels of unclassified maps. The squadron S2 submits classified map requirements through the aviation brigade S2.
5-21
FM 1-114
potential FARP site. A good location allows for tactical dispersion of aircraft and conceals FARP operations. Tree lines, vegetation, shadows, built-up areas, terrain folds, and reverse slopes should be used to mask the operation from enemy detection. See Figure 5-9 for an example of a FARP setup. Once activated, forward deployed FARPs must be moved frequently to increase survivability particularly when within range of indirect fire systems.
5-97. The FARP is task organized to meet the aviation mission requirements and to provide support in the forward area. Figure 5-10 depicts a FARP collocated with the flight operations center in a FAA. It is composed of aviation Classes III and V assets and can include a maintenance contact
5-22
Chapter 5
team. The AVUM troop and/or aviation service troop commander assembles this team, as required, from assets of the troop. Organizing this contact team is balanced against the requirements of maintenance in the rear where more extensive work can be accomplished. This contact team focuses on BDA and quick repairs. The ACT commanders can combine their crew chiefs to provide a contact team forward at the FARP as well as to support in the rear AA. Movement and resupply of the FARP is conducted by ground or aerial means. When time is critical, air delivery is the most advantageous.
5-23
FM 1-114
5-24
Chapter 5
AVIATION UNIT MAINTENANCE 5-105. The AVUM and/or aviation service troops, along with crew chiefs in the ACTs of the RAS and DCSs, perform AVUM level maintenance. The general concept is for crew chiefs assigned to specific aircraft to perform daily servicing and inspections. Crew chiefs also perform common remove and replace aircraft repairs. Scheduled maintenance (other than daily inspections) and the more time consuming operator level repairs are normally done by the AVUM and/or aviation service troop organic to the squadron. 5-106. Most of the RAS AVUM troop is located in the RSA. The divisional cavalry AVUM and/or aviation service troop is located in the SSA forward with the field trains or RSA. AVIATION INTERMEDIATE MAINTENANCE 5-107. The RAS is supported by a nondivisional AVIM company located at the corps level. The AVIM company provides intermediate shops, maintenance, Class IX ASL, ORF aircraft, and repairable exchange support for the RAS. The AVIM unit also provides backup AVUM and backup recovery support for the squadron. 5-108. The armored DCS is supported by the AVIM company in the DASB. This AVIM company provides the same support as the nondivisional AVIM, but normally does not maintain ORF aircraft. The light infantry, air assault, and airborne divisions are supported by a separate AVIM, under the DISCOM. DEPOT 5-109. The military industrial base in CONUS fixed-base facilities generally provide depot level aviation maintenance support. The nondivisional AVIMs under a SRA normally perform some depot maintenance in theater.
5-25
FM 1-114
More detailed information on aircraft recovery can be found in FMs 1-500 and 1-513.
5-26
Appendix A
Risk Management
GENERAL
A-1. Tough, realistic training conducted to standard is the cornerstone of Army warfighting skills. An intense training environment stresses both soldiers and equipment, creating a high potential for accidents. The potential for accidents increases as training realism increases. Thus realistic training poses a serious drain on warfighting assets. Commanders must find ways to protect their soldiers and equipment from accidents during realistic training to prepare for war. An accidental loss in war is no different in its effects from a combat loss; the asset is gone. Commanders must compensate for the numerical advantages of the threat by protecting their combat resources from accidental loss. How well they do this could be the decisive factor in winning or losing. Commanders and staffs can use this appendix as a guide for managing risk as it applies to their organization and mission.
CONCEPT
A-2. Risk management is a tool leaders can use to make smart risk decisions in tactical operations. It allows leaders to execute more realistic training scenarios not otherwise possible because of the high probability of accidents. Risk management is a commonsense way of accomplishing the mission with the least risk possible. It is a method of getting the job done by identifying the areas that present the highest risk and taking action to eliminate, reduce, or control the risk. Risk management thereby becomes a fully integrated part of mission planning and execution.
RESPONSIBILITIES
A-3. Risk management is not complex, technical, or difficult. It is a comparatively simple decision making process--a way of thinking through a mission to balance mission demands against risks. Once understood, risk management is a way to put more realism into training without paying a price in deaths, injuries, or damaged equipment or all three. Risk management is not limited to training scenarios. It is performed during actual combat as well as in peacetime. Leaders must learn to assess risks during training events and apply the same techniques during combat actions. During combat, risks may be taken but only after they are evaluated and weighed as they are during training. COMMANDER A-4. The commander is responsible for effectively managing risk. He must Willingly determine the proper balance that will achieve optimum, not just adequate, performance from their command. Select the best risk-reduction options provided by the staff.
A-0
Appendix A
Accept or reject residual risk, based on perceived benefits. Train and motivate leaders at all levels to effectively use risk management concepts. EXECUTIVE OFFICER A-5. The XO as director of the staff, ensures integration of risk management in all aspects of staff planning, directing, coordinating, and controlling to support force protection. In the risk management process, each staff officer must Recommend appropriate control measures. Use risk management to assess his or her functional area. Recommend appropriate control measures to reduce or eliminate risk. Integrate selected risk control into plans and orders. Recommend elimination of unnecessary safety restrictions that diminish training effectiveness. TROOP LEADERS A-6. Troop leaders must review control measures for feasibility. They must report risk issues beyond their control or authority to their seniors for resolution. Troop leaders must recommend changes to improve synchronization of their operations in support of the higher commander's plan. They must use the risk management process to identify, assess, and control hazards for their mission.
MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
STEP 1, MAJOR EVENTS A-7. Identify the major events that are expected to occur during the operation and the hazards associated with all specified and implied tasks. A recommendation is to list major events chronologically and display them in a flow chart. This process will aid in the detection of specific risks associated with all specified and implied tasks. The staff reviews and expands, as appropriate, the list of hazards and major events during the war game. The objective is to reflect the total operation from the preparatory actions until the operation is completed or the next phase of operations is under way. This procedure helps to ensure that all significant hazards have been identified, and the staff can determine the appropriate force protection measures. STEP 2, ASSESS HAZARDS A-8. By assessing hazards and evaluating battlefield-framework synchronization, the staff can figure out the level of risk associated with a given hazard and decide where and when control measures are appropriate to protect the force. A-9. Risk assessment matrices provide a simple analysis method of subdividing an operation into its major operational events to discover areas where the staff might eliminate or reduce risk. Each unit should develop its own risk assessment matrix with applicable major operational events similar to the one shown in TC 1-210. Units can use the risk assessment matrix
A-1
FM 1-114
alone or with other analysis techniques. The matrix is nearly always more effective than intuitive methods in identifying the extent of risk. When using a risk assessment matrix, the risk assessor must Review each situation to ensure he has evaluated all significant areas of concern, even if the matrix does not include them. Use the matrix to analyze risk and target areas of concern for risk-reducing techniques. Review individual areas of concern before recommending options. If an area of concern is off the scale in a particular situation, a higher decision level may be required than the risk gauge suggests. A-10. Another technique the risk assessor can use is the METT-T risk assessment procedure. Leaders can subjectively decide the likelihood and extent of accidental loss based on this type of analysis. When using the METT-T format, the risk assessor must Determine the mission's complexity and difficulty. Assess the enemy situation and identify specific hazards. Consider all aspects of the terrain as well as weather and visibility. Determine the supervision required and evaluate the experience, training, morale, and endurance of units and their equipment. Determine the time available for planning and executing the mission. STEP 3, MAKE DECISIONS AND DEVELOP CONTROLS A-11. Make risk acceptance decisions by balancing risk benefits against risk assessments. Complete a preliminary hazard analysis of these events. The preliminary hazard analysis is the initial examination of the hazards of an operation and their implications. It is normally based on the mission analysis and database review and takes place before the details of an operation have been completely defined. The objective of the preliminary hazard analysis is to define, at the earliest possible point in the operational life cycle, the hazards that can be expected. With proper controls, leaders can detect and eliminate unnecessary safety restrictions that impede the realism or effectiveness of training. Check for residual effects before implementing risk reduction options. Visualize what will happen once the option has been implemented. Sometimes reducing one risk will only introduce others. AR 385-10 provides a convenient list of actions that commanders and staff can use as an aid in ranking options. The staff must Identify hazards and assess risk. Focus on critical events first. Eliminate unnecessary risks. Reduce the amount of mission essential and prudent risks by applying controls. Develop control options which synchronize the operation that eliminate or reduce risks. Recommend options for the commander's decision.
A-2
Appendix A
STEP 4, IMPLEMENT CONTROLS A-12. Integrate specific controls into plans, OPORDs, SOPs, training performance standards, and rehearsals. Knowledge of risk controls, down to the individual soldier, is essential for the successful implementation and execution of these controls. STEP 5, SUPERVISE A-13. The commander must enforce controls and standards. Leaders monitor, follow up, verify, and correct or modify, as appropriate, controls that the commander imposes on his subordinates. Monitoring the effects of risk reduction procedures is very important, especially for new and untested procedures. Only by seeing the character of operations can leaders fully appreciate risk implications. When monitoring operational activities, leaders must Avoid administrative intrusions on their subordinates' time. Go where the risks are and spend time at the heart of the action. Analyze and think through issues, not just watch. Work with key personnel to improve operational procedures after the action. (Leaders must not hesitate to assess imminent danger issues on the spot.) Fix systemic problems that are hindering combat effectiveness. Capture and distribute lessons learned from mishaps and near misses for future use.
A-3
Appendix B
Aircraft Characteristics
GENERAL
B-1. Basic information on weapon systems, air transportability, helicopter dimensions, and communications have been provided, in Tables B-1 through B-4, to assist in the planning of operations. Table B-1. Weapon Systems Hellfire or *TOW
8 TOW 16 Hellfire 16 Hellfire/ Hellfire II 4 Hellfire Hellfire 8 km max TOW 3750m max
Air-to-Air Stinger
4 4 5+ km max
NOTES: *The AH-1 uses the TOW missile, as its armor engagement weapon, instead of the Hellfire missile. **Aircraft has a laser for target designation and an ATHS. ***Numbers in each column indicate the maximum load for each system. The total amount of ordnance carried will vary based on METT-T and selected weapon configuration. ****One weapon system per side for Hellfire and/orTOW, ATAS, and 2.75-inch rocket.
Table B-2. Air Transportability Aircraft Type C-130 Rapid High Deploy Density
AH-1 AH-64 CH-47 OH-58A/C OH-58D UH-1 UH-60 1 N/A N/A 2 2 1 N/A 3 3
High Density
6
High Density
12
NOTES: *3 with MMS on, 4 with MMS removed. **Remove stabilator, fold blades (main and tail),fold pylon (UH-60 only), drop main rotor head, fairing steps and antennas. *** Remove stabilator and fold blades (main and tail). ****Remove forward and aft blades, aft pylon, and forward transmission package.
B-0
Appendix B
IMPORTANT: High-density column represents significant aircraft disassembly, so as to reduce the aircraft to minimal size for transport.
Height
137.7 over main rotor 153 over main rotor 161 over main rotor 187.8 over aft pylon 9 7 over main rotor 1210.6 over main rotor 148.2 over tail rotor 1610 over tail rotor
Fuselag e Length
458 *Overall 531 491 *Overall 578 491 *Overall 578 509 *Overall 9810.7 322 *Overall 4011.8 330.4 *Overall 412.4 415 *Overall 570.7 507.5 *Overall 6410
Weight (pounds)
10,000 max 7,500 empty 21,000 max 11,500 empty 23,000 max 12,000 empty 50,000 max 24,000 empty 3,200 max 2,400 empty 5,200 max 3,500 empty 9,500 max 7,400 empty A-20,250 max L-22,000 max 11,000 empty
Rotor Diameter
44
Airspeed (knots)
190 max 120 cruise 164 max 120 cruise
AH-64A
48
AH-64D
48
CH-47D
2 - 60
170 max 130 cruise 120 max 100 cruise 125 max 100 cruise 124/112 max roof/nose 100 cruise 193 max 130 cruise
OH-58C
354
OH-58D
35
UH-1
483.2
538
NOTES: *The word overall in the length column refers to distance from the most forward tip of the forward facing rotor blade to the farthest aft portion of the aircraft (such as, the most aft tip of the rear facing rotor blade on a CH-47). **Endurance figures are based on an average weapons configuration and will vary, depending on specific weapons configurations and loads.
B-1
FM 1-114
AIRCRAFT TYPE
AH-1 AH-64A AH-64D CH-47D OH-58C OH-58D UH-1 UH-60
FM
1 ** 1 (2) 2 *** 0, 1, 2 2 2 2 2
VHF
1 ** 1 (0) 1 *** 2, 1, 0 1 1 1 1
UHF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HF
1 *1
NOTES: *The HF listed above is not currently installed but the wiring and mounts exist. **Configuration is 2 FM and 0 VHF OR 1 FM and 1 VHF. ***Configuration is 2 FM and 0 VHF OR 1 FM and 1 VHF OR 0 FM and 2 VHF.
AH-1 COBRA
B-2. The AH-1 Cobra is a single-engine, tandem-seat, two-bladed attack helicopter. Its crew consists of two rated aviators. The pilot occupies the rear cockpit and the copilot-gunner occupies the front cockpit. The AH-1 is essentially a daytime weapons platform due to the inability to fire and track the TOW missile at night. Some Cobras have been modified with a terminal night sight called C-NITE (Cobra night). This system allows the gunner to thermally track the TOW missile at night through the TSU. See FM 1-112 for a detailed explanation of the aircraft.
AH-64A APACHE
B-3. The AH-64A is a twin-engined, tandem-seat, four-bladed attack helicopter. With its crew of two rated aviators, the pilot occupies the rear cockpit and a copilot-gunner occupies the front cockpit. The aircraft has day, night, and limited adverse weather fighting capabilities. The aircraft is equipped with a LRF/D. The LRF/D is used to designate for the firing of a Hellfire missile and provides range to target information for the fire control system. See FM 1-112 for a detailed explanation of the aircraft.
B-2
Appendix B
CH-47D CHINOOK
B-5. The CH-47D is a twin-engine, tandem rotor helicopter designed for transportation of cargo, troops, and weapons during day, night, visual, and instrument conditions. The maximum single load that can be suspended as a tandem load from the forward and aft hooks is 25,000 pounds. Troop seating arrangements for up to 31 fully equipped ground troops or 24 litters is provided in the CH-47D. See FM 1-113 for a detailed explanation of the aircraft.
OH-58A/C KIOWA
B-6. The OH-58A/C is a single-engine, single-rotor, two-bladed observation helicopter. The crew consists of the pilot, pilot and copilot, pilot and gunner, or pilot and observer.
UH-1H IROQUOIS
B-8. The UH-1H is a single-engine, single-rotor helicopter. Primary mission capability of the helicopter is air movement of supplies and personnel. Secondary missions include stability operations, support operations, air assault, and C2 operations under day, night, visual, and instrument conditions. The aircraft has an external load capability of 4,000 pounds. The aircraft can carry up to 11 combat-loaded troops. See FM 1-113 for a detailed explanation of the aircraft.
B-3
Appendix C
OH-58D Systems
SECTION ISYSTEMS DISCUSSION CREW INTERFACE
C-1. The crew interfaces with a fully integrated glass cockpit. Master controller processor units correlate individual system information before displaying it on the MFDs. The crew can select various displays, referred to as pages, on the MFDs. The primary pages available are vertical situation, horizontal situation, MMS, communication, and weapons. The system also has a series of pages known as built-in test and fault detection and location for maintenance purposes.
C-0
Appendix C
MAST-MOUNTED SIGHT
C-5. The MMS is used only for targeting, not for flying the aircraft. The MMS sensors are approximately 6 feet above the pilots eyes. This allows the crew to view an area while keeping the aircraft masked. The MMS houses the TIS, TVS, LRF/D, and optical boresight assembly. Camouflage, ambient weather, age and/or condition of sensors, and the type of terrain are major factors that affect MMS range capabilities.
TELEVISION SENSOR
C-7. The TVS picture displayed in the cockpit is monochromatic green; the crew cannot distinguish colors. The TVS is generally a day-only sensor. However, because of its low light level capabilities, the TVS can be used at night to look into areas with artificial illumination. For example, the TVS can effectively look inside a lighted aircraft hangar at night. This capability should not be confused with the light amplification capabilities of NVG. The TVS can see through light obscurants, such as haze, but not into thick smoke as with the TIS.
WEAPON CONFIGURATIONS
C-10. The KW has two universal weapon pylons, one on each side. The four primary weapon systems are the .50-caliber machine gun, 70-millimeter rockets, and the Hellfire and Stinger missiles. The .50-caliber machine gun can only be installed on the left side of the KW. The other weapon systems can be mounted on either or both pylons. Weapon mixes are extremely flexible to accommodate METT-T (Figure C-1).
C-1
FM 1-114
* MMS * TIS * TVS * LRF/D * WEAPONS * 2.75-INCH HYDRA 70 ROCKETS * HELLFIRE MISSILES * AIR-TO-AIR STINGER MISSILES * .50 CAL MACHINE GUN
Figure C-1. Weapon Mixes (One Weapon System Per Side) .50-CALIBER MACHINE GUN C-11. The .50-caliber machine gun uses standard military linked .50-caliber ammunition. Its maximum effective range is 2,000 meters. The basic load of .50-caliber ammunition is 500 rounds. Some aircraft are equipped with an AIM-1 laser for targeting. The AIM-1 laser is very small self-contained IR laser mounted on the gun that is visible only with NVGs out to a range of about 1000 meters depending on illumination. 2.75-INCH ROCKETS C-12. The KW can carry one or two rocket pods, for a maximum of 14 rockets. The three primary warheads used are high-explosive, flechettes, and multipurpose submunitions. The pilot can aim the rockets either through the multifunction display or heads-up display. AIR-TO-AIR STINGERS C-13. The KW can carry two ATAS missiles on either pylon, for a maximum of four missiles. The ATAS has a minimum arming range of less than 1,000 meters and a maximum range in excess of 5 kilometers. The pilot can lock onto a target with either the pilot display unit, which is a heads-up sight, or through the ATAS page on the pilots MFD. HELLFIRE MISSILES C-14. The Hellfire is a laser-guided, point-detonating missile. The KW can carry two of these missiles on each pylon, for a maximum of four missiles. The crew guides the missile using laser energy. The minimum engagement
C-2
Appendix C
range is 500 meters, and the maximum range is 8,000 meters, depending on missile model launch modes.
COMMUNICATIONS
C-15. The KW has two FM radios, one UHF radio, and one VHF radio. Provisions for an AN/ARC-199 or AN/ARC-220 HF radio with TSEC/KY-75 or TSEC/KY-100 are in place; however, HF radios are not installed in most KWs. The KW has two TSEC/KY-58s; one is dedicated to the FM 1 radio, and the other can be used for the UHF, VHF, or FM 2 radio. A planned upgrade to the FM SINCGARS radio will contain an embedded KY-58 that will allow the remaining KY-58s to be used for the UHF and VHF radios. The crew can switch between the UHF, VHF, and FM 2 radios in the secure mode anytime during flight. The UHF is Have Quick II capable. The SINCGARS FM radios are FH capable. AIRBORNE TARGET HANDOVER SYSTEM C-16. The ATHS transmits digital data to users via secure or unsecure existing radio links. It can communicate with artillery TACFIRE and BCS nets and will be compatible with the Air Force improved data modem. It has preformatted reports, such as SIT/STAT, SPOT, Artillery, BDA, and CAS, and requests for reports. Target location information from the MMS and navigation systems is automatically placed in the ATHS for target handovers and reports. RETRANSMISSION C-17. Retransmission can be accomplished with FM or HF radios. For example, the crew can receive on FM-1 and retransmit automatically on HF or FM-2.
NAVIGATION
C-18. EGI uses GPS signals to provide accurate position reporting. The system can operate on UTM grid or latitudinal and longitudinal coordinates.
C-3
FM 1-114
AN/AVR-2 C-22. The AN/AVR-2 is a laser detection set. It provides a laser warning to the crew through the AN/APR-39 display. If the aircraft is being lased, the crew also receives a caution message and an audio tone. AN/APX-100 C-23. The AN/APX-100 transponder has Modes 1, 2, 3(A/C), and 4. The crew can change transponder information through the COMM page on the multifunction display.
C-4
Appendix C
preparing essential tasks. Upon the completion of the mission plan, the mission planner initiates a transfer of the premission data to the DTS that downloads the data to the DTC. The DTC is removed from the DTS and transported to the aircraft where the information is downloaded into the aircraft s systems. Upon completion of the mission, the DTC is transported back to the AMPS and inserted into the DTS. This allows the postmission data obtained during the flight to be transferred into the AMPS for mission analysis.
C-5
Appendix D
RESPONSIBILITIES
COMMANDERS D-5. Commanders are responsible for the movement of their unit personnel and equipment. They also Appoint a unit movement officer (and train him). Supervise the operations of subordinate units. Establish policies for rail, air, and sea lines of communication. Ensure compliance with directives, policies, and regulations. Review and validate movement plans, SOPs, and load plans frequently.
D-0
Appendix D
Coordinate with other headquarters for technical data and logistics support. STAFFS D-6. Staffs ensure compliance with the commander's directives and develop unit movement plans. They also Plan and supervise unit movement training. Make recommendations for improvement to the commander. Establish training programs for unit movement personnel. Determine and coordinate logistics support requirements. Ensure compliance with directives, policies, and regulations. Ensure that subordinate unit movement plans, load plans, and SOPs are accurate and current. UNIT MOVEMENT PERSONNEL D-7. Unit movement personnel plan and conduct unit moves. They also Develop unit movement plans, SOPs, load plans, and ensure the DEL maintained in the TC ACCIS is reviewed and current. Conduct unit movement training. Ensure that proper support and logistics requirements are requested. Validate movement plans. Inspect and inventory equipment before and after a unit movement. Ensure proper preparation of personnel and equipment before a unit movement.
D-1
FM 1-114
The G3 or S3 has staff responsibility for tactical moves. Movements are categorized as follows: Category A is a move from a home station with all the equipment authorized for that unit. Category B is a move from a home station with essential equipment only. Category C is a move from a home station with less than essential equipment. (The movement directive will specify what equipment to take.) MOVEMENT INSTRUCTIONS D-10. Movement instructions provide details for the execution of a movement. They are issued to implement the movement program and represent accepted procedures. MOVEMENT ORDER D-11. The movement order directs the movement of personnel and prescribed equipment from one location to another within a stated period. MOVEMENT PLAN D-12. The movement plan provides up-to-date logistics data. These data reflect a summary of transportation requirements, priorities, and limiting factors incident to the movement of one or more units or special grouping of personnel by highway, marine, rail, or air transportation. Movement plans are covered in FM 101-5. LOAD PLAN D-13. The load plan is a preplanned method for loading personnel and equipment for transport.
DEPLOYMENT
D-14. The ITO, in coordination with the UMO, must clear unit cargo and equipment with the USTRANSCOM TCC by providing advance data before actual movement to the POE can begin. This procedure allows the TCC to coordinate movement and reception planning within the POE. Advance data are maintained within the Armys TC ACCIS. Priority must be given to ensuring predeployment maintenance of the DEL to allow timely and accurate transmission of these data by the UMO in conjunction with the ITO requirements for deployments and transportation as specified in the DTR and MILSTAMP. D-15. Command authorities may determine that selected squadrons should self-deploy, and these units must be prepared for that eventuality. Because airlift and sealift assets are limited, selected squadrons should plan to selfdeploy. UH-60 and AH-64 aircraft will be equipped with the necessary fuel, ALSE, and navigation and communication systems needed to conduct selfdeployment operations. They will move from CONUS stations to designated departure points where the preparation of the aircraft will occur. Pre-
D-2
Appendix D
stationed ground and aerial support and maintenance teams provide stopover point assistance. When self-deployed flights arrive at destination points, ferry equipment will be removed and arrangements made for its return and reuse. Self-deployment applies only to aircraft transferred when other transportation assets are not provided, and these aircraft may provide the transport of a small amount of equipment and/or personnel. The command structure must integrate self-deploying aircraft and crews into the theater of operations. This will expedite the availability and effectiveness of these aviation assets at their operational area.
AIRLIFT
D-16. An airlift is an operation executed according to prepared plans designed to ensure air transport of supplies. The movement plan requires that the squadron be able to package and document both equipment and personnel. The mobile capability of the on- and off-load, and tie-down equipment. Therefore, the squadron must be trained not only in mission accomplishment but also in the skill and execution of airlift deployment. Emergency situations require rapid response by the armed forces; air movement fulfills that requirement. D-17. The MAC provides the strategic air assets necessary to move personnel and materiel during emergencies or for operational necessities. Although MAC aircraft are located around the world, they are limited in number and availability. Equipment accepted on MAC aircraft must be within specified space and weight limits. D-18. The unit movement officer is the key to exercising the unit's movement and loading plans. He supervises and conducts training and maintains updated movement data. Because operational requirements may exceed the airlift capacity, the unit movement officer also plans for the use of other types of transportation to conduct the air movement. Detailed information on unit movement planning is in FM 55-9. D-19. Specific planning and support requirements for each unit vary. In an emergency, little time is available for planning. Therefore, the unit movement officer routinely identifies requirements and develops and validates exercise plans to preclude difficulties.
RAIL MOVEMENT
D-20. The division or installation transportation officer or DISCOM movement control officer assists movement officers' plan and identify unit railloading requirements. He provides training material and current procedures for transporting equipment as well as other information to minimize planning time. D-21. When available, rail shipment is used to move heavy and outsized items to the POE. Rail shipment can damage sensitive aircraft components; therefore, this type of equipment must be airlifted. D-22. As with other forms of movement, the aviation unit is responsible for internal administration and preparation of unit assets for rail movement. Plans and SOPs will address all rail requirements such as loading, tie-
D-3
FM 1-114
downs, organization, and specific safety provisions. Rail movement plans are completed as required by the controlling transportation agency. D-23. The information in FM 55-20 will assist the unit movement officer in planning and preparing equipment for rail transport. This manual also provides background information on special movement requirements imposed by foreign countries.
SEALIFT
D-24. Because of the many types of merchant vessels, units can perform only minimum sealift planning and training. Planning and training is limited to on-site surveys and data about the out-loading installation, POEs and PODs and, to a limited extent, vessels that are likely to be employed. The deploying unit will have to prepare accurate cargo-loading movement data. However, HHQ should provide guidance and assistance in sealift planning (See FORSCOM Reg 55-1).
ROAD MARCH
TYPES D-25. The movement of troops from one location to another is inherent in any phase of a military operation. A common form of troop movement is the road march. Road marches may be tactical or nontactical, depending on the enemy situation. Tactical Movement D-26. When contact with the enemy is possible, a unit will conduct a tactical movement. For example, if troops move forward to participate in combat operations, the movement is tactical. The S3 plans tactical movements. Nontactical Movement D-27. If contact with the enemy is unlikely, a unit will conduct a nontactical movement. Movement in the COMMZ to reposition laterally or to ease future operations is nontactical. The S4 may plan nontactical movements. ORGANIZATION D-28. March columns are organized to maintain unit integrity. In a tactical march column, all elements use the same route for a single movement and are under the control of a single commander. A large column may be composed of a number of subdivisions. D-29. Serial. A serial is a major subdivision of a march column. For purposes of planning, regulation, and control, it is organized as a single unit under one commander. A squadron is usually comprised of one serial. D-30. March Unit. A march unit is a subdivision of a serial and is normally a squad, section, platoon, or troop. It moves and halts under the control of a single commander, using oral and visual signals. A radio is used only when
D-4
Appendix D
no other means of communication can be used. March units of the main body are composed of individual units, any attachments, the battalion main CP, and the battalion trains. POL vehicles required for refueling during nontactical marches may move ahead of schedule to establish a forward refueling point. D-31. March columns, regardless of size, are composed of four elements. These elements are the reconnaissance party, the quartering party, the main body, and the trail party. PLANNING PROCESS D-32. Tactical road marches require extensive planning. Commanders and staffs use the estimate process to determine how to best execute a move from one point to another. Road-march planning consists of three concurrent steps. These steps are to determine requirements for the move, analyze organic and nonorganic movement capabilities, and establish unit movement priorities. During movement planning, the squadron commander and staff must consider the following: Enemy situation and capabilities, terrain conditions, and weather. Organization of the squadron. Security measures to be taken before the movement, during movement, and at the destination. Assembly of the march units. Loading of personnel and equipment. Actions at the destination. D-33. When the squadron prepares for a tactical road march, the sequence of planning for the march (if time permits) is the following: Prepare and issue an oral warning order as early as possible to allow subordinates time to prepare for the march. Prepare an estimate of the situation, analyze routes designated by the brigade, and specify the organization of the march serial. Prepare and issue the march order. Prepare detailed movement plans and AA plans. Organize and dispatch reconnaissance and quartering parties as required. PLANNING FACTORS D-34. Planners apply movement formulas to known distance, rate, and time data to derive information necessary to prepare a time schedule. The time schedule requires departures and arrivals of march elements. Time and Distance Relationships D-35. Relationships between time and distance are the basis for march planning. Planners determine how far the column is to travel (distance) and how long it will take to make the move (time). They must also know how much space (length of column) the column will occupy on the route and the distance (road gap) or time (time gap) that separates march columns and
D-5
FM 1-114
their elements. Each term used for distance has a corresponding term for time. The length of a column in kms has an equivalent PST in minutes; the road distance in kms or miles has a corresponding time distance. Relationships between time and distance in the average rate of march are shown in Figure D-1.
Figure D-1. Time and Distance Relationships Distance Factors D-36. Distance factors include vehicle interval, column gap, traffic density, column length, and road gap. These factors are defined below. D-37. Vehicle interval is the distance between two consecutive vehicles of an organized element of a column. D-38. Column gap is the space between two organized elements following each other on the same route. It can be calculated in units of length (road gap) or in units of time (time gap) as measured from the rear of the leading element to the front of the following element. D-39. Traffic density is the average number of vehicles that occupy 1 mile or 1 km of road space, expressed in VPM or VPK. D-40. Length of a column is the length of roadway occupied by a column, including gaps in the column measured from the first vehicle to the last vehicle.
D-6
Appendix D
D-41. Road gap is the distance between two march elements. It is the length aspect of the column gap. Since a road gap is more significant when the column is moving than when the column is halted, it becomes a factor of time rather than distance. Rate Factors D-42. Speed, pace, and rate of march are rate factors. The definitions of these factors are listed below. D-43. Speed is the velocity of a vehicle at a given moment as shown on the speedometer (in KMPH or MPH). D-44. Pace is the regulated speed of a column or element. It is set by the lead vehicle or an individual in the lead element to maintain the prescribed average speed. D-45. Rate of march is the average number of miles or kms traveled in any given period. It includes short periodic halts and other short delays. The rate of march is expressed as miles or kms traveled in an hour. Time Factors D-46. Time is expressed in hours or minutes. The following terms are used to describe time factors: D-47. Pass time (or time length) is time required for a column or its elements to pass a given point on a route. D-48. Time space is time required for a column or its elements to pass any given point on a route plus any additional time (safety factor) added to the PST. D-49. Time gap is time measured between vehicles, march units, serials, or columns as they pass a given point. It is measured from the trail vehicle of one element to the lead vehicle of the following element. D-50. Time lead is time measured between individual vehicles or elements of a column, measured from head to head, as they pass a given point. D-51. Time-distance is time required to move from one point to another at a given rate of march. It is the time required for the head of a column or any single vehicle of a column to move from one point to another at a given rate of march. D-52. Road clearance time is total time required for a column or one of its elements to travel the road distance and clear a point along the route or the RP. Road clearance time equals the columns PST or time space plus time distance. MOVEMENT FORMULA APPLICATION This paragraph implements portions of STANAG 2041.
D-7
FM 1-114
D-53. Distance, rate, and time are the basic factors for movement computations. If the march planner knows two of these factors, he can easily
determine the third by dividing or multiplying one by the other. The movement formulas areas follows: Determine rate by dividing distance by time: R = D T. Determine distance by multiplying rate by time: D = R x T. Determine time by dividing distance by rate: T = D R. D-54. The march planner must determine time-distance, PST, arrival time, and completion time. The procedures for determining these factors are given below. D-55. Time-distance. TDIS is determined by dividing distance to be traveled by rate of march, as shown in Figure D-2. TDIS does not include time for long delays or extended scheduled halts. A TDIS table (Table D-2) is a valuable tool to the march planner. It provides a listing of factors used to calculate the time required to travel certain distances at specified speeds. Travel rates are expressed in speeds and corresponding rates of march. Travel factors are derived from rate of march, which includes time for short, periodic halts and other minor delays that might occur.
TDIS = DISTANCE (miles or km) RATE OF MARCH (mih or kmih) EXAMPLE: Determine TDIS of a serial traveling 135 km at a speed of 24 kmph (rate of march 20 kmih) TDIS = 135 (km) = 6.75 hours 20 kmih 0.75 (fraction) x60 (minutes) 45.00 (minutes)
D-8
Appendix D
SPEED (miles/kmph)
10 mph 16 kmph 15 mph 24 kmph 20 mph 32 kmph 25 mph 40 kmph 30 mph 48 kmph 35 mph 56 kmph 40 mph 65 kmph
D-56. Pass time. PST for a serial is determined by adding march unit PSTs together, including time gaps between march units (Figure D-3).
PST = NO OF VEH x 60 + N0. OF VEH = TIME GAPS (Min) DENSITY x SPEED 25 EXAMPLE: Determine PST of a serial of 150 vehicles organized into 6 march units of 25 vehicles each, traveling at a speed of 24 kmph, with a density of 15 VPK or VPM, and using a 2-minute time gap between march units. PST = 150 x 60 + 150 + (2 x 5) = 9,000 + 6 + 10 = 25 + 6 + 10 15 x 24 25 360 PST = 41 minutes NOTES: 1. Round off fractions of minutes to next higher minute. 2. EXTAL is allocated based on 1 minute per 25 vehicles added to serial PST. EXTAL is equitably added to PST of each march unit in the serial. Figure D-3. Pass Time Formula
D-9
FM 1-114
D-57. Arrival Time. In march planning, the RP is normally designated as the terminal point of movement. Arrival time at the RP is determined by adding TDIS and any scheduled halts to the start-point time (Figure D-4).
HOURS MINUTES SP TIME TIME-DISTANCE SCHEDULED HALT 08 06 01 15 ARRIVAL TIME IS 1545 HOURS Figure D-4. Arrival Time Formula D-58. Completion Time. Completion time is calculated by adding PST to the arrival time or by adding to the start-point time the distance, PST, and any scheduled halts. MARCH ORDER D-59. The march order format is the same for tactical and nontactical movements. The march order is prepared either as an annex to an OPORD, a separate OPORD, or a FRAGO. Figure D-5 shows an example of an OPORD for a road march. D-60. The march order should include, as a minimum, a strip map. A strip map is a sketch of the route of march. It is normally included as an annex to the march order. Figure D-6 shows an example of a strip map. The amount of detail on the strip map depends on its intended purpose and the unit level at which it is prepared. The map should identify critical points, start-point and release-point times and locations, order of march, maximum catch-up speed, distances to be maintained between vehicles and units, AA locations, and instructions on future operations. In designating distance (interval) or density, the planner must know its effect on column length and the time required to move. D-61. The march order also contains a statement of the enemy situation, the weather, and visibility conditions. It should also contain the following (if applicable): Road restrictions and information derived from route reconnaissance. Actions on enemy contact (ground and air). Actions at halts and actions for disabled vehicles. Actions in the AA. 00 45 00 45
D-10
Appendix D
Procedures for resupply, maintenance, and feeding. Location of leaders and a communications plan. D-62. Much of the information needed to conduct the march should be in the unit SOP. Only exceptions to the SOP should be stated in the march order.
(Classification) Copy no of Copies 112th Air Cav Squadron GAY (GL645745) 211600Z Aug 19 EEL OPORD 31 Reference: Map, JOG, NH 16-2, 1:250,000, 1st Edition. Time Zone Used Throughout the Order: ZULU Task Organization: Annex B (Road Movement Table). 1. Situation. a. Enemy Forces. Current INTSUM. b. Friendly Forces. Aviation Brigade moves 221000Aug to AA vicinity FARGO (GN7512).
2. Mission. 112th squadron moves to AA vicinity FARGO (GN7512); SP (GL6672) 221159 Aug; closes on the AA by 221930 Aug. Execution. a. Concept of Operation. Annex A (Route Overlay). I intend to close AA during daylight. BN conducts a motor march, in six march units via Route RED, first march unit crossing SP at 221159 Aug and last march unit clearing the RP, vicinity FARGO, by 221830 Aug. b. March Unit 1: c. March Unit 2: d. March Unit 3: e. March Unit 4: f. March Unit 5: g. March Unit 6: h. Coordinating Instructions. (1) Annex B (Road Movement Table). (2) Quartering party assemble at Main CP at 220900 Aug. (3) Vehicle density: open column; 12 vehicles per kilometer. (4) Rate of march: 24 kilometers per hour. (5) Time gap: Five minutes between march units. (6) Vehicle bumper markings will be covered. 4. Service Support. a. Supply. Each man draw two MREs at breakfast for noon and evening meals on 22 Aug. b. Services. Trail party TF control. (Classification) 3.
D-11
FM 1-114
D-12
Appendix D
Figure D-6. Strip Map ROAD MOVEMENT TABLE. D-63. A road movement table is normally an annex to a movement order as shown in Figure D-7. It is a convenient means of transmitting to subordinate units time schedules and other essential details of the move. It is particularly useful when the inclusion of such details in the OPORD would make the order complicated or unduly long. Road movement tables consist of two parts. The first part contains data paragraphs that reflect information common to two or more march elements. The second part contains a list of serials or march units along with all other necessary information arranged in tabular form. D-64. The march planner must know the times at which serials and march units arrive at and clear critical points. Other information in the road movement table includes serial or march unit number, date of move, units involved, number of vehicles, and load class of the heaviest vehicle routes to be used. A remarks section should reflect any details not covered elsewhere.
D-13
FM 1-114
(Classification) Annex B (Road Movement Table) to OPORD 31 Reference: Map, JOG, NH 16-2, 1:250,000, 1st Edition. Time Zone Used Throughout the Order: Zulu. General Data: 1. Average Speed: 24 kilometers per hour. 2. Traffic Density: 12 vehicles per hour. 3. Halts: 1545-1645, meal and fuel; all others SOP. 4. Critical Points: Route RED. a. SP: BOLL WEEVIL (GL6672). b. RP: FRAGO (GN7512). c. Other critical points: COLUMBIA (GL6979), NIAGARA (GL6893), and BOSTON (GN7106). d. Route Classification: 10X50. e. Route Restriction: None. 5. Main Routes to SP: NA. 6. Main Routes to RP: NA. (Classification)
Figure D-7. Sample Format for a Road Movement Table MARCH PROCEDURES Reconnaissance Party D-65. A squadron, augmented by engineer and other CS assets, conducts a route reconnaissance to determine travel time, capacities of underpasses and bridges, and locations of ferries and fords. Route reconnaissance confirms and supplements data from map studies, HHQ, and air reconnaissance. Quartering Party D-66. The quartering party consists of the quartering parties of each of the companies. The commander dispatches a quartering party to reconnoiter the new area and guide march elements into position. Main Body D-67. Before starting a march, each march unit of a serial reconnoiters its route to the SP and determines the exact time required to reach it. The movement order states the time that the serial will arrive at and clear its SP. The serial commander then determines and announces the times for march units of his serial to arrive at and clear the SP. Arrival time at the SP
D-14
Appendix D
is critical. Each march unit must arrive at and clear the SP on time; otherwise, movement of other elements may be delayed. D-68. During the movement, march units move at the constant speed designated in the order, maintaining proper interval and column gap. Elements in a column of any length may simultaneously encounter many different types of routes and obstacles. As a result, different parts of the column may move at different speeds at the same time. This can produce an undesirable accordion-like action or "whip effect." The movement order gives march speed, rate of march, and maximum catch-up speed to ensure safety and to reduce column whipping. March units report crossing each control point as directed by the march order. During the move, air and ground security are maintained. Trail Party D-69. The trail party is normally made up of elements of the HHT maintenance platoon and is the last unit in a TF serial. The squadron movement officer leads the trail party. Its function is to recover disabled vehicles. If a vehicle cannot be repaired or towed, the vehicle and its crew are moved off the road into a secure area. Crewmembers are given sufficient food and water and left with the vehicle. When vehicles are left behind, the BMO reports their locations and the reason they were left behind to the TF S4. Once the trail party completes the road march, maintenance priority becomes recovery of disabled vehicles. A tactical road march is not complete until all march units and vehicles arrive at their destination. MARCH TECHNIQUES Close Column D-70. In a close column, vehicles are spaced about 20 to 25 meters apart during daylight hours. At night, vehicles are spaced so that each driver can see the two lights in the blackout marker of the vehicle ahead. A close column is normally used for marches during the hours of darkness under blackout driving conditions. This method of marching takes maximum advantage of the traffic capacity of the route but provides little dispersion. Normally, vehicle density is about 30 VPK along the route. Open Column D-71. In an open column, the distance between vehicles is increased to provide greater dispersion. The distance between vehicles varies from 50 to 100 meters, but may be greater if required. An open column is normally used during daylight. It may also be used at night using IR lights, blackout lights, or passive night-vision equipment. Vehicle density varies from 10 to 15 VPK. Infiltration D-72. During a move by infiltration, vehicles are dispatched individually, in small groups, or at irregular intervals at a rate that will keep the traffic density down and prevent undue massing of vehicles. Infiltration provides the best possible passive defense against enemy observation and attack. It is
D-15
FM 1-114
suited for tactical marches when sufficient time and road space are available and when maximum security, deception, and dispersion are desired. CONTROL MEASURES Critical Point D-73. Critical points on a route are those points used for reference in providing instructions, places where interference with movement might occur, or places where timing might be a critical factor. The route reconnaissance report or a map study should provide the march planner with information to designate critical points along the route of march and distances from one critical point to another. At designated critical points, guides or signs may be used to ensure the smooth flow of traffic. The convoy commander may want to be present at the passing of some critical points. The SP and RP are two critical points that are always designated. Using the checkpoint symbol, critical points are designated by number, letter, or code word. The march planner must ensure that designations for critical points do not conflict with those of checkpoints. Start Point D-74. SPs provide all units of a march column a common point for starting their movement. When units use more than one route, each route has a SP. The SP is a place along the route of march that is easily recognizable on the map and on the ground such as a road intersection. An SP should be far enough from AAs to allow units to organize and move at the prescribed speed and interval when they reach the SP. No element of a march column should be required to march to the rear or through another unit to reach the SP. Release Point D-75. RPs provide all units of the march column a common point at which to reestablish control of their parent unit. The RP should be on the route of march and easily recognizable on the map and on the ground. Units do not stay at the RP. Guides meet units as they arrive at the RP and lead them to the AA. Multiple routes and cross-country movement from the RP to AAs enable units to disperse rapidly. No unit should be required to countermarch or pass through another unit to reach its new position. Strip Map D-76. Copies of the strip map should be reproduced and distributed to all key personnel. The strip map should contain the SP and RP, restrictions, and critical points and the distances between them. SECURITY D-77. During the march, units maintain security through observation, weapons orientation, dispersion, and camouflage. Commanders assign sectors of observation to their personnel so that there is a 360-degree observation. Weapons are oriented on specific sectors throughout the column. The lead elements cover the front, following elements cover
D-16
Appendix D
alternate flanks, and the trail element covers the rear. Security is also maintained during halts. D-78. Scheduled halts are planned along the march route for maintenance and rest or to follow higher level movement orders. At scheduled halts, vehicles and soldiers move to the side of the road while maintaining march dispersion. Local security is set up immediately, and drivers perform operational maintenance checks. However, the unit is ready to move at a moment's notice. D-79. Unscheduled halts and actions may be caused by unforeseen developments such as obstacles, traffic congestion, or equipment failure. If a halt is necessary, the march column's first priority is to establish security. Each unit forms a hasty perimeter defense. D-80. To minimize the squadron's vulnerability to enemy air attack, AD must be planned and AD security measures implemented. The convoy commander must effectively integrate his ADA assets into his fire plans and ensure that all passive and active AD measures implemented at company level are planned and used. D-81. Each vehicle in a motor march has an air guard to provide air security. However, specific vehicles may be designated as air guard vehicles to conduct air rather than ground observation. D-82. Obstacles that are reported by an aeroscout platoon should be bypassed if possible. If obstacles cannot be bypassed, the lead march unit goes into a hasty defense to cover and overwatch. If engineers are available to assist, the lead march unit can breach the obstacle. As the lead march unit breaches the obstacle, the other march units move at decreased speed or move off the road and monitor the battalion command net. D-83. If the TF comes under attack by enemy indirect fire during the road march, the unit in contact continues to move. The remainder of the TF attempts to bypass the impact area (Figure D-8). D-84. If the TF is attacked by hostile aircraft during the march, the march unit that is attacked moves off the road into a quick defensive posture and immediately engages the aircraft with all available automatic weapons. The rest of the convoy moves to covered and concealed areas until the engagement stops. D-85. Ambushes are fought without delay. If the convoy is ambushed, the march unit in the kill zone increases its speed, fights through, and reports the ambush. D-86. Disabled vehicles must not obstruct traffic; they are moved off the road and their status is reported immediately. Security is established and guides are posted to direct traffic. If the operator repairs the vehicle, he rejoins the rear of the column. If the operator cannot repair the vehicle, trail party maintenance elements recover it. D-87. Messengers and visual signals are the preferred means of communication during road marches. Because the enemy has radio directionfinding equipment, the radio is used only in emergencies and when no other means of communication can be used. Road guides can also be used to pass
D-17
FM 1-114
messages from one march unit to a following march unit. Because of the need
Figure D-8. Actions Under Indirect Fire for radio silence, road guides are used to control the speed of march units and the intervals between them. D-88. Restrictions are points along the route of march where movement may be hindered or obstructed. These points can include bridges, intersections, ferries, and bypasses. The march planner should stagger start times, adjust speeds to allow for restrictions, or plan to halt the column en route until the restriction is passed. D-89. Units must be able to operate under limited visibility conditions caused by darkness, smoke, dust, fog, heavy rain, or heavy snow. Limited visibility decreases the speed of movement and increases difficulties in navigation, recognizing checkpoints, and maintaining proper interval between units. To overcome C2 problems caused by limited visibility, convoy commanders may position themselves just behind lead elements. More restrictive control measures, such as additional checkpoints, PLs, and use of a single route, may become necessary. D-90. The convoy commander also plans for an NBC attack. Some measures he takes are given below. D-91. He ensures that protective and decontamination materials are properly distributed and their location known to the entire march unit.
D-18
Appendix D
D-92. He ensures that the proper MOPP level is maintained, based on the threat and the temperature level. Personnel may start out in modified MOPP 3 (according to FM 3-4) to avoid having to stop to change into MOPP 3 or MOPP 4 from a lower level of MOPP. However, when a high threat of CG agent use exists or when agents have been used on the battlefield, aircrews fly in MOPP 4. D-93. He ensures that chemically or biologically contaminated areas are avoided if possible. If contaminated areas must be crossed, personnel will Use MOPP 4. Cover as much equipment as possible. Avoid moving through underbrush. Stay on hard-surfaced roads. Avoid low areas. Avoid moving early or late in the day. Stagger vehicles in the column. Decrease speed to reduce dust or mud. Increase vehicle interval. Scrape the surfaces of dirt roads to clear them of contamination. D-94. He ensures that nuclear contaminated areas area avoided, if possible. If nuclear contaminated areas must be crossed, personnel will Wear modified MOPP 3 gear. Avoid stirring up dust as much as possible. Ensure that the IM-174 or AN/VDR-2 radiacmeter is used. Wet roads to minimize fallout dust, if feasible.
TRAINING
D-95. There are no special training requirements for unit movement personnel; however, some specialized courses are available. The Joint Military Packaging Center, Aberdeen Proving Grounds, Maryland, trains soldiers to prepare hazardous cargo for transport. Although not a training requirement, individuals who certify that hazardous cargo is properly prepared for shipment must be designated on orders to sign DD Form 13872, Special Handling Data/Certification. In addition, the US Air Force conducts the MAC airload planner courses, which trains unit movement officers to plan movements using USAF assets.
D-19
FM 1-114
Joint Pub 4-01.3 FM 1-111 FM 1-564 FM 55-9 FM 55-15 FM 55-30 FM 55-65 TM 38-250 TM 55-625 TM 55-2200-001-12
D-20
Appendix E
E-0
Appendix E
If directed by the commander, develops plans and orders for moving the AA. Plans for air routes and conducts airspace management for the air routes to the new AA. Plans for fires to support the AA move. Develops a plan for reconnaissance of the movement routes and new AA location. Plans, and requests support if necessary, for MEDEVAC assets to assist during the move. Coordinates with higher or adjacent units for land to establish an AA. Requests engineer support to assist in AA improvement. Coordinates and requests AD support for the AA. E-5. The squadron XO performs the following AA duties: Establishes timelines for AA moves. Develops triggers, based upon a decision support template (developed by the S2), for displacement of the AA. Conducts a rehearsal of AA moves and occupations. E-6. The CSM performs the following AA duties: Assists the S3 and S4 in the development of movement orders. Supervises the break down of the AA. Leads the quartering and/or advanced party, as directed by the commander. Supervises the establishment of the new AA. E-7. The squadron S4 performs the following AA duties: Develops plans and orders for moving the AA, if directed by the commander Develops march tables for the vehicle convoy to the new AA. Selects the location for the CTCP. E-8. The HHT commander and/or 1SG performs the following AA duties: Organizes the march serials, designates serial commanders, and conducts convoy briefings. Leads the quartering and/or advanced party, as directed by the commander. Selects locations for future AAs in conjunction with the S3. Conducts a reconnaissance of proposed AA sites. Selects emergency displacement AAs. E-9. The squadron S2 performs the following AA duties: Develops an event template and DST for the AA, which results in DPs necessary for planning and executing AA displacement. Develops NAIs in the vicinity of the AA and assists the S3 in developing an R&S plan for the AA. Tracks the enemy situation in relation to the displacement DPs, and informs the commander when the enemy reaches the selected DPs.
E-1
FM 1-114
Assists the HHT Commander and S3 in selecting new AAs by conducting a threat and terrain analysis of the proposed AA location. E-10. The communications-electronics officer, usually an NCO by MTOE, performs the following AA duties: Analyzes potential AA sites and determines their suitability in terms of providing communications for the squadron. Establishes a retransmission, if required, to assist during unit moves. Analyzes potential AAs for their proximity to MSE nodes.
E-2
Appendix E
E-15. Security of the FAA is based on the ability of the squadron to detect threats and react to them by moving the aircraft to another location. Crews will complete a through-flight inspection of their aircraft immediately after the FAA security has been established. Squadron aircraft must be prepared for rapid departure. The priority of tasks for each troop is to Establish local security. Establish wire communications with the TAC CP. Complete through-flights of aircraft. Continue to plan missions.
E-3
FM 1-114
QUARTERING PARTY Reconnaissance E-19. NBC reconnaissance should be conducted if NBC contamination is suspected or likely. Prior to movement the S2 should be consulted to determine the likelihood of NBC contamination in the new AA. Security E-20. Security at this point may consist of establishing OPs along the most likely enemy avenues of approach. ADVANCED PARTY E-21. The advanced party conducts their operations after completion of the quartering party reconnaissance. The advanced party Establishes security. Establishes communications with the TOC in the AA. Determines the locations of the TOC, ALOC, troop elements, and FARP. Confirms suitability of the area. Clears any safety hazards from the area. Establishes internal wire communications to the troop areas. Clears and marks aircraft parking positions. Establishes LP/OPs and dismount point. Emplaces M8 alarms.
E-4
Appendix E
Establish individual fighting positions and survivability positions. Establish crew served weapons fighting positions. Establish a dismount point. Coordinate with adjacent units for security. Ensure that coordination and communications with adjacent units are established if the adjacent unit is within range of the squadrons direct fire weapons systems. Develop R&S plan. (The S2 develops NAIs and the S3 develops a plan to keep the NAIs under observation.) Submit sector sketches to the squadron. (Troops submit sector sketches for incorporation into the squadron security plan.) Establish a QRF. Conduct accountability of all personnel and weapons. AIR ARRIVAL E-24. Squadron aircraft should arrive after the ground portion of the main body. During AA movement, the squadron must consider and make provisions for maintaining communications with the squadron aircraft located at the previous AA site. When the aircraft arrive they should be positioned in a predetermined location selected by the advanced party. The location of the aircraft should provide the maximum concealment possible. The aircraft should not park too close together. Upon arrival, aircrews should complete a postflight inspection, report any problems to the commander, and assist in the establishment of the AA.
E-5
FM 1-114
OBSTACLE DEVELOPMENT E-28. Engineer support can construct, repair, and maintain tactical obstacles, defensive positions, and logistics field sites within the AAs. Protected positions can be prepared for CPs, aircraft parking, FARPs, and maintenance facilities (see FMs 5-100-15 and 5-71-100). FIGHTING POSITIONS E-29. The squadron and/or troop establishes crew served fighting positions that cover the most likely enemy avenues of approach. The fighting positions should be continuously occupied. Range cards must be prepared and present, so that new guard shifts are aware of their responsibilities in securing the AA. LISTENING POSTS AND/OR OBSERVATION POSTS E-30. The squadron may establish LP/OPs in the vicinity of the AA. The purpose of these locations is to provide early warning to the squadron of anyone approaching the AA. LP/OPs should be placed along the most likely enemy avenues of approach and far enough away from the AA to provide adequate warning to the squadron of impending attack. The LP/OP must maintain communications with the TOC. DISMOUNT POINT E-31. The squadron may establish a dismount point to control the flow of traffic in and out of the AA. If engineer support is available, the remainder of the AA may be blocked (berms may be established around the AA). The dismount point controls traffic flow in and out of the AA, and raises suspicion on any vehicle that is approaching the AA from a direction other than the dismount point. INDIRECT FIRE E-32. The squadron may plan indirect fire in the vicinity of the AA. Final protective fires are established to protect the squadron during a displacement due to enemy attack. The LP/OPs may also have responsibility for FS targets within their area. When planning indirect fire for the AA, the commander must develop an observer plan. ASSEMBLY AREA RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE PLAN E-33. The S2 and S3 work together to establish an R&S plan for the squadron. The S2 does a thorough analysis of the area and develops NAIs. The S3 develops a plan for reconnaissance of those NAIs. The reconnaissance plan may consist of aerial reconnaissance by squadron aircraft, or it may consist of ground reconnaissance by LP/OPs or ground vehicles. DISPLACEMENT ASSEMBLY AREAS E-34. The squadron must establish locations for both the ground vehicles and aircraft to scatter to in the event of an emergency displacement. These areas may not be the same place. As soon as possible after arrival at the AA site, scatter locations must be selected. All squadron aircrews and vehicle
E-6
Appendix E
drivers must know the location of the scatter site and the route to get to the site. Strip maps should be prepared for each vehicle and aircraft, and a sketch of the emergency displacement plan should be located in the TOC. FRIENDLY AIR DEFENSE ARTILLERY E-35. Coordination should be made with friendly ADA units that may be in the vicinity of the AA. These units may be able to provide the aviation unit with area AD coverage of the AA. If not, the squadron can request from higher for AD assets to cover critical squadron assets. Additionally, coordination should be made with friendly ADA units to ensure they are aware of the presence of friendly aircraft in the area. These ADA units may be able to assist in checking IFF equipment by interrogating squadron aircraft as they depart and arrive at the AA.
E-7
FM 1-114
upgrades their readiness level and conducts sequential preparations for displacement. As the DPs are reached, the squadron gets more prepared to move, so when the enemy reaches the DP that calls for the AA to displace, the squadron is already prepared to move. Establishing REDCON levels ensures that the squadron is ready to move immediately when required and ensures that essential equipment is not left behind during the displacement.
E-8
Appendix F
F-1
FM 1-114
of the order. This can be accomplished by using carbon paper copies of the order format, the AMPS word processing function, or a computer. F-8. The troop five-paragraph order is presented with SITTEMP (with information from the event templateenemy time lines, NAIs, TAIs and DPs), maneuver graphics, and FS graphics. If applicable, the mission briefer will brief CSS graphics and obstacle graphics. Additional items may include sketches, matrices and knee board cards (communication card, maneuver and/or actions on the objective sketch, and route card). F-9. The presentation will begin with a roll call and distribution of supporting products, then hold all questions until the end. Do not start the order until all products and presentation materials are ready. Finally, be positive, portray confidence and avoid repetition.
TASK ORGANIZATION
TASK ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT F-10. Task organization for combat includes all combat elements, CS elements attached, OPCON, or in DS. ACTs may receive ground scouts OPCON for limited duration missions. ACT may be attached or placed under OPCON to another unit. Formal task organization begins after COA analysis is complete. The commander task organizes subordinate units to maximize the capabilities of subordinate commanders to accomplish their assigned tasks. Task organization further facilitates flexibility and synchronization. It allows the commander to tailor forces to Adapt to conditions imposed by METT-T. Further the commander s intent and concept, support the scheme of maneuver, and follow his commander s guidance. Weight the main effort by providing additional combat or combat support units; by establishing priorities of fire, protection, or effort; or by using combat multipliers such as lethal and nonlethal fires. Allocate resources with minimum restrictions on their employment. DOCTRINAL DEFINITIONSCOMMAND RELATIONSHIPS Attach F-11. Attach is the placement of units or personnel in an organization where such placement is relatively temporary. Subject to limitations imposed by the attachment order, the commander of the formation, unit, or organization receiving the attachment has the responsibility to provide the attached units with sustainment support above its organic capability. However, the parent unit will normally retain the responsibility for transfer and promotion of personnel. Operational Control F-12. OPCON is transferable command authority that may be exercised by commanders at any echelon at or below the level of combatant command. OPCON is inherent in combatant command and is the authority to perform those functions of command over subordinate forces involving organizing
F-2
Appendix E
and employing commands and forces, assigning tasks, designating objectives, and giving authoritative direction necessary to accomplish the mission. PRESENTATION TECHNIQUESTASK ORGANIZATION F-13. Air cavalry is expressed as ACTMs, lead, or wingman teams. Attack is expressed in ACTMs or heavy and light attack teams, lead, or wingman teams. The task organization of the parent unit should be outlined. This provides subordinates with an understanding of the higher units organization for the mission and provides a higher degree of friendly situational awareness. PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS F-14. Often capabilities, limitations, and CSS requirements are not identified for attachments. F-15. The composition of the parent unit for the operation is not clearly defined, nor is the effective time of the relationship identified. F-16. Attachments typically are not present for the OPORD brief or for planning, which results in a lack of integration and synchronization. Linkup coordination must be conducted immediately upon notification of the command relationship. F-17. Typically, attached or OPCON units and/or personnel are not familiar with the troop SOP. Commanders should develop an attachment extract from the SOP covering key elements of maneuver, C2, and CSS operations. F-18. When placed under OPCON or attached to a higher unit, the troop should immediately begin liaison. This will assist the gaining unit with identifying capabilities, limitations, and special requirements for employment and allow the troop to begin concurrent or parallel planning. F-19. LNOs are typically junior officers and are not equipped with adequate information on the status of the unit, communications, transportation, weapons danger areas, status of battalion or squadron CSS assets, (FARP locations and status) and commanders guidance for employment. LNOs must be experienced, informed, self-sufficient, and well-equipped. An LNO handbook will assist LNOs during the planning phase of the linkup.
F-3
FM 1-114
be refined to include locations of individual formations, vehicles, and weapons ranges. Enemy reconnaissance and security forces throughout the AO will be included.
F-4
Appendix E
F-5
FM 1-114
F-6
Appendix E
F-7
FM 1-114
Intent of the Next Two Higher Commanders F-28. The intent will be stated two levels up. A bullet format will be used to emphasize the next higher intent (squadron) in the written order.
F-8
Appendix E
F-9
FM 1-114
MISSION
F-32. The OPORD will state clearly and concisely the essential tasks and purpose (who, what, when, where and why) for the mission. It will include on-order missions, but will not include be prepared missions.
F-10
Appendix E
Doctrinally Correct Terminology for Intent and Mission Statements (FM 101-5) Doctrinal Forms (1st Half of the What)
All Operations
Demonstration Feint Display Ruse Passage of Lines Tactical Combat Force
Reconnaissance
Area Zone Route Reconnaissance in force
Security
Screen Guard Area Cover Flank Guard Advance Guard Rear Guard
Offense
Attack Counter-attack Deliberate Hasty Main Spoiling Supporting Encirclement Exploitation Follow and assume Follow and support Infiltration Insertion Linkup Movement to Contact Advance to Contact Meeting Engagement Pursuit Raid Show of force Support Force Penetration Envelopment
Defense
Mobile Area In Sector In Battle Position In Strong Point Deliberate Hasty Reverse Slope Relief In Place
The doctrinal task plus the doctrinal form equals the what in the mission statement.
F-11
FM 1-114
EXECUTION
F-33. The OPORD will state clearly and concisely the execution of the mission.
F-12
Appendix E
F-36. Example: The purpose of this operation is to allow the squadron to establish a flank guard on key terrain along PL Horse with sufficient time to allow the establishment of a 5- to 7-kilometer deep security zone to destroy the FSE and AGMB. Our key tasks are as follows: Conduct a hasty zone reconnaissance (force oriented) to allow the squadron to move in zone to set the guard not later than 3 hours after LD. We must gain contact with enemy remnants in zone and conduct target handovers with the GCTs for destruction. Do not slow our tempo by becoming decisively engaged prior to the screen on PL Maverick. Maintain sufficient depth along the screen to prevent observation of the squadron main defense and allow the destruction of regimental reconnaissance, and to gain contact with the FSE. Conduct battle handover with the GCTs as the FSE penetrates PL Horse. Contact is gained and maintained with the FSE and BHO is conducted with the GCTs for destruction. Following BHO, the troop reconsolidates in the FAA and is prepared to conduct hasty attacks on platoon size enemy penetrations of PL Custer.
F-13
FM 1-114
begins on order and ends with the occupation of designated OPs. Be prepared missions may be included in the concept. These missions should be outlined in the form of task, purpose, and conditions for execution. For clarity, be prepared missions instead may be placed in tasks to maneuver units (if it applies to only one subelement) or coordinating instructions (if it applies to two or more subelements). Maneuver F-38. The commander must visualize how the battle will be fought. The scheme of maneuver is a clear and concise statement that provides subordinates with a framework in which to operate without further guidance. The maneuver paragraph describes the movement or placement of all subordinate maneuver elements within the troop, their task and purpose with respect to the overall plan. It addresses the battlefield conditions (friendly and/or enemy) associated with higher commanders DPs that will trigger the execution of friendly maneuver events or commitment. This paragraph is briefed in the chronological order of the battle or phases. The plan must be built on flexibility to execute possible branches. Tasks identified in the maneuver paragraph should not be addressed in subparagraphs unless additional clarity is required. F-39. Offensive schemes include identification of objectives, order of movement, main and supporting effort, reserves (if applicable), passage of lines, movement formations, and movement techniques. They also include flight profiles, holding area operations, direct fire plan, fratricide control measures, ABF, BP, and/or OP operations, and actions on the objective. F-40. Reconnaissance operations include many of the offensive elements. They also include control measures, critical reconnaissance tasks, bypass criteria, relief on station, target handover, observer plan, and objectives. F-41. Security operations include many of the offensive and reconnaissance elements. In addition, they include movement to the screen line, actions on the screen, screen displacement and/or repositioning, observer plan, battle handover procedures and/or criteria, counter-reconnaissance force, and critical security tasks. F-42. Maneuver paragraph is a base scheme of maneuver from which there should be flexibility to provide the commander other options as the battle progresses.
F-14
Appendix E
F-15
FM 1-114
Special munitions use. (If applicable, discuss the employment of FASCAM, Copperhead, smoke, and illumination on the battlefield. These have a direct impact on the availability of fires, maneuver, and weapon employment for the troop.) CAS. (Although these missions are typically controlled by the squadron ALO or ETAC, the troop may be designated to assist with orienting and supporting CAS on the target. Identify the CAS initial point, ACA locations, time on station, sortie configuration, ordnance, higher commanders intent for employment, initial contact and coordination procedures, restrictions, and marking means.)
F-16
Appendix E
Effects of Fires
Suppression. Fire on or about a weapon system to degrade its effectiveness or performance. The effect of suppressive fires usually lasts only as long as the fires are continued. Neutralization. Fire delivered to render a target temporarily unusable or ineffective. Experience has shown that 10 percent or more casualties may neutralize a unit. The amount of ammunition required to neutralize a unit will depend on the factors of unit morale, state of training , and degree of protection. Destruction. Fire puts the target out of action. Thirty percent (Artillery) and seventy percent (Aviation) or more casualties will typically render a unit ineffective. Direct hits are required to destroy targets. This requires a significant volume of fires.
F-17
FM 1-114
F-18
Appendix E
identified in the maneuver paragraph. If no additional tasks are required, list none. Ensure the task and purpose for each subordinate element is attainable. If the operation is phased, list each task by phase.
F-19
FM 1-114
IMC breakup procedures. Rules of engagement. Special equipment. (Any special equipment required for the mission [SOP]). MOPP level. (Identify the time of various MOPP levels and auto mask criteria. Specify any modifications to MOPP level by higher.) ADA weapons control status and/or warning. Downed aircraft recovery procedures and/or escape and evasion. (May be covered in paragraph 4. Should cover pickup times, package to be used for DART and any ACO specific information.) Fighter management. Post mission requirements. (Mission debrief place and time.) Force protection. (There are many formats and SOPs for risk assessment. When you determine the format you will use, ensure you identify the safety, fratricide, and operational hazards with control measures implemented.) Risk assessment. (Identify the hazard [by event] that could lead to accidents. Assess the hazard and determine the potential magnitude of the hazard and determine the level of risk. Select controls and make a decision. Risk that cannot be eliminated must be controlled. Implement controls. Control measures must be a part of the OPORD. Leaders must ensure soldiers and aircrews know the potential hazards and control measures to reduce risk. Leaders ensure control measures are fully implemented and those measures that do not work are identified.) Operational risk. (Discuss the areas, events, or points in the battle where the unit is at the greatest tactical risk and describe the measures that are being applied to reduce this risk.) Fratricide risk. (If not covered in detail in paragraph three/five, the measures to reduce fratricide throughout the operation must be identified, enforced, and checked throughout the battle. Vehicle marking, signals, friendly and enemy locations, rules of engagement, and clearance of fires procedures must be fully understood.)
F-20
Appendix E
SERVICE SUPPORT
GENERAL F-49. This paragraph covers the general friendly situation for CSS operations. It addresses the scheme of support, priorities, and a general picture of how the operation will be supported logistically. MATERIAL AND SERVICES Supply F-50. The specific classes of supply will be addressed as they apply to the troop. Class I. The ration cycle and times will be briefed. The basic load required for the mission will be stated. Class III. The FARP operations will be briefed. Locations, times active, detailed sketch (confirmed by reconnaissance, if possible), C2 procedures, priority, routes to and from, arming and refueling pad configuration and procedures, holding areas, lighting, and dirty FARP procedures will be included. Class V. Ammunition loads for mission, ammunition available in the FARP, and small arms distribution will be briefed. Other classes. These classes of supply will be briefed as pertinent to the mission. LOGPAC. LOGPAC times and locations will be briefed. Transportation F-51. Information on supply routes and priorities on the route will be included. Services F-52. Instructions for the evacuation of KIA in both the AA, FARP and in the battle area will be provided. The location of decontamination points and GRREG points will be discussed.
F-21
FM 1-114
Maintenance F-53. Instructions for downed aircraft recovery procedures, maintenance priorities, locations, launch and recovery teams, support in the FARP, and AVUM and/or AVIM support will be provided. Destruction criteria for downed aircraft will be outlined. Medical Evacuation and Hospitalization F-54. The location of aid stations and CASEVAC and/or MEDEVAC requirements and procedures will be stated, also include dirty CASEVAC. The location of ground maneuver force ambulance exchange points and aid station locations in the troop AO will be stated. PERSONNEL F-55. Instructions for the handling of EPWs, personnel replacements, and any other administrative issues will be provided. CIVIL-MILITARY OPERATIONS F-56. Information on civil affairs, host nation support, and psychological operations will be provided. If not already covered as part of the ROE, this must be covered to prevent incidents with the local civilian population.
F-22
Appendix E
F-23
FM 1-114
Copilot/Gunner
Weapons Load
PRF/Remarks
1. SITUATION:
a. Enemy Forces: (1) Location of Enemy Forces and Activities:___________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________
(2) Strength and Composition:______________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(3) Type of Equipment:____________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(4) Capabilities and Weaknesses:___________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
F-24
Appendix E
_______________________________________________________________________
(6) Weather and Terrain: Precipitation Temp Hi/Lo Turbulence Hazards Winds Illumination Visibility BMNT/EENT Moonrise/set Electro-Optical PA Other
Obstacles:_______________________________________________________________ Avenues of Approach:_____________________________________________________ Key Terrain:_____________________________________________________________ Observation and Fields of Fire:______________________________________________ Cover and Concealment:___________________________________________________ Weather and Terrain Effects on the Enemy and Friendly Forces:___________________
_______________________________________________________________________
b. Friendly Forces: (1) Mission of Next Higher Commander:______________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(2) Intent of the Next Higher Commander:_____________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(3) Scheme of Maneuver of Next Higher Commander:___________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
F-25
FM 1-114
(4) Missions Issued by the Higher Commander Essential to the Operation: (a) Unit to the Left:_______________________________________________________ (b) Unit to the Right:______________________________________________________ (c) Unit to the Front and Rear:______________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Key Tasks:______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
End State:_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
b. Concept of the Operation: (1) Maneuver:___________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________
F-26
Appendix E
______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________
(a) Priority of Fires:______________________________________________________ (b) Priority Targets:______________________________________________________ (c ) Position Areas:______________________________________________________ (d) FSCMs:____________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
F-27
FM 1-114
Ordnance
______________________________________________________________________
ASE Execution Matrix
ASE Target and Location Defeat Mechanism Trigger System Setting (If Applicable)
_______________________________________________________________________
c. Specific Instructions and Tasks to Subordinate Elements:
F-28
Appendix E
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________
(2) Order of Movement:____________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(3) Routes: Ingress Primary:________________________________________________ Egress Primary:________________________________________________ Ingress Alternate:______________________________________________ Egress Alternate:_______________________________________________ (4) Formations, Movement Techniques and Flight Profiles:_______________________
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________
F-29
FM 1-114
(5) Actions on Contact: Direct Fire:___________________________________________ Indirect Fires:________________________________________ EW:________________________________________________ NBC:_______________________________________________ Visual:______________________________________________ Obstacles:___________________________________________ Air:________________________________________________ (6) Control Measures/Passage of Lines:______________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(7) Aircraft Lighting:_______________________________________________________ (8) Abort Criteria/Bump Plan:_______________________________________________ (9) Engagement and Bypass Criteria:_________________________________________ (10) Reporting Requirements:_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(11) Air Coordination Order:________________________________________________ (12) IMC Breakup Procedures:______________________________________________ (13) Rules of Engagement:_________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(14) Special Equipment:___________________________________________________
F-30
Appendix E
(16) ADA Weapons Control Status and Warning:______________________________ (17) DART Procedures:__________________________________________________ (18) Fighter Management:________________________________________________ (19) Postmission Requirements:___________________________________________ (20) Force Protection:____________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________
4. SERVICE SUPPORT: a. General:____________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
b. Material and Services: (1) Supply: Class I:______________________________________________________ Class III:_____________________________________________________ (Include FARP Diagram and Sketch) Class V:_____________________________________________________ (2) (3) (4) Transportation:____________________________________________________ Services:_________________________________________________________ Maintenance:_____________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
d. Personnel:__________________________________________________________
F-31
FM 1-114
e. Civil-Military Operations:_______________________________________________ f. Miscellaneous:_______________________________________________________ 5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL: a. Command: (1) Location of Commander:_______________(2) Location of Plt Ldrs:_____________ (3) Location of SQDN Cdr:_________________(4) TOC Location:_________________ (5) Succession of Command:_______________________________________________ b. Signal: (1) SOI:___________(2) Challenge:_____________(3) Password:________________ (4) Listening and Silence Instructions:________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
(5) IFF Procedures:______________________________________________________ (6) Antijam Code Words and Frequencies:
Number Code Word Frequency
Appendix E
F-33
Appendix G
PURPOSE
G-1. JAAT is not a mission in itself. It is an engagement technique used to increase the effectiveness of offensive or defensive operations by combining the target acquisition and firepower of fixed-wing aircraft with the target acquisition, designation, and suppression capabilities of Army aircraft. Indirect FA fires or naval gunfire, along with direct fire from ground forces should also be employed to increase the survivability of all JAAT players. The attack may be against a single enemy element or against several enemy elements within a specified area. An ACT is frequently called upon to perform a JAAT while conducting its assigned missions. For an ACT, a JAAT is conducted as a normal attack mission with the additional CS of TACAIR. The addition of TACAIR gives both the ACTM and TACAIR team greater survivability while simultaneously increasing their firepower and complicating the enemy's countering attack. JAAT can be used to support the ground commanders maneuver scheme or can be tasked to support air or maritime commanders objectives. G-2. While procedures are in place to help orchestrate a JAAT in which several different types of FS are synchronized, JAATs work best when helicopter pilots and fixed-wing pilots communicate in plain language,attack pilot to attack pilot. Detailed attack synchronization is sometimes necessary; however, the most valuable attribute of a JAAT is the capability to overwhelm the enemy by applying an enormous amount of firepower in a relatively short amount of time. All coordination measures and communications should ensure this capability is maintained, while minimizing the potential for fratricide and maximizing the survivability of the JAAT participants. G-3. New systems fielded on helicopters and fixed-wing aircraft enable JAATs to occur any time, day or night, any place on the battlefield. AH-64 systems include NVGs and a FLIR. OH-58D systems include NVGs and a TIS. A/OA-10 pilots are now equipped with NVGs as well as IR pointers and may carry IR and white light flares. Some F-16s are equipped with LANTIRN pods and NVGs. F/A-18 and AV-8 aircraft may be equipped with a FLIR and/or targeting pod and their pilots will usually be equipped with NVGs. The night capability these systems provide make night JAAT operations particularly effective.
G-1
FM 1-114
COMPOSITION
COMMANDER G-4. The ground maneuver force commander is responsible for the ground and airspace below the coordinating altitude where the supported commander must synchronize the JAAT into the battle and bring its combined fires into play at the decisive moment. To plan and coordinate the JAAT, ground force commanders use their S3, TACP, FSO, and the squadron commander or his air liaison officer. Air commanders may use the FAC-A, TACP, ASOC, AOC, wing ground LNO, and/or the squadron commander. ATTACK HELICOPTERS G-5. The attack helicopter portion of the JAAT consists of OH-58D Kiowa Warriors in the DCS and both the AH-64 Apache and the Kiowa Warrior in the RAS. Except for the additional planning and coordination necessary for a joint operation, the unit will conduct the JAAT operation as they would a normal attack mission. During the JAAT operation, the ACTM AMC will plan the operation, coordinate the attacks in the EA, and provide SEAD for attacking TACAIR and armed helicopters. Although the ACTM will provide suppressive fires against enemy AD, the primary armor killers are TACAIR. The size of the JAAT depends upon the squadron commander's analysis of the factors of METT-T and the number of TACAIR sorties allocated. TACTICAL AIRCRAFT G-6. TACAIR that can perform CAS are the USAF A/OA-10 and F-16; USN F/A-18; and USMC AV-8 and F/A-18. However, other TACAIR may be employed. JAATs will normally be formed with USAF participants. However, USN and USMC assets may be available in some cases. The use of TACAIR significantly increases the combat power of the ACT or ACTM by virtue of the large and varied ordnance payloads available. G-7. The USAF A/OA-10 provides the most flexible support to JAATs and has several advantages over other aircraft. A/OA-10s were specifically designed for and dedicated to the CAS mission. A/OA-10 pilots have trained extensively with Army units in CAS and JAAT employment TTP. Their night attack capabilities have increased due to the fielding of NVGs and associated equipment. The A/OA-10 has extensive loiter and multipass capabilities and can react quickly to a changing attack plan. Other TACAIR assets will not normally possess the extended loiter capability of the A/OA-10 but are very capable due to their LANTIRN or targeting pods, FLIRs, and/or NVGs. G-8. The use of aircraft other than A/OA-10s may require more coordination between the FAC and the ACT commander as they may not be well trained in JAAT TTP. FORWARD AIR CONTROLLER G-9. The FAC (airborne) will handoff fixed-wing aircraft to the JAAT AMC who will control the JAAT from the initial point inbound. The battle captain
G-2
Appendix G
is the on- scene commander for the execution of the JAAT. The TACAIR flight lead will control employment of the flight. The FAC (airborne) can help locate targets and threats (threat dependent) prior to or during the JAAT mission. JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM FIRE SUPPORT G-10. Indirect FS is used when available and can greatly increase the survivability of the aircraft and the destruction of the enemy. FS is normally used to begin the attack, suppress or destroy enemy AD, force armored vehicles to deploy, and create confusion within the C2 of the element under fire. G-11. The squadron commander may use his FSO to conduct FS planning to support the JAAT. The FSO must work closely with the USAF TACP located at a ground maneuver brigade, aviation brigade, division, or corps headquarters so that FS will fit smoothly into the plan. Once the JAAT mission begins, the ACT commander or ACTM AMC works directly with the FSO to coordinate FS.
MISSION PLANNING
G-12. Because each member of the JAAT retains his own C2 system, mission planning must be a coordinated effort. Constant coordination is required between the ground maneuver commander, aviation commander, TACAIR flight lead/ALO/FAC, and FSO. As elements of the mission change, all members must be informed so that they can adjust their plans accordingly. Success of the JAAT operation depends on the proper synchronization of assets and how well each member of the JAAT understands the operation. JAAT operations may be preplanned, immediate, or spontaneous. Attack helicopter battalions will normally be designated to execute preplanned JAAT. DCSs and RASs can expect to execute immediate or spontaneous JAAT during both reconnaissance and security operations. PREPLANNED G-13. A preplanned JAAT operation is used when time is available to request CAS in the normal planning cycle (usually 36 hours). The preplanned request is drafted by the FSO in coordination with the TACP and processed through Army channels to the AOC. The AOC processes the request according to priorities selected by the joint force commander. Approved preplanned JAATs will appear on the ATO with the number of sorties, times, and ordnance. IMMEDIATE G-14. An immediate request for CAS is used when time is not available to process the request within the normal planning cycle. An immediate CAS request should be submitted as soon as the need is recognized. For example, if it is 1,000 hours and a JAAT is planned for 2,300 hours, the immediate request for CAS ASAP will be placed to allow TACAIR coordination and planning to begin. Immediate CAS request is transmitted by the appropriate echelon TACP over the USAF air request net directly to the ASOC collocated
G-3
FM 1-114
at the corps TOC. Intermediate level-TACPs monitor these requests and advise their respective commanders. Intermediate echelon commanders may direct their assigned TACP to disapprove the request using the air request net if other assets are available or they otherwise do not support the request. Silence by intermediate-level TACPs for a specified amount of time (normally 10 minutes) is considered approval. Following approval by the corps FSE, the ASOC coordinates with the AOC to fulfill the requirement. SPONTANEOUS G-15. A spontaneous JAAT operation occurs when all members of the team are available but no time is available to plan and coordinate. To be successful, spontaneous JAAT operations depend on unit SOPs, training, and communications. A successful JAAT operation is possible anytime pilots are able to coordinate actions by talking with each other. A common JAAT frequency that can be used by the team members is a critical portion of a spontaneous JAAT operation and should be included in SOIs and USAF ATOs. A common JAAT frequency will allow the ACTM to communicate and coordinate its attacks with the CAS aircraft in a minimal amount of time.
SEQUENCING
G-16. A well-orchestrated JAAT operation will normally require a number of radio calls to ensure it is a success. In order to reduce radio traffic to a minimum, a preplanned method of coordinating JAAT activities is often used. Two methods are provided as examples: JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM CLOCK G-17. The JAAT clock (Figure G-1) is the best known and widest used method to control JAAT operations. It is a method of sequencing the JAAT engagement based on time. To initiate the JAAT, the ACTM updates the target information and issues the TACAIR a time hack (3 minutes is the most common) that starts the JAAT Clock. The time hack serves as the TOT for the TACAIR. TACAIR will have ordinance impact or be over the target when the JAAT Clock runs out. The ACTM can employ fires throughout the JAAT Clock, except during a safety buffer (normally 30 seconds) prior to the TOT. This safety buffer ensures that residual ordinance effects of the impacting rounds do not endanger TACAIR. The ACTM employs additional fires as required to suppress the enemy during the TACAIR egress. A reattack can be either immediate or based upon an abbreviated JAAT Clock. An example of a typical engagement follows: ACTM AMC coordinates the attack and then calls 3 minute hack...ready, ready, hack. TACAIR lead responds with good hack. ACTM AMC engages the target with indirect fires as required to suppress the enemy. TACAIR departs the initial point as required to meet the 3 minute TOT. ACTM AMC ensures check fire on all indirect fires at the required time. This time is calculated by subtracting the required safety buffer
G-4
Appendix G
(30 seconds) and the artillery time-of-flight (10 seconds) from the TOT (3:00-0:40=2:20). The AMC may continue to suppress with direct fire weapons using visual separation. TACAIR engages the target at the 3-minute mark. ACTM issues TACAIR either reattack or return to initial point, suppresses with direct fire to cover the TACAIR egress.
Figure G-1. Joint Air Attack Team Clock JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM SEQUENCE CARD G-18. The JAAT sequence card (Figure G-2) consists of a number of different attack sequences and would be used by all those likely to be involved in a JAAT operation. The option to be used for any specific attack would be broadcast by the JAAT controller giving the letter code, a number, and an H-hour. The letter code refers to the type of attack and the number to the length of time of the artillery bombardment. For example, if the controller orders KILO 3 at 1232 hours, the attack will begin at 1232 hours, with an artillery bombardment for 3 minutes followed at 1235 (1232 + 3 minutes) by armed helicopters and then the TACAIR at 1237. The artillery then engages (rounds on target) at 1240, until given check fire by the artillery observer. From the single call, all JAAT players can work out their involvement and plan accordingly. The format of the card is variable and can be constructed or amended to meet different situations as required.
G-5
FM 1-114
EMPLOYMENT
G-19. Employment of the JAAT depends on the factors of METT-T. The method of employment is decided as early as possible so that attacking assets can be coordinated. The two basic employment methods are sector attacks and combined attacks. Sector attacks allow each element of the JAAT to attack within a specified sector. Combined attacks occur when JAAT elements mass their fires by attacking in the same sector. SECTOR ATTACKS G-20. The three types of sector attacks are sector-simultaneous, sector-sequential, and sector-random. Sectors work best when easily recognizable terrains such as roads, rivers, ridgelines, or tree lines are used. Sectoring the target reduces targeting deconfliction and provides each weapons system flexibility in prioritizing the targets within the designated sector. Sector-simultaneous G-21. During sector-simultaneous attacks, each element maneuvers to attack within its assigned sector to engage targets simultaneously with other JAAT elements. All aircraft must coordinate ordnance fans to avoid fratricide. Sector-sequential G-22. During sector-sequential attacks, each element maneuvers to attack within its assigned sector to attack in a predetermined sequence. This sequence may range from several seconds to several minutes. This option reduces the ordnance fan coordination problem and facilitates covering fire for each preceding element.
G-6
Appendix G
Sector-random G-23. During sector-random attacks, each element maneuvers to attack within its assigned sector and engages targets at will. All elements must coordinate ordnance fans and ensure fratricide avoidance. COMBINED ATTACKS G-24. The three types of combined attacks are combined-simultaneous, combined-sequential, and combined-random. Combined attacks usually involve helicopters and TACAIR using approximately the same avenue of approach to the target. Combined attacks typically provide good mutual support between the different elements but require more coordination and are more predictable to the enemy, after the initial attack. Combined-simultaneous G-25. During combined-simultaneous attacks, all elements engage targets in the same sector and attack simultaneously. All elements must coordinate ordnance fans and ensure fratricide avoidance. Combined-simultaneous attacks maximize destruction of the enemy and are the simplest to control. This is an excellent control method when FA fires are not available or when elements can use maximum ordinance elevation for deconfliction of airspace. Combined-sequential G-26. During combined-sequential attacks, all elements engage targets in the same sector and attack in a predetermined sequence. This sequence may range from several seconds to several minutes. This option reduces the ordnance fan coordination problem and facilitates covering fire for each preceding element. Use of the "JAAT Clock" method is an example of a combined sequential. Combined-random G-27. During combined-random attacks, all elements engage targets in the same sector and attack at will. Once again, all elements must coordinate ordnance fans and ensure fratricide avoidance because attacks may inadvertently be simultaneous.
CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS
G-28. After receiving the mission, the squadron will conduct mission analysis in as much detail as time allows. Planning, coordinating, analyzing, and rehearsing are conducted to ensure success. G-29. Upon departing the holding area, ACTMs move forward to reconnoiter the target area. ACTMs verify BPs, avenues of approach, obstacles, and potential EAs that have not been already identified. If the enemy has already entered the EAs, ACTMs maintain contact and attempt to locate the enemys AD systems. G-30. ACTMs should establish contact with the unit providing indirect FS during reconnaissance. This contact should continue throughout the mission, with the ACTMs serving as the FS element on the battlefield during the
G-7
FM 1-114
JAAT. Careful consideration should be given to using artillery prior to direct fire engagements with AH and TACAIR assets. Obscurants generated by the impacting rounds may interfere with laser range finders and designators, degrading the effectiveness of precision guided munitions. G-31. In preplanned JAAT operations, the arrival of the armed helicopters should coincide with the arrival of the TACAIR at the initial point. This is the most difficult part of a JAAT operation. The aviation commander must attempt to flow all the assets into the battle in various combinations without piecemealing the force. As the armed helicopter arrives in the BP, the platoons take up their positions and begin their attack according to the commander's scheme of maneuver. A portion of the ACT and/or ATKHT will most likely begin the attack by engaging AD targets identified by the ACTMs during their reconnaissance. The ACTM that is assigned to SEAD and security is determined by the local threat. The remainder of the troop attacks in sector according to squadron and/or troop attack priorities. G-32. When the TACAIR flight leader arrives in the battle area, he contacts the ALO and/or FAC. He gives the ALO and/or FAC his call sign, mission number, available ordnance, and loiter time. The ALO and/or FAC, ACT commander, or ACTM AMC, if the ALO and/or FAC is not available, passes the target information to the TACAIR flight lead. The ACT commander and/or AMC, the ALO, and the TACAIR flight lead must have good communications. G-33. TACAIR usually enter the target area in a flight of two. The flight leaves the initial point using low-altitude tactical navigation techniques. This maximizes terrain masking if operating low or in a variety of formations with an altitude stack between aircraft, if the situation permits medium altitude operations. The flight leader contacts the ALO and/or FAC or the ACT and/or ATKHT commander for an update on friendly and enemy activities. In addition to receiving an update on the situation, the TACAIR flight leader should also give an inbound call. This call is expressed in units of time, for example, 30 seconds. The ACT commander and/or AMC uses this call as his signal to lift or shift the fires and coordinate the battle. G-34. As TACAIR attack, the ACT commander and/or AMC observes their attack. Then directly or through the ALO and/or FAC, the ACT commander and/or AMC adjusts the TACAIRs subsequent attacks by using cardinal headings and distances from the last impacts. The ACTM can use its lasers to mark targets, the center mass of the target array, and boundaries of the sector or designate targets for USAF delivered precision munitions. The use of lasers increases the speed and security of the attack and reduces the amount of communications necessary between the ACTM and the TACAIR flight.
COMMUNICATIONS
G-35. The communications link between members of the JAAT is critical. The ACTM and the TACP or HHQ must coordinate the frequencies to be used and who will transmit to whom the word of day or Mickey before TACAIR arrive at the initial point.
G-8
Appendix G
Figure G-3. Sample Format of a Tactical Aircraft Check-in Briefing LASER DESIGNATION G-38. The AH-64A/D and OH-58D laser designator can mark sectors, targets, and enemy positions for TACAIR equipped with proper sensing devices. The FAC is responsible for coordinating the laser code used.
G-9
FM 1-114
BRIEFING
G-42. When briefing the JAAT in the absence of the FAC, the AMC will provide a nine-line brief (Figure G-4) to the TACAIR.
Omit data not required. Do not transmit line numbers. Units of measure are standard unless otherwise specified. *Denotes minimum essential in limited communications. Bold denotes readback items when requested.
G-10
Appendix G
G-11
Appendix H
H-0
Appendix H
operations and other tactical actions such as threat avoidance, homing, and targeting. ES focuses on surveillance of the electromagnetic spectrum in support of the commanders immediate decision making requirements for the employment of EW or other tactical actions, such as threat avoidance, targeting, or homing. ES is normally provided by organic intelligence and sensing devices based on EW technology integrated into other weapon systems, or assets from other echelons capable of providing combat information to the supported command. The purpose of ES is to ensure electronic attack and EP applications receive the input needed to operate effectively. Examples of ES actions are battlefield systems that execute direction finding operations, detect and identify enemy missions or other electromagnetically-measured signatures for immediate exploitation, locate high value targets for electronic attack, and provide threat avoidance information. ASE systems include radar, laser, and IR missile detecting sets.
H-1
FM 1-114
JAMMING AND DECOYING (ELECTRONIC ATTACK) H-9. When aircrews must stay on station despite warnings, countermeasures capable of jamming and or decoying the fire control or guidance systems of threat weapons are required. Chaff, flares, and radar and IR jammers provide this type protection. AIRCRAFT HARDENING (VULNERABILITY REDUCTION) H-10. Aircraft hardening provides for ballistic tolerance, redundant critical flight systems, and crashworthy features in an attempt to minimize the damage to an aircraft once it has been hit.
THREAT CONSIDERATIONS
H-11. This section is not designed to be system specific in nature, but rather to provide a general knowledge of threat systems that can be applied to specific threats on a case by case basis. THREAT ENGAGEMENT SEQUENCE H-12. All weapon systems must complete a series of events, called an engagement sequence, to actually have effect on the target (aircraft). Any step in the engagement sequence that is missed forces the threat to start over again. Weapon systems sensors must Detect. Acquire. Track. Launch and guide (or fire and ballistics). Assess damage. EXAMPLE THREAT SYSTEM H-13. Five elements required to compute an AAA fire control solution are range, azimuth, elevation, velocity, and TOF. If one of the fire elements is incorrect, the AAA system will not hit the target. TIME AND SPACE H-14. The threat must detect, acquire, track (establish fire control solution), and fire at the aircraft. The time of flight of the projectile must be determined. The threat must predict where the aircraft target will be (within a few meters) when its ordinance travels to a point in space and time. TOOLS H-15. Tactics, signature reduction, warning, jamming, and decoys are the tools available to preclude a successful threat engagement. If hit you may have to count on aircraft hardening. ACQUISITION VERSUS TRACK H-16. The difference between detection and acquisition versus tracking is very important. In detection and acquisition, the threat weapon system does
H-2
Appendix H
not have refined data to fire at you. The threat weapon system must track the aircraft long enough to determine range, azimuth, elevation, and velocity to predict when and where to fire to hit its target. Indications of search or acquisition activity may indicate to the aircrew time to increase their vigilance (e.g., change mode of flight, actively searching for masking terrain features). Tracking indications alert the aircrew to an immediate action requirement (masking or when terrain is not readily available, ASE decoys and evasive maneuvers). ENGAGEMENT ENVELOPE H-17. All threat systems are confined by physics. Each system has a maximum altitude and range in which its projectile will travel. Additionally, all threat systems have a minimum and maximum effective altitude and range. These numbers are computed against a cooperative engagement (nonmaneuvering aircraft, blue sky background, flat terrain, and steady velocity, if any). The effective envelope for a threat system is based upon a 50 percentile. That is, at the maximum (or minimum) effective range (or altitude), the weapon system is able to hit the target one out of two times. As the target gets further into the threats envelope, the probability of a first shot kill increases. As the target gets further outside the threat envelope, the probability decreases until the target is outside the threats maximum range (or altitude) where it is physically impossible to be hit. DECREASING THE PROBABILITY OF HIT H-18. The aircrew has the ability to make the engagement more difficult for the threat. A stationary target for example allows the threat to adjust each shot off the last until it hits the aircraft. A more difficult engagement would be a moving, constant velocity shot. A prediction can be made and if a miss occurs, an adjustment can be made based off the last shot. The most difficult engagement is against a moving target that varies range, altitude, elevation, and velocity. This type of engagement makes prediction impossible because four factors are changing at differing rates.
H-3
FM 1-114
use of MTI, Doppler (continuous wave radar), or pulse Doppler. Modern radar systems can and do track not only the movement of the aircraft itself, but some detect the movement of rotor blades. A few older radar systems had blind speeds (called a Doppler notch) where they could not detect an aircraft flying a specific speed towards or away from the radar. However, not only do modern radar systems cancel blind speeds, but even with older radar systems, an aircraft had difficulty maintaining constant speed and angle to or from the one radar. It also is impossible to be in the Doppler notch of more than one radar. Radar systems can be detected, avoided, decoyed, jammed, and destroyed by direct and indirect fires (self, artillery, and antiradiation missiles). INFRARED H-21. All IR direct threat weapons require LOS to be established prior to launch, and the in-flight missile must maintain LOS with the target until impact (or detonation of the proximity fuse). IR missiles require the operator to visually detect the target and energize the seeker before the sensor acquires the target. The operator must track the target with the seeker caged to the LOS until it is determined the seeker is tracking the target and not any background objects (such as natural or man-made objects to include vehicles, the sun, or reflected energy of the sun off clouds). The IR sensor is also susceptible to atmospheric conditions (haze, humidity), the signature of the aircraft and its background, flares, decoys, and jamming. Generally IR systems are Difficult to detect prior to launch (passive sensor). Difficult to predict where they may be located (portability). Difficult to respond to (short TOF after launched). Difficult to hard kill (requires shooting at an in-flight missile). LASER AND/OR DIRECTED ENERGY WEAPONS H-22. Laser and/or DEW weapons really fit two distinct categorieslaser guided or aided weapons and pure laser and/or DEW weapons. Laser guided or aided weapons are those who use the laser to perform ranging, tracking, or guiding functions for conventional explosive missiles or projectiles. Pure laser and/or DEW weapons use laser and other forms of DEW to inflict damage to the aircraft or its sensors (as a by-product, the aircrews eyes may be damaged). Pure laser and/or DEW weapons are not required to burn a hole in the target to destroy it, although these weapons are reaching that capability. Simply igniting fuel vapor near vents or burning through fuel lines are effective as well as glazing the cockpit glass so the aircrew cannot see out is also effective. Inherently, laser and/or DEW weapons are short duration, hard to detect, extremely hard to decoy or jam, and hard to kill. Fortunately they must rely upon LOS, atmospheric conditions, and are somewhat short ranged at present. OPTICAL AND/OR ELECTRO-OPTICAL H-23. Optical and/or EO sensors are used as either the primary or the secondary sensor for all weapon systems. Although they rely upon LOS, they are with very few exceptions, completely passive. They are limited by human
H-4
Appendix H
eyes, atmospheric conditions, distance, jitter, and in many cases by darkness. The optical and/or EO sensors are most difficult to detect, seldom can be decoyed, can be jammed in the sense of obscurants, but when located can be hard killed.
H-5
FM 1-114
OH-58D AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-29. The OH-58D ASE suite (Figure H-1) provides PW radar signal detection for radar directed threats and laser signal detection for laser, laser aided, and DEW threats. Additionally the ASE suite provides omnidirectional IR jamming for IR directed threats. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include both nonreflective IR absorbing paint and suppressors for hot exhaust gasses.
OH-58D ASE Suite AN/APR-39(V)1 AN/AVR-2A AN/ALQ-144A(V)1 Figure H-1. OH-58D (Kiowa Warrior) ASE Suite AH-64 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-30. The AH-64 ASE suite (Figure H-2) provides PW radar signal detection, PW radar jamming, and decoying for radar directed threats, and laser signal detection for laser, laser aided, and DEW threats. Additionally the ASE suite provides omnidirectional IR jamming and decoying for IR directed threats. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include both nonreflective IR absorbing paint and Black Hole suppressors.
AH-64 ASE Suite AN/APR-39(V)1 AN/AVR-2A AN/ALQ-144A(V)3 AN/ALQ-136(V)5 M-130 Chaff Only
H-6
Appendix H
Figure H-2. AH-64 ASE Suite EH-60 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-31. The EH-60 ASE suite (Figure H-3) provides PW radar and CW radar signal detection, CW radar jamming, and decoying for radar directed threats. Additionally the ASE suite provides omnidirectional IR jamming and decoying for IR directed threats. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include both nonreflective IR absorbing paint and HIRSS suppresses hot exhaust gasses. UH-60 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-32. The UH-60 ASE suite (Figure H-3) provides PW radar and decoying for radar directed threats. Additionally the ASE suite provides omnidirectional IR jamming for IR directed threats. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include both nonreflective IR absorbing paint and HIRSS suppresses hot exhaust gasses.
EH-60 ASE Suite AN/APR-39(V)2 AN/ALQ-144A(V)1 AN/ALQ-162(V)2 AN/ALQ-156(V)2 M-130 Flare M-130 Chaff
Figure H-3. EH-60 and UH-60 ASE Suites OH-58A/C AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-33. The OH-58A/C ASE suite (Figure H-4) provides PW radar signal detection. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include nonreflective IR paint and exhaust suppression on some aircraft.
H-7
FM 1-114
Figure H-4. OH-58A/C ASE Suite UH-1 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-34. The UH-1 ASE suite (Figure H-5) provides PW radar signal detection. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include nonreflective IR paint and exhaust suppression.
UH-1 ASE Suite AN/APR(V)1 Figure H-5. UH-1 ASE Suite AH-1 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT SUITE CAPABILITIES H-35. The AH-1 ASE suite (Figure H-6) provides PW radar signal detection, jamming, and decoying for radar directed threats. The ASE suite provides laser signal detection for laser directed threats. The ASE suite also provides omnidirectional IR jamming for IR directed threats. The aircraft signature reduction capabilities include nonreflective paint and hot exhaust suppression.
AH-1 ASE Suite AN/APR-39(V)1 or AN/APR(V)1 AN/APR-136(V)1/5 AN/ALQ-144A(V)1/3 M-130 Dispenser (CHAFF)
H-8
Appendix H
H-9
FM 1-114
engine exhaust suppressers. The system has specific JPN settings that must be set prior to flight.
Figure H-7. AN/ALQ-144A Setting AN/ALQ-136(V)5 H-42. The AN/ALQ-136(V)5 CMS is an active, PW radar jammer designed to confuse or decoy threat PW radar systems. The system jams specific threat systems and operators must know the capabilities and limitations of the AN/ALQ-136(V)5. The system has a training/war switch that must be set prior to flight. M-130 H-43. The M-130 general purpose dispenser dispenses chaff and flares. The system is operated either manually or automatically through interface with other countermeasure systems. The chaff provides protection against radar directed antiaircraft weapon systems, while the flares provide protection against IR directed missile systems. When dispensing chaff, the M-130 reduces or eliminates the enemy's ability to hit and destroy aircraft by use of radar-controlled, antiaircraft weapons. When dispensing flares, the M-130 reduces or eliminates the enemy's ability to hit and destroy aircraft by use of IR guided missiles. When the M-130 is set to dispense chaff, the electronic control module must be set with the program setting for the aircraft prior to flight. AN/ALQ-162(V)2 H-44. The AN/ALQ-162(V)2 CMS provides warning and protection against SAMs and airborne intercept missiles that use CW illuminator radar for guidance. The CW signals detected by the system will be validated and jamming will be initiated in conjunction with threat identification given to the aircrew. The specific action taken by the system is determined by warning and jamming thresholds programmed into the system. The system has specific jam settings that must be set prior to flight.
H-10
Appendix H
AN/ALQ-156(V)2 H-45. The AN/ALQ-156(V)2 CMS is an airborne radar system that provides protection to the aircraft in which it is installed by detecting the approach of antiaircraft missiles. Upon detection, the missile detector automatically initiates a signal that triggers the M-130 general dispenser system. The dispenser system releases a flare to decoy an IR seeking missile away from the aircraft.
TACTICAL OPERATIONS OFFICERS AND AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT AND/OR ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICERS
H-47. For ASE to provide effective protection during a mission, configuration settings must be optimized for the threats encountered. The tactical operations officer at the brigade and battalion staff assist the S3 in mission planning for aircraft survivability while accomplishing the mission. TO&E place the tactical operations officer in the aviation troop as a CW3, in the squadron operations as a CW4, and in the regiment and/or brigade as a CW5. The tactical operations officer is identified by the SQI I (e.g., 152DI). The ASE and/or EW officer is a CW2 in the aviation troop. ASE and/or EW officer is identified by the ASI H3 (e.g., 152D0H3). ASE and/or EW officer ensures optimum ASE configuration settings are prepared for each flight. AR 611-112 describes the tactical operations officer position as warrant officers that are qualified to Plan, schedule, coordinate, and brief tactical and nontactical missions. Operate the aviation mission planning system. Develop, plan, coordinate and brief EW operations. Manage flying hour programs and ALSE programs.
H-11
FM 1-114
MISSION PLANNING
H-49. ASE and EW must be considered in all phases of mission planning. The level of planning involved is always predicated on the time, information, and personnel available. OPLANs and OPORDs for military operations are extensive in scope and contain information that act as a baseline for most unit operations. OPERATIONS ORDER AND/OR OPERATIONS PLAN H-50. The generation of the OPORD begins upon receipt of the enemy and friendly situation, the mission, and the commanders intent. The EW Annex (Figure H-8) is created to support the OPORD or OPLAN using this information. The enemy and friendly situations are further defined with the emphasis on the EW capabilities each have to find, fix, jam, deceive, disrupt, or destroy each other. Once the situation is clearly defined, the mission is analyzed to evaluate the risk to friendly forces while accomplishing the mission within the prescribed guidelines. After the risk assessment is complete, risk reduction techniques are specified in the execution instructions. These techniques require the commanders approval if the mission constraints need to be altered significantly from the original intent. The next step is to determine service support for EW and command and signal guidance necessary to accomplish the EW phase of the mission. FRAGMENTARY ORDER H-51. Once the OPORD (Figure H-9) (and EW Annex) is generated, it becomes the base document. For specific missions, complete OPORDs may not always be required. In these instances, FRAGOs outlining the changes from the basic OPORD are created and issued to affected units. Upon receipt of the FRAGO, the staff planners must evaluate the information available and revalidate the EW Annex. Any changes to the EW Annex must be detailed and disseminated to the aircrews as part of the mission briefing.
H-12
Appendix H
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION ISSUING HEADQUARTERS LOCATION DAY, MONTH, YEAR, HOUR, ZONE ANNEX I (ELECTRONIC WARFARE) TO OPORD XXXX-XX (U) ( ) References: List basic documents required. 1. ( ) Situation a. ( ) Enemy. Refer to annex B. Provide an estimate of the enemy's communications, noncommunications, and EW systems capabilities, limitations, and vulnerabilities including the ability to interfere with the accomplishment of the EW mission stated herein. Determine the ability to detect radar altimeter, Doppler, FM, VHF, and UHF communications, and the ability to interrogate transponder for modes 1, 2, 3A, and 3C. Determine AD EW systems and analyze parameters (i.e., frequencies, PRF, PRI, scan type, wavelength) for use in risk analysis. b. ( ) Friendly. Provide a list of friendly EW systems available for the mission (i.e., communications, noncommunications, navigation, sensors, countermeasures, Electro-optical systems). Include friendly EW assets that can exploit and disrupt the enemy's usage of the electromagnetic spectrum. c. ( ) Assumptions. State any assumptions about friendly or enemy EW capabilities and possible COAs that may influence the planning or execution of EW operations. 2. ( ) Mission. State the mission to be accomplished by EW operations to support the mission in the basic plan. 3. ( ) Execution a. ( ) Concept of operations. Summarize the scope of EW operations and the methods and resources to be used. Include TTP's for the threats that may be encountered. b. ( ) Tasks. In separate subparagraphs, assign individual tasks to EWOs and crews including instructions and references. c. ( ) Coordinating Instructions. Place instructions applicable to two or more sub-units in the final sub-paragraph. 1. ( ) Guiding Principles. State or refer to policies, doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures that provide guidance to be followed. Establish any additional guidance and authorized deviations from standardized practices. Describe any constraints that may apply to the mission. This sample EW appendix is unclassified, but when actually accomplished should show proper classification markings of each paragraph.)
Figure H-8 Sample Format for an Electronic Warfare Annex to Operations Order
H-13
FM 1-114
elsewhere.
2. ( ) Special Measures. Provide any special procedure to be used that is not provided
4. ( ) Service Support. Specify support units to provide EW service support. Include verification of threat parameters and ASE settings through the ARAT. 5. ( ) Command and Signal. Provide information on IFF mode settings and mode activation/ deactivation line, ASE configuration settings, Have Quick settings, SINCGARS settings, A2C2 frequencies, AWACS contact points, and brevity codes. Acknowledge: Name (Commander's last name) Rank (Commander's rank) OFFICIAL: APPENDICES: DISTRIBUTION: (SECURITY CLASSIFICATION) (This sample EW appendix is unclassified, but when actually accomplished should show proper classification markings of each paragraph.) Figure H-8. Sample Format for an Electronic Warfare Annex to Operations Order (continued)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Situ ation Mission Exe cution Service Support Co m m and and Signal
H-14
Appendix H
H-15
FM 1-114
IR Threats:
Value:
Value:
RF Threat:
E/O Threat:
Value:
Value:
Laser/DEW Threat:
Overall Risk: A A A A
Highest Value: Low Reevaluate mission profile, ASE, or flight routes. Medium Reevaluate mission profile, ASE, or flight routes. High B B B B C C C C D D D D
H-16
Appendix H
H-56. Risk reduction techniques will be applied to minimize the risk and enhance the probability of survival. Risk reduction measures include the following: Plan mission time earlier or later to take advantage of night operations. Use only suppressed aircraft for the higher risk portions of the mission. Request escort aircraft to suppress threats. Plan SEAD at critical points to reduce vulnerability. Prep the LZ/PZ with indirect fires.
Medium
High
ASE and IFF Configuration Settings: ASE can detect: ASE cannot detect: ASE can jam: ASE cannot jam: Primary threats: IR RF E/O Laser/DEW
H-17
FM 1-114
Equipment Mission Brief IMPLEMENT CONTROLS AND SUPERVISE H-58. Commanders and aircrews must take an active role in reducing risks by implementing the following controls and supervising their implementation: Commanders ensure that ASE and/or EW considerations and configuration settings are considered and briefed to all aircrews and maintenance personnel. During preflight checks, aircrews ensure that ASE configuration settings are correct. During mission, aircrews ensure that IFF codes are activated and deactivated at proper times and locations during flight. During AAR, ensure that debriefings are collected from aircrews. Aircrews report ASE and/or EW problems to HHQ (ambiguities, false alarms, equipment failures, and short comings.) Aircrews collect data and ensure that the data are put into AMPS for the next mission.
H-18
Appendix H
should include evasive formation break up procedures and how to reform the formation after breaking the engagement. It is important to communicate your ASE indications to other aircraft in the formation since you may be the only aircraft receiving it due to terrain, narrow radar beam, altitude, or maintenance problems.
CONCLUSION
H-63. Survivability for Army aviation on the modern battlefield and in stability operations and support operations requires extensive coordination with other staffs. Since Army aviation can cover broad spaces at high speeds, coordination for airspace and fire control measures is paramount. The tactical operations officer and ASE and/or EWO are trained to incorporate ASE and/or EW considerations into the mission planning and execution. ASE is only effective if configured properly and used with tactics to counter the threats capabilities. Army aviation must plan to make maximum use of the electromagnetic spectrum and fully exploit the weaknesses of the threats EW capabilities.
H-19
Appendix I
Fratricide Prevention
GENERAL
I-1. Fratricide is the employment of friendly weapons and munitions with the intent to kill the enemy or destroy his equipment or facilities, which results in unforeseen and unintentional death or injury to friendly personnel. Fratricide is a grim fact in combat operations. Such incidents cover a wide spectrum of conditions, but historically, they are most likely to occur in the early stages of combat, during reduced visibility or along shared unit boundaries. In previous 20th century conflicts, supporting fires (air and artillery) accounted for almost 75 percent of fratricide incidents and an even greater proportion of friendly fire casualties. However, this proportion may be changing for modernized armored forces in high intensity scenarios due to advances in direct fire technology and tactics.
I-0
Appendix I
reference points, EAs, and priorities. Some may designate but fail to adhere to them. Units fail to tie control measures to recognizable terrain features. Weapons positioning can be poor, and fire discipline can break down upon contact. Land Navigation Failures I-5. Navigation is often complicated by difficult terrain or weather and visibility. Navigation problems can cause units to stray out of sector, report wrong locations, become disoriented, or employ FS weapons from wrong locations. As a result, friendly units may collide unexpectedly or be erroneously engaged. Reporting, Crosstalk, and Battle Tracking Failures I-6. Commanders, leaders and their CPs at all levels often do not generate timely, accurate, and complete reports or track subordinates as locations and the tactical situation change. Commanders are unable to maintain situational awareness. This distorts the picture at each level and permits the erroneous clearance of fires (both direct and indirect) and violations of danger close. Known Battlefield Hazards I-7. Unexploded ordnance, unmarked and unrecorded minefields, FASCAM, flying debris from discarding SABOTs and illumination rounds, and booby traps litter the battlefield. Failure to make, record, remove, or otherwise anticipate these threats leads to casualties. POSITIVE IDENTIFICATION I-8. Vehicle commanders, gunners, and helicopter pilots cannot distinguish friendly and enemy thermal and optical signatures at the ranges that they can be acquired. Our weapons can kill beyond the ranges where we have clear ID. Our tactics and doctrine lead us to exploit our range advantage over the enemy. During limited visibility or in restricted terrain, units in proximity can mistake each other for the enemy due to short engagement windows and decision time. We do not have a means to determine friend or foe, other than visual recognition of our forces and the enemy's. When the enemy and our allies are equipped similarly, and when the enemy uses U.S. and allied equipment, the problem is compounded. Simple, effective fire and maneuver control measures and plans, good situational awareness, and disciplined engagements are absolutely necessary. OTHER I-9. Another cause is weapons errors. Lapses in unit and individual discipline or violations of the ROE allow errors that are not merely accidents. Examples are out-of-sector engagements, unauthorized discharges, mistakes with explosives and hand grenades, charge errors, incorrect gun data, and similar incidents.
I-1
FM 1-114
I-2
Appendix I
increase risk (inexperienced flank platoon leader develops communication problems). These contributing factors are a critical dimension of realistic training to reduce fratricide.
EFFECTS OF FRATRICIDE
I-11. The effects of fratricide can be devastating and spread rapidly throughout a unit. Fratricide increases the risk of unacceptable losses and the risk of mission failure. Fratricide seriously affects the unit's ability to survive and function. Observations of units experiencing fratricide include Hesitation to conduct limited visibility operations. Loss of confidence in the unit's leadership. Increase of leader self-doubt. Hesitation to use supporting combat systems. Oversupervision of units. Loss of initiative. Loss of aggressiveness during fire and maneuver. Disrupted operations. Needless loss of combat power. General degradation of cohesion and morale.
I-3
FM 1-114
situation develops. The fratricide risk assessment matrix will allow you to address fratricide using the following steps: Identify the fratricide risks using the matrix during your analysis of METT-T factors. Use each submatrix to assess possible fratricide loss and probability. Make decisions and develop ways and means to reduce risks. Implement measures by integrating them into plans, orders, SOPS, training performance standards, and rehearsals. Supervise and enforce safety measures and standards.
I-4
Appendix I
I-5
FM 1-114
I-6
Appendix I
MISSION Tactically sound and simple scheme of maneuver. Complete and concise orders. Doctrinally and tactically correct clearance of fires. CPs and TOCs accurately track the battle; render timely reports. Maintain graphics two levels down. Use large-scale battalion and brigade sector sketches for detail. Coordinate with adjacent units; track adjacent battle. Subcompartment sectors and assign responsibility during stability operations and support operations. Coordinate and communicate aviation and maneuver elements.
Get air tasking order a day prior, to see what aviation assets will be
operating in your units AO. Clear fires around BSAFA Bn HHB Cdr is FSO for the FSB. Only allow the QRF in the BSA perimeter. Special operations C2 element. SOCCE is the key to coordination of SOF and conventional unit maneuver. Anticipate or assess fratricide risk during planning. Send key leader on objective reconnaissance (such as the squad leader from the lead platoon). Detailed EA development and direct fire planning. ENEMY Know enemy characteristics and equipment. Know hostile criteria and enemy aircraft flight profiles. Additional recognition signals or markers. TERRAIN Navigate accuratelyknow your location. Fire control measures on identifiable terrain. Unit boundaries on identifiable terrain. OCOKA analysis to identify fratricide risk. Redundant NAVAIDS or checks. Control the MSRknow what should be on it and what should not. Thorough map reconnaissance. Detailed map preparation. TROOPS AND EQUIPMENT Always rehearsedo not accept excuses. Consider limited visibility rehearsal. Situational awarenessunits, enemy, hazards.
I-7
FM 1-114
Know your weapon and vehicle orientation. Anticipate where weapon system density will be highest. Recognize battlefield stress. Use validated SOPs to simplify operations. Know ROE. Accurate and timely spot reports. Positive target identificationdo not shoot first and ask questions later. Sustain good aircraft identification training program. Train BSA troops in threat ID and survivability skills. Know friendly weapons effects. Accurately program onboard navigation systems. Do not input friendly unit locations into target navigation index. TIME Maximize planning time. Prioritize tasks, rehearsals, or reconnaissance. Multiple WARNORDs and FRAGOs to save time.
I-8
Appendix J
TRAINING PREPARATION
J-2. Advanced preparation is key to successful completion of training and the same holds true for environmental awareness and protection. The commander should be aware of the publications governing environmental protection. All unit staffs (troop and above) should designate an environmental compliance officer and/or NCO to serve as unit POC. This person will be responsible for environmental education, SOP updates, preperation of environmental risk assessments, and incident reporting. ARs 200-1 and 200-2 explain the Army's environmental programs. Appendix A, in both regulations, references the additional documents that should be reviewed. TC 5-400 provides a comprehensive listing of all items of interest in the preparation for operating near and avoiding environmentally sensitive areas. J-3. Figure J-1 is a general POC matrix to assist in the planning for environmental factors that will affect unit training: J-4. Most topics can be reviewed by contacting the ED, NRB, and range control. In most cases, ED and NRB are located under the DPW. In cases where training is conducted overseas, you will refer to the host nation equivalent of the above listed points of contact. If there is no host nation equivalent, all training will be conducted under US policies and requirements. Units should coordinate with these organizations to provide a briefing prior to the start of mission training.
J-1
FM 1-114
TOPIC Air pollution Archeological and historic sites Clean and safe water HMs and waste
POC ED ED and Natural Resources Branch ED Directorate of Logistics, Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office, ED, and the fire department. ED, Range Control (DPTM) Range Control (DPTM) ED ED NRB ED NRB, Range Control
Noise pollution Range clearances and restrictions Standing operating procedures Spill reporting Threatened/endangered species Water pollution Wetland protection
Wildlife management NRB, Range Control Figure J-1. Point of Contact Matrix
J-2
Appendix J
requirements with appropriate installation and/or chain of command personnel. NOTE: Personnel to contact to support unit is the chain of command, DPW, staff judge advocate, and range control.
MISSION EXECUTION
J-6. Environmental concerns pertaining to a mission could be incorporated into the mission briefing using the acronym METT-T. Some of the factors affecting the briefing should be unit mission, geographical location, and time of the year. MISSION Identify and assess known environmental risks during planning. Determine environmental impact on mission execution. Specify those areas to avoid and minimize the effect on units scheme to maneuver. Select alternate training methods or goals. Provide maps and/or sketches with detailed areas of environmental concern. Emphasize the importance that every soldier play an active role in the identification and timely reporting of new environmental risk elements. Rapidly and effectively respond to all POL and/or HW accidents. Select routes that allow for quick access in case the aircraft transporting HM and/or HW should have to land unexpectedly. ENEMY Identify areas of probable environmental contamination that could effect friendly force movement. Evaluate intelligence reports of enemy equipment and/or capability and how it would be employed against the environment. Develop enemy target options to minimize environmental effects.
J-3
FM 1-114
Maneuver enemy action away from environmentally sensitive areas, when feasible. TERRAIN AND WEATHER Provide recommended paths of movement to avoid environmentally sensitive areas. Emphasize navigation accuracy and identify well defined terrain features to assist. Obtain and analyze predominant and developing weather patterns to diminish possible environmental risks. TROOPS AND EQUIPMENT Develop a briefing for all soldiers that highlights and defines the environmental concerns and/or points of interest. Provide a detailed and accurate SOP that identifies guidelines to avoid risk areas and not inhibit mission accomplishment. Anticipate areas of probable risk and brief troops on how to prevent damage. Employ practice scenarios that tests soldier response and promotes the decision making process to changing environmental risks. Require accurate and timely reports that pertain environmentally concerned issues, friendly or enemy. TIME Maximize planning time and minimize complexity of mission brief. Practice and develop various mission profiles that emphasize adjusting for changing environmental factors, while maintaining the desired momentum. to any
RISK ASSESSMENT
J-7. The environmental risk assessment considerations contained in this appendix address the potential impact of unit activities on the environment. Units add other considerations to address local conditions or different unit activities. Using a scale of 0 (no probability of environmental damage) to 5 (extremely high probability of environmental damage), unit leaders rate the specific activities the unit will perform during an operation. Unit leaders perform this evaluation for each of seven environmental areas. Using sound judgment, unit leaders consider the conditions under which the unit operates. Unit leaders then apply this value to the risk assessment matrix (Figure J-2). The value is not an absolute. Different leaders will assign different ratings for the same activity. It is simply a judgment call based on the leaders assessment. This appendix is formatted to allow photocopying or other reproduction, as required.
J-4
Appendix J
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
J-8. Knowledge of environmental factors is key to planning and decision making. With this knowledge, leaders quantify risks, detect problem areas, reduce risk of injury or death, reduce property damage, and ensure compliance with environmental regulations. Unit leaders should complete environmental risk assessments before conducting any training, operations, or logistics activities. The environmental risk assessment matrix (Figure J-3) provides a deliberate approach to assessing the risk of unit activities on specific environmental areas. The matrix has four components environmental area, unit activities, risk impact, risk rating.
J-5
FM 1-114
ENVIRONMENTAL AREAS
J-9. The risk assessment matrix assesses risk in seven environmental areas. Unit leaders and staffs should develop one matrix for each. These areas are air pollution, archeological, cultural and historical resources, HMs and HW, noise pollution, threatened and endangered species, water pollution, and soil, vegetation, and wetland protection.
UNIT ACTIVITIES
J-10. The risk assessment matrix used in this manual considers five unit activities. These activities are generic, and units may modify them to meet their mission requirements and local conditions. These unit missions are movement of heavy vehicles and systems, movement of personnel and light vehicles and systems, activities of the AA, field maintenance of equipment, and garrison maintenance of equipment. NOTE: Examples of other activities that units might add are direct and indirect weapons firing, unexploded ordnance operations, aviation support and operations, medical support and operations, mines and demolition, smoke operations, waterborne or amphibious operations, night operations, and NBC operations.
J-6
Appendix J
figures J-4 through J-10 of this appendix help unit leaders evaluate the probability of occurrence. In filling out the matrix, the unit leader or staff officer circles the value selected for each unit operation (Figure J-3).
J-7
FM 1-114
Fires are limited, controlled, and allowed only in authorized areas. CS (riot-control chemical agent) and smoke are strictly controlled. Vehicles and equipment are well maintained and in good operating order. Soldiers are environmentally conscientious. Soldiers are thoroughly familiar with range fire restrictions. Command and control and/or supervision is excellent. No risk and/or not applicable. Figure J-4. Air Pollution Risk Impact Value
Value
5
Contributing Factors
Low-visibility, night, or sustained high-tempo operations and/or activities (36 hours plus) are planned. Operational and/or work area has many archeological, cultural, or historic resources. Archeological, Cultural and Historic resources are neither identified nor marked off limits. Command and control and/or supervision is marginal. Soldiers are not familiar with the operational and/or work area. Operational and/or work area has some archeological, cultural, and historic resources. Archeological, cultural, and historic sites are marked off limits. Low-visibility or night operations and/or activities are planned. Command and control and/or supervision is adequate. Soldiers are not familiar with the operational and/or work area. Archeological, cultural, and historic sites are identified and marked off limits. Soldiers have been briefed on off-limit sites in operational and/or work area. No low-visibility or night operations and/or activities are planned. C2 and supervision are adequate. Archeological, cultural, and historic sites are identified and marked off limits. No low-visibility or night operations and/or activities are planned. Command and control and/or supervision is good. Soldiers are familiar with the operational and/or work area. Archeological, cultural, and historic sites are identified and marked off limits. Soldiers avoid sites during training, operations and/or activities, and logistical activities. Soldiers are proactive in recognizing, safeguarding, and reporting signs or evidence of possible archeological artifacts or sites. Command and control and/or supervision is effective. Soldiers are thoroughly familiar with the operational and/or work area.
J-8
Appendix J
Current or forecasted weather conditions are not an adverse factor. No risk and/or not applicable. Figure J-5. Archeological, Cultural, and Historic Resources Risk Impact Value
J-9
FM 1-114
J-10
Appendix J
Value
5
J-11
FM 1-114
J-12
Appendix J
J-13
FM 1-114
3 2
RISK RATING
J-12. Unit leaders rate the risk for each environmental area (each matrix) by adding the circled risk impact values (Figure J-11). Unit leaders develop a risk assessment of the entire activity or operation adding the risk ratings for the individual matrixes on one form. The overall environmental risk falls into one of four categorieslow, medium, high, or extremely high (Figure J12). Activities with an extremely high probability of environmental damage require MACOM approval. These activities may also require NEPA analysis.
J-14
Appendix J
Category
Low Medium High Extremely High
Range
0 - 58 59 - 117 118 - 149
Environmental Damage
Little or none Minor Significant
Decision Maker
Unit Commander Next higher command Installation and/or division
RISK REDUCTION
J-13. The unit leader addresses each environmental area to reduce risks associated with unit activities. While he considers all risk values above 0," obviously he spends more time on risk values of 5" rather than 0." If the overall risk is low or medium, unit leaders still review any areas rated high
J-15
FM 1-114
or extremely high. The unit leader should use his judgment in altering the operation to reduce the risk in this specific area. Many environmental risk reduction measures are simply extensions of good management and leadership practices. Unit leaders can effectively manage environmental risks using the following six steps: Step 1. Identify hazards to the environment during mission analysis. Consider all activities that may pollute air, soil, and water. Also consider activities that may degrade natural or cultural resources. Step 2. Assess the probability of environmental damage or violations with environmental risk assessment matrixes. Step 3. Make decisions and develop measures to reduce high risks. Risk reduction measures can include rehearsals, changing locations or times of operations, and increasing supervision. Step 4. Brief chain of command, unit staff, and appropriate decision makers on proposed plans and residual risk. Step 5. Integrate environmental measures into plans, orders, SOPs, and rehearsals. Inform subordinates, down to individual soldier- and Marine-level, of risk reduction measures. Step 6. Supervise and enforce environmental standards. Hold those in charge accountable for environmental risk reduction.
RESIDUAL RISK
J-14. Once all practicable risk reduction measures are in place, some risk will remain. This residual risk requires leaders attention. Unit leaders inform the chain of command and appropriate decision makers of residual risk and its implications for the operation. Unit leaders also inform their subordinates and focus C2 efforts onto those portions of the operation.
SUMMARY
J-15. Unit leaders use environmental risk assessment to estimate the potential impact of unit activities on the environment. This process applies to routine activities, training, mobilization, or deployment. The environmental risk assessment will allow leaders and their staffs to identify potential environmental problems before they occur. The process also allows unit leaders to identify and manage residual risk.
J-16
Appendix K
Air-Ground Integration
GENERAL
K-1. Effective integration of air and ground assets is required to successfully conduct cavalry operations. Each element (air and ground) brings unique capabilities and limitations to the cavalry commander. Integration starts at home station with the implementation of effective SOPs, habitual relationships, and AGT training and continues through planning, preparation, and execution of the operation.
FUNDAMENTALS
K-2. To ensure effective integration, commanders and staffs must consider some basic fundamentals for air-ground integration. These fundamentals provide the framework for enhancing the effectiveness of both air and ground maneuver assets. In all cases, the cavalry commander must employ air cavalry assets as a maneuver force. This basic premise, when coupled with the fundamentals of air-ground integration, will ensure air cavalry is synchronized in the squadron operation. The fundamentals are Understanding capabilities and limitations. Use of SOPs. C2. Maximizing available assets. Employment methods. Synchronization.
K-0
Appendix K
Table K-1. Capabilities and Limitations for the Employment of Air Cavalry Assets
AIR CAPABILITIES
Terrain independent maneuver Adds speed to operations Adds agility to operations Adds depth to operations Increases tempo of operations Digital connectivity Enhanced optics Elevated observation platform Video reconnaissance Long range direct fire capability Precision munition guidance Enhanced FS capabilities Enhanced night survivability and/or capability
AIR LIMITATIONS
Degraded limited visibility operations Lack of detailed reconnaissance Limited station times Crew endurance Aircraft maintenance requirements Cannot hold terrain Increased Class III and/or Class V requirements FARP survivability Weather limitations AA survivability Reaction time from decreased REDCON Survivability in close operations
Table K-2. Capabilities and Limitations for the Employment of Ground Cavalry Assets
GROUND CAPABILITIES
Hold terrain Detailed reconnaissance Continuous operations Self-supporting C2 organization Firepower and protection Organic FS (mortars)
GROUND LIMITATIONS
Terrain restrictions Movement (visibility and/or obstacles) Responsiveness over distances Limited breach capabilities Limited long range acquisition
K-1
FM 1-114
Actions on contact drills (indirect fires, observation, direct fires from inferior force, direct fires from superior force, fixed wing, rotary wing, civilians and noncombatants). Battle drills (breach operations, close reconnaissance, counterreconnaissance, fix and bypass, zone reconnaissance, area reconnaissance, route reconnaissance, screen operations, hasty attack).
K-2
Appendix K
Air passage of lines are more difficult. Close reconnaissance and target handovers are more difficult. Increased traffic on the squadron command network. AIR-GROUND TEAMS K-9. The second method of C2 is the formation of air- ground teams. This is normally a temporary relationship to deal with a specific situation. OPCON is the command relationship used. AGT formation is best used when decentralized troop operations are required. Route reconnaissance, area reconnaissance, reconnaissance in force, movement to contact as an advanced guard, feints, raids, screens, and area security are operations that may be enhanced by the formation of AGTs. Based on METT-T, control may be with either the ground or air cavalry commander. Control by the ACT is appropriate when Limited ground cavalry assets in the areaair cavalry owns the battlespace. Ground troop commander or CP not in position to control. ACT commander has better situational awareness. Operation is of limited duration. Control by the GCT is appropriate when Limited air cavalry assets in the areaground cavalry owns the battlespace. Ground troop commander or CP in position to control. GCT commander has better situational awareness. Operation is of longer duration. The advantages and disadvantages of forming AGTs are METT-T dependent. Advantages K-10. Advantages may include the following: Enhanced situational awareness below the troop level. Allows the SCO to weight the ME. Enhanced close reconnaissance and security operations. Facilitates decentralized operations. Streamlines clearance of direct and mortar fires in the close fight. Increases GCT ability to observe mortar fires. Reduces traffic on the squadron command network. Air cavalry enhances GCT C2 over extended distances. Enhanced response for downed aircraft in the close fight. Provides for greater security for the ACTs during day close reconnaissance and security missions. Disadvantages K-11. Disadvantages may include the following:
K-3
FM 1-114
Reduced situational awareness at the squadron level on ACT assets. Reduces SCOs ability to reorient air cavalry assets. Increases time required to clear indirect artillery fires. Less visibility on logistics status of the ACTsFARP requirements. Squadron level A2C2 more difficult. Increased C2 and liaison requirements at troop level. Does not maximize ACTs ability to add depth and tempo to squadron operation.
EMPLOYMENT METHODS
K-13. Cavalry squadrons have two options for the employment of the ACTs. The first option is to employ troops simultaneously, with separate areas of operation. The second option is to employ the ACTs sequentially, with the same or different areas of operation. In either option, the ACTs may be retained under squadron control or task organized with ground cavalry assets as AGTs. SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS K-14. The cavalry SCO employs simultaneous operations when Covering extended distances or a larger AO. Squadron must orient in multiple directions. Operation is of limited duration. IPB allows commander to focus ACTs at decisive point and time. Maximum reconnaissance forward is required. Maximum security is required to provide early warning and reaction time for the squadron. Threat requires the ACTs to operate primarily at night for survivability. SEQUENTIAL OPERATIONS K-15. The cavalry SCO employs sequential operations when AO is smaller. Squadron is oriented in a single direction. Operation requires extended coverage in time.
K-4
Appendix K
IPB does not allow the commander to focus ACTs at decisive point or time. Maximum reconnaissance or security forward not required. ACT held as a squadron reserve or required for follow-on operations.
SYNCHRONIZATION
K-16. The integration of air cavalry into the decision making process is an important and unique aspect of staff planning in any cavalry organization. The employment of air cavalry may be the significant difference between COAs presented to the commander. When developing COAs, air-ground synchronization should be planned along the following guidelines: INTELLIGENCE K-17. As stated above, intelligence must drive the maneuver plan. Effective intelligence preparation of the battlefield will often make it obvious how and when to employ air cavalry assets. To provide the commander with a clear picture of when and where to employ air cavalry, the IPB process should answer the following fundamental questions: Where is the enemy currently located? Where is the enemy going and/or what is his repositioning criteria and routes? Where can we best acquire or engage the enemy? When will he be there? What weapons system does the enemy have that can effect air cavalry assets? Answering these questions will allow the commander and staff to Designate reconnaissance objectives and focus. Determine priority intelligence requirements to facilitate employment of the air cavalry. Develop a R&S plan with depth and redundancy. Determine required combat multipliers (lethal and nonlethal SEAD), AGT task organization, and ACT weapons configurations. Determine bypass and engagement criteria. Determine REDCON levels and employment timelines or triggers. Determine holding area locations, FAA locations, and FARP locations. Focus on developing a plan that pits the ACTs capabilities against enemy weaknesses. MANEUVER K-18. ACTs should be employed with many of the same considerations for ground cavalry assets. ACTs fight as maneuver forces in platoon or troop strength. This allows sufficient combat power for maintaining enemy contact, actions on contact, FARP rotations, developing the situation, and ensures continuous and seamless C2. Standard maneuver graphics, movement techniques, and reporting requirements enhances air-ground
K-5
FM 1-114
integration and eases the planning requirements at the squadron level. As with ground cavalry assets, air cavalry requires varying guidance and planning considerations based on the mission, commanders intent, and other METT-T requirements. Maneuver planning considerations for the employment of air cavalry are as follows: Reconnaissance Operations K-19. Reconnaissance is an inherent task to all missions conducted by ACTs. Early development and integration of the ACTs in the squadron R&S plan allows parallel planning and ensures assets are available to meet the commanders intent. A clear and realistic task and purpose, as well as engagement criteria, are essential to ensure the ACTs remain focused on the reconnaissance objective. Normally, air cavalry is primarily force oriented and employed ahead of ground forces. This will facilitate rapid movement of GCTs and exploit the capability of air cavalry to increase the tempo of squadron operations. However, this does not imply that ACTs are not deliberate in executing movement techniques and maximizing stand off acquisition capabilities. When task organizing AGTs, the commander delineates employment constraints or restrictions to ensure the ACTs are employed within his intent. These constraints and restrictions may be outlined in the units SOP, OPORD, or verbal guidance from the SCO. Figures K-1 through K-6 show TTPs for integrated reconnaissance operations. Security Operations K-20. During security operations, the ACTs main role is still reconnaissance. The ACTs reconnaissance effort is focused on providing the squadron early warning, reaction time, and maneuver space. ACTs should be employed with sufficient distance forward or to the flank of ground forces to provide the maximum reaction time, normally within the range of supporting indirect fires. In unique situations, the ACTs may be employed in the attack role to conduct hasty or deliberate attacks to destroy enemy reconnaissance and security forces. However, the loss of the ACTs in the reconnaissance role often outweighs the advantages of employing them in the attack helicopter role. In the reconnaissance role, ACTs should maximize the use of indirect (mortars, artillery and CAS), as well as target handovers to attack helicopters or GCTs to meet the commanders intent for enemy destruction. This reduces the risk of the ACT becoming decisively engaged and losing mission focus.
K-6
Appendix K
6
NAI A1
PL BOB
...
..
...
...
...
- GCT mortar section positions in the center of the zone to provide suppressive fires for the forward ACTMs.
K-7
FM 1-114
..
8 9 7
PL KILL
OBJ CAT
- The ACT first conducts a hasty route reconnaissance of the GCTs route of march to the objective. The ACTs initial focus is to get the GCT to the objective quickly, without losses. - At PL Hit ACTM 1 bounds forward to conduct a force oriented reconnaissance of the area. Once ACTM 1 clears the area, ACTM 2 bounds along the flank to establish a screen on the farside of the objective. Based on METT-T the screen is placed to provide early warning and reaction time while the GCT executes the area reconnaissance. ACTMs report on the ACT command network. The ACT commander cross talks on the GCT command network. - ACTM 3 (ACT CDRs TM) continues to conduct hasty route reconnaissance to facilitate the continued movement of the GCT to objective. - As the GCT closes on the area reconnaissance objective, ACTM 3 assumes overwatch of the objective. ACTM 1 starts the FARP rotation or moves to the screen line PL to assist ACTM 2. - If contact is made on the screen line, ACTM 2 reports, maintains contact, and develops the situation. Based on METT-T, ACTM 2 may engage with indirect fires (mortars/ artillery), direct fires, or conduct target handover to the GCT or another ACTM. - Upon completion of the area reconnaissance, the AGT departs the area on a different route. The ACT continues to conduct route reconnaissance and screens to protect the GCT during movement.
4 3
ACTM 1
2
HIT ACTM 3
... ... ..
1
ACTM 2
... ...
K-8
Appendix K
..
8 9 7
PL KILL
- The ACT first conducts a hasty route reconnaissance of the GCTs route of march to the objective. The ACT uses a V formation, 2 ACTMs up, 1 ACTM back. The ACTs initial focus is to get the GCT to the objective quickly, without losses. - At PL Hit, ACTM 1 and 2 bound forward to conduct a force oriented reconnaissance of the area. After the area is cleared, ACTM 1 bounds along the left flank and ACTM 2 bounds along the right flank to establish a screen on the farside of the objective. Based on METT-T the screen is placed to provide early warning and reaction time while the GCT executes the area reconnaissance. ACTMs report on the ACT command network. The ACT commander cross talks on the GCT command network. - ACTM 3 (ACT CDRs TM) continues to conduct hasty route reconnaissance to facilitate the continued movement of the GCT to objective. - As the GCT closes on the area reconnaissance objective, ACTM 3 assumes overwatch of the objective. ACTMs 1 and 2 conduct team FARP rotations. ACTM 3 conducts team internal FARP rotation. - If contact is made on the screen line ACTM 1 or ACTM 2 reports, maintains contact, and develops the situation. Based on METT-T, ACTM 1 or ACTM 2 may engage with indirect fires (mortars/ artillery), direct fires, or conduct target handover to the GCT or another ACTM. The out of contact ACTM on the screen displaces to maintain contact in-depth. - Upon completion of the area reconnaissance the AGT departs the area on a different route. The ACT continues to conduct route reconnaissance and screens to protect the GCT during movement.
OBJ CAT 6
4 3
ACTM 1
ACTM 2
2
PL HIT ACTM 3
K-9
FM 1-114
PL KILL (LOA)
6 5
NAI A1
NAI A2
2 ACTM 2
ACTM 1
2
1
1
R O U T E R E D
ACT CDR
...
PL STRIKE (LD)
...
... ...
ACTM 3
K-10
Appendix K
NAI A1
NAI A2
ACTM 2 ACTM 1
2
... 1
1
R O U T E R E D
...
CDRs TM
... ...
K-11
FM 1-114
AIR-GROUND INTEGRATION
- An ACT and GCT conduct a coordinated stationary screen of the right flank of the main body. - The ACT establishes OPs, team boundaries, and other control measures 2 to facilitate C and depth to the screen line. - The ACT operates with 3 ACTMs set in OPs to maintain maximum eyes forward and provide security within the team. OPs are not placed linearly along the screen, but placed in-depth to allow contact to be maintained with enemy force and to cover multiple avenues of approach. ACTM integrity is maintained to facilitate security and reconnaissance through the depth of the sector. - The ACT commander operates independent of the ACTMs, when possible, positioning 2 himself where he can best C the troop, coordinate with the GCT, and pass intelligence to squadron. - The rear boundary of the ACT is established as a battle handover line to facilitate rapid target handovers to the GCT without losing enemy contact. - ACTMs conduct internal relief on station to maximize reconnaissance forward. FARPs should be positioned as close to the screen as METT-T allows to minimize FARP turn around times. - The GCT positions scout sections in-depth to provide redundant coverage in-depth and to facilitate battle handover to the two tank platoons, which are defending BPs. - The two tank platoons defend BPs to destroy enemy reconnaissance forces that penetrate the ACT and ground scout platoon screens. - Based on the SCOs engagement and bypass criteria, the ACT should maintain contact with enemy forces and conduct target handovers for destruction by the GCT. This allows the ACT to maintain the screen without being decisively engaged.
BHOL
11 6
ACTM 1
5
10
...
9
CDR
..
3
ACTM 2
8
..
..
2
...
7
ACTM 1
K-12
Appendix K
Figure K-6. Air-Ground IntegrationStationary Flank Screen Fire Support K-21. FS coordination is critical to ensure the commanders essential FS tasks are accomplished, as well as expediting clearance of fires. The squadron FSO must ensure ACTs are integrated into the FS observer plan. ACTs can facilitate long range, accurate, and timely indirect fires through the use of the MMS and onboard digital capabilities. When task organized in AGTs, the ACTs should be integrated into the GCT FS plan for observing troop mortar and artillery fires. To facilitate clearance of fires, the AGT commander and FIST must maintain situational awareness on the location of all air and ground assets. Standard maneuver and FS coordination measures, as well as accurate SITREPs will speed this process. During AGT operations, the squadron FSO may have less situational awareness on the location of all ACT assets operating on the battlefield. This may require clearing each of the grids fired, within the AGT sector or zone, to reduce the chance of fratricide. ACTs normally process all of their fires directly through the squadron FSO when engaging targets beyond the CFL. If targets are being engaged short of CFL, the ACT should process the call for fire through the GCT FIST. To enhance survivability for the employment of ACTs the FSO should consider planning and executing lethal and nonlethal SEAD. Based on METT-T, SEAD may be used to suppress, destroy, or deceive enemy AD systems to facilitate the ACTs maneuver plan. Localized and/or complimentary SEAD may be an EFST for cavalry SCO. Localized SEAD must be event driven and should be war-gamed to ensure the desired effect can be achieved based on target location, volume of fire, and timing. Complimentary SEAD is a continual process of engaging AD systems throughout the AO as they are identified. Mobility and Survivability K-22. ACTs can be used to assist with identification of obstacles and setting the conditions for breaching SOSR. Based on sensor conditions, the OH-58D MMS and VIXL capability can be used to identify obstacle makeup, complexity, and potential bypasses. If a bypass is not available, the ACT may be used to help set the condition for a breach. Although ACTs have limited firepower they may be used to provide suppression during the first phase of SOSR. During the obscuration phase, the ACT can assist the GCT FIST with adjusting artillery and mortar delivered smoke. During the secure and reduction phases, the ACT can provide a screen or overwatch position on the far side of the obstacle to identify and/or destroy repositioning enemy forces. Logistics K-23. To maintain maximum reconnaissance forward ACTs require frequent rotations to the FARP. During reconnaissance operations ACTs will consume greater amounts of Class III. During security operations ACTs will
K-13
FM 1-114
consume high levels of both Class III and Class V. Positioning of FARPs should be as far forward as METT-T allows to reduce FARP turnaround times. Security and enemy FA ranges are the primary considerations for forward employment of the FARP. To provide rapid maintenance recovery and the capability to repair minor aircraft faults, the squadron maintenance troop should locate a maintenance contact team in each FARP. Battle Command K-24. The SCO must determine the command relationship for the employment of the ACTs. When task organizing AGTs the SCO and staff should consider the impact of placing additional C2, combined planning, combined rehearsal, and liaison requirements on the ground and air troop. If limited time is available for troop leading procedures, the AGT will not have sufficient time to develop, brief, and rehearse a synchronized plan. When time is available, the most effective means of conducting integrated planning is the use of the LNO. The troop (air or ground) being placed OPCON should provide a full time LNO to the AGT commander to facilitate coordination during planning, preparation, and if possible, during execution. The final step during the preparation phase is to conduct the confirmation brief. The SCO must ensure that the AGT commander understands his intent, restrictions, and constraints for the employment of the air cavalry assets. Additionally, the SCO may include the conditions for bringing the air cavalry assets back under squadron control.
K-14
Glossary
1SG A&L first sergeant administrative and logistics
A/DACG A2 C 2 A2C2S AA AAR AATF ABCS ABF ACA ACFL ACL ACO ACP ACR ACR/L ACS ACT ACTM ACU AD ADA ADO ADRG ADSS AFAPD AGES AGMB AGT
arriving/departing aircraft control group Army airspace command and control Army airborne command and control system assembly area after action review air assault task force Army battle command system attack by fire airspace coordination area agreed cease fire line allowable combat load air coordination order armament control panel armored cavalry regiment armored cavalry regiment/light air cavalry squadron air cavalry troop air cavalry team area common user air defense air defense artillery air defense officer arc digitized raster graphic ANVIS display symbology system Air Force applications program development air ground engagement system advance guard main body air-ground team
Glossary-1
FM 1-114
AH AHO AHRS AHT ALFGL ALO ALOA ALOC ALSE AM AMC AMO AMPS ANCD ANGLICO AO AOC AOT APFSDS ARAT ARFOR arty ASAS-RWS ASB ASE ASI ASL ASOC ASP ATA ATAS ATC ATCCS
attack helicopter above highest obstacle attitude heading reference system assault helicopter troop automatic low frequency gain limiting air liaison officer air limit of advance administrative/logistics operations center Army life support equipment amplitude modulation Army Materiel Command air movement officer aviation mission planning system automated net control devices air and naval gunfire liaison company area of operation air operations center areas of transfer armor-piercing, fin-stabilized, discarding sabot (ammunition) Army Reprogramming Analysis Team Army Force artillery all-source analysis systemremote work station aviation support battalion aircraft survivability equipment additional skill identifier authorized stockage list air support operations center ammunition supply point air-to-air air-to-air stinger air traffic control Army tactical command and control system
Glossary-2
Glossary
atchs ATF ATHS ATKHB ATKHT ATM ATO ATP ATS AVIM avn AVTOC AVTR AVUM AWACS BCBL BDA BDAR BDE BHL BHO BMNT BMO BMP Bn BP BSA C-E C2 C2 V C3 I
attaches aviation task force airborne target handover system attack helicopter battalion attack helicopter troop aircrew training manual, air targeting mode air tasking order ammunition transfer point air traffic services aviation intermediate maintenance aviation aviation tactical operations center airborne video tape recorder aviation unit maintenance airborne warning and control system battle command battle lab battle damage assessment battle damage assessment and repair brigade battle handover line battle handover beginning morning nautical twilight battalion maintenance officer Boyevaya Mashina Pekhoty (literal Russian: combat vehicle, infantry) battalion battle position brigade support area communication-electronic command and control command and control vehicle command, control, communication, and intelligence
Glossary-3
FM 1-114
CAM CAS CASEVAC CATF CCIR Cdr CD-ROM CEOI CEWI CF CFL CFT CG cGyph CH CLF CMS Cmd C-NITE CNR COA COLT comm COMMZ COMSEC CONUS COP COSCOM CP CPG CPO CRP CS CSAR
chemical agent monitor close air support casualty evacuation commander amphibious task force commanders critical information requirements commander compact disk-read only memory communication electronic operating instructions combat electronic warfare and intelligence correlation factor coordinated fire line captive flight trainer center of gravity centigray per hour cargo helicopter commander landing force countermeasure set command Cobra night combat net radio course of action combat observation lasing team communication communication zone communications security continental United States combat observation post corps support command command post copilot-gunner copilot-observer combat reconnaissance patrol combat support combat search and rescue
Glossary-4
Glossary
CSM CSOP CSS CTCP CTT CW CW2 CW3 CW4 CW5 DA DAO DAART DART DASB DCS DEL DEW DF dig DIG DISCOM Div DMMC DMSO DP DPW DRA DS DSA DST DTC DTED
command sergeant major combat security observation post combat service support combat trains command post commanders tactical terminal continuous wave Chief Warrant Officer, W-2 Chief Warrant Officer, W-3 Chief Warrant Officer, W-4 Chief Warrant Officer. W-5 Department of the Army division ammunition officer downed aircraft/aircrew recovery team downed aircraft recovery team division aviation support battalion division cavalry squadron deployment equipment list directed energy weapons direction finding digital date-time group division support command division division material management center division medical supply office decision point Department of Public Works data rate adapter direct support division support area decision support template data transfer cartridge digital terrain elevation data
Glossary-5
FM 1-114
DTM DTR DTS DVO DZ EA ECAS ECCM ECM ED EEFI EEI EENT EFST EGI EID EMCOM EO EP EPW ERFS ES ESM ETAC EU EW EWO EWS EXTAL FA FAA FAC
data transfer module defense transportation regulation data transfer system direct view optics drop zone engagement area environmental compliance assessment system electronic counter-countermeasures electronic countermeasures environmental division essential elements of friendly information essential elements of information end evening nautical twilight essential fire support task embedded GPS/INS emitter identification database emissions control electro-optical electronic protection enemy prisoner of war extended range fuel system electronic support electronic support measures enlisted terminal attack controller electronic unit electronic warfare electronic warfare officer electronic warfare support extra time allowance field artillery forward assembly area forward air controller
Glossary-6
Glossary
FARE FARP FASCAM FCC FCR FEBA FFA FFAR FFIR FIST FH FLE FLIR FLOT FM FOC FORSCOM FOV FP FPF FRAGO FSB FSCL FSCM FSCOORD FSE FSO FSSE FWF G3 GAS GB GCA
forward area refueling equipment forward area arming and refueling point family of scatterable mines flight coordination center fire control radar forward edge of the battle area free-fire area folding fin aerial rockets friendly force information requirements fire support team frequency hopping forward logistics element forward looking infrared forward line of own troops field manual, frequency modulation flight operations center United States Army Forces Command field of view forward patrol final protective fires fragmentary order forward support battalion fire support coordination line fire support coordinating measures fire support coordinator forward support element, forward security element fire support officer forward service support elements former warring factions Assistant Chief of Staff (Operations and Plans) ground aided seeker gigabyte ground controlled approach
Glossary-7
FM 1-114
GCT GFAP GLO GMRR gnd grp GPS GRREG GS GSAB GSR GT GTM GUI HA HAZCOM HAZMIN HE HERO HESC HF HHB HHC HHQ HHT HIMAD HIRSS HM HMMWV hr HSC HSD HUMINT
ground cavalry troop general framework agreement for peace ground liaison officer guards motorized rifle regiment ground group global positioning system graves registration general support general support aviation battalion ground surveillance radar gun target ground targeting mode graphical user interface holding area hazardous communications hazardous waste minimization high explosive hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance heavy equipment supply company high frequency headquarters and headquarters battalion headquarters and headquarters company higher headquarters headquarters and headquarters troop high-to-medium altitude air defense hover infrared suppression system hazardous material high mobility multipurpose wheel vehicle hour headquarters and supply company horizontal situational display human intelligence
Glossary-8
Glossary
HW HVT ID IDM IEBL IEW IFF IFOR IMC IMCPU IMSP INS INTSUM IO IP IPB IR ITO IW J-SEAD JAAT JCO JMC JPN JSTARS JTF KIA km KMIH KMPH KW
hazardous waste high valve target identification improved data modem inter-entity boundary line intelligence and electronic warfare identification, friend or foe implementation force instrument meteorological conditions improved master controller processor unit improved mast mounted sight system processor inertial navigation system intelligence summary information operations instructor pilot intelligence preparation of the battlefield infrared installation transportation officer information warfare joint-suppression of enemy air defense joint air attack team joint commission observer joint military commission jam program number joint surveillance target attack radar system joint task force killed in action kilometer kilometer traveled in an hour kilometers per hour Kiowa Warrior
Glossary-9
FM 1-114
LAN LANTIRN LBA LCE LCU LD LNO LOA LOAL LOAL-DIR LOAL-HI LOAL-LO LOBL LOC LOGPAC LOS LP LRF/D LRSD LST LZ MAC MACOM maint MBA MCOO MCS MCS/P MDMP ME MEDEVAC METL
local area network low altitude navigation target infrared night Longbow Apache load carrying equipment lightweight computer unit line of departure liaison officer limit of advance lock on after launch lock on after launch-direct lock on after launch-high lock on after launch-low lock on before launch line of contact logistics package line of sight listening post laser range finder/designator long range surveillance detachment laser spot tracker landing zone Military Airlift Command major command maintenance main battle area modified combined obstacle overlay maneuver control system maneuver control system/phoenix military decision making process main effort medical evacuation mission essential task list
Glossary-10
Glossary
METT-T MFD MFO MI MIA MICLIC MIH MILES MILSTAMP min MMC MMS MOPP MOUT MPH MPSM MRB MRC MRE MRP MRR MRT MS MSB MSCA MSE MSEC-BBS MSR MTI MTO NAI NAVAIDS NBC
mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time available multifunction display multifunction display military intelligence missing in action mine-clearing line charge miles traveled in an hour multiple integrated laser engagement system military standard transportation and movement procedure minute materiel management center mast-mounted sight mission oriented protective posture military operation in urban terrain miles per hour multipurpose submunition motorized rifle battalion motorized rifle company meal, ready to eat motorized rifle platoon motorized rifle regiment minimum resolvable temperature mission support, movement station main support battalion military support to civilian authorities mobile subscriber equipment multiservice electronic combatbulletin board system main supply route moving target indicator message to observer named areas of interest navigational aids nuclear, biological, and chemical
Glossary-11
FM 1-114
NCO NCOIC NCS NCTR NEO NEPA NET NFA NFL NGFS NIGA NIMA NOE NRB NSFS NVD NVG O/O O&I OCOKA OCONUS OD ODA OH OIC OP OPCON OPLAN OPORD OPSEC OPTEMPO ORF
noncommissioned officer noncommissioned officer in charge net control station noncooperative target recognition noncombatant evacuation operations National Environmental Protection Agency new equipment training no-fire area no-fire line naval gun fire support neutron induced gamma activity National Imagery and Mapping Agency nap-of-the-earth natural resources branch naval surface fire support night vision device night vision goggle on order operations and intelligence obstacles, cover and concealment, observation and fields of fire, key terrain, and avenues of approach outside continental United States outside dose optical display assembly observation helicopter officer in charge observation post operational control operation plan operation order operations security operation tempo operational readiness float
Glossary-12
Glossary
OT PA PAC PAF PC PCC PCI PCOA PDU photo PIR PL PLL PLS plts PMCS POC POD POE POL POR PPAR PPC PPM PRC PST PW PZ QRF R&S RADAR
observer target pressure altitude pitch attitude cue preassault fires pilot in command precombat checks precombat inspection probable courses of action pilot display unit photograph priority intelligence requirements phase line prescribed load list palletized load system platoons preventive maintenance checks and services point of contact port of debarkation port of embarkation petroleum, oils, and lubrication preparation of replacement for overseas movement purpose of fires, priority of fires, assets available/allocations and restrictions performance planning card progressive phase maintenance populace and resources control past time pulsed wave pickup zone quick reaction force reconnaissance and surveillance radio detection and ranging
Glossary-13
FM 1-114
RAS RATT RBECS REDCON RF RFA RFI RFL RIF RMMC RMP ROE ROS RP RSA RSDS RSS RTO RWS S&S S&T S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SAD SAL HF SALT SALUTE SAM SARH SATCOM
regimental aviation squadron radio teletypewriter remote battlefield electronic CEOI system readiness condition radio frequency restrictive fire area radar frequency interferometer restrictive fire line reconnaissance in force regimental materiel management center reprogrammable microprocessor rules of engagement relief on station release point regimental support area radar signal detecting set regimental support squadron radiotelephone operator remote work station supply and service supply and transport adjutant intelligence officer operations and training officer supply officer civil affairs officer safe/arm device semiactive laser designated hellfire size, activity, location, and time size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment surface-to-air missile semi-active radar homing satellite communication
Glossary-14
Glossary
SA-6 SA-8 SA-11 SBF SCO SE SEAD SEMA SHORAD SICP-RWS SIDPERS SIGINT SINCGARS SIP SIT/STAT SITREP SITTEMP SJA SME SMO SOCCE SOF SOI SOP SOSR SP SPIN SPOTREP sqdn SQI SRA SSA STACOM STU-III
(Gainful, Soviet SAM) (Gecko, Soviet SAM) Gadfy, Soviet Low-to-Medium Altitude SAM) support by fire squadron commander supporting effort suppression of enemy air defenses special electronic mission aircraft short range air defense standard integrated command post rigid wall shelter standard installation/division personnel system signal intelligence single channel ground and airborne radio system system improvement program situation/status situation report situation and event template staff judge advocate subject matter expert squadron maintenance officer special operations command and control element special operations force signal operation instructions standing operating procedures suppress, obscure, secure, and reduce start point special instructions spot report squadron skill qualification identifier specialized repair authorization squadron support area satellite communications secure telephone unit-III
Glossary-15
FM 1-114
STX TAA TAC TAC CP TAC(A) TACAIR TACAN TACFIRE TACP TADS TAI TC ACCIS TCC TCIM TCU TDIS TDMP TF TFE TI TIRS TIS TIS INTG TOA TOC TOE/TO&E TOF TOO TOT TOW TPM TPME TRP
situational training exercises tactical assembly area tactical air coordinator tactical command post tactical air coordinator (airborne) tactical air tactical air navigation tactical fire tactical air control party target acquisition and designation system target areas of interest Transportation Corps automated command and control information system transportation component command tactical communication interface module transportable computer unit time-distance tactical decision making process task force task force eagle technical inspector terrain reference index system thermal imaging sensor thermal imaging sensor integrator transfer of authority tactical operations center table of organization and equipment time of flight tactical operations officer time-on-target tube launched, optical tracked, wire guided (missile) terrain profile mode task, purpose, method, and end state target reference point
Glossary-16
Glossary
TSU TTP TVM TVS UAV UH UHF UMCP UMO UMT UNIX UNPROFOR US USA USAAVNC USAF USMC USN USTRANSCOM UTM UWP UXO VHF VIXL VMF VPK VPM VSD VTR WARNORD WH
telescopic sight unit tactics, techniques, and procedures track-via-missile television sensor unmanned aerial vehicle utility helicopter ultra high frequency unit maintenance collection point unit movement officer unit ministry team multiuser, multitasking operating system United Nations Protection Force United States United States Army United States Army Aviation Center United States Air Force United States Marine Corps United States Navy United States Army Transportation Command universal transverse mercator universal weapon pylon unexploded ordnance very high frequency video image crosslink variable message format vehicles per kilometer vehicles per mile vertical situation display video tape recorder warning order white hot
Glossary-17
FM 1-114
word of day Warrant Officer One wire strike protection system executive officer zone of separation
Glossary-18
Bibliography
AR 5-9. Area Support Responsibilities. 16 October 1998. AR 25-400-2. The Modern Army Recordkeeping System (MARKS). 26 February 1993. AR 55-4. CONUS Military Installation Materiel Outloading and Receiving Capability Report. 15 December 1984. AR 55-29. Military Convoy Operations in CONUS. 3 September 1971. AR 55-60. Official Table of Distances (Continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Canada, Canal Zone, Central America, Mexico, and Puerto Rico). 1 December 1981. AR 55-71. Transportation of Personal Property and Related Services. 1 June 1983. AR 55-113. Movement of Units Within Continental United States. 19 July 1973. AR 55-162. Permits for Oversize, Overweight, or Other Special Military Movements on Public Highways in the United States. 1 January 1979. AR 55-355. Defense Traffic Management Regulation. 31 July 1986. AR 70-47. Engineering for Transportability. 19 August 1985. AR 71-32. Force Development and Documentation-Consolidated Policies. 3 March 1997. AR 95-1. Flight Regulations. 1 September 1997. AR 190-11. Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives. 30 September 1993. AR 200-1. Environmental Protection and Enhancement. 21 February 1997. AR 200-2. Environmental Effects of Army Actions. 23 December 1988. AR 220-10. Preparation for Oversea Movement of Units (POM). 15 June 1973. AR 220-15. Journals and Journal Files. 1 December 1983 AR 310-25. Dictionary of United States Army Terms. 15 October 1983. AR 380-5. Department of the Army Information Security Program. 25 February 1988. AR 385-10. Army Safety Program. 23 May 1988 AR 611-112. Manual of Warrant Officer Military Occupational Specialties. 26 June 1995. AR 700-15. Packaging of Materiel. 31 March 1998. AR 750-1. Army Materiel Maintenance Policy and Retail Maintenance Operations. 1 August 1994.
Bibliography-1
FM 1-114
ARTEP 1-045-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Asault Helicopter Battalion. 3 October 1995. DA Form 581. Request for Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition. August 1989. DA Form 1594. Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer's Log. 1 November 1962. DA Form 1971-R. Radiological Data Sheet-Monitoring or Point Technique. September 1994. DA Form 1971-1-R. Radiological Data Sheet-Route or Course Leg Technique. September 1994. DA Form 1971-2-R. Chemical Data Sheet-Monitoring or Survey. 1 September 1986. DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. 1 February 1974. DA Form 2404. Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet. 1 April 1979. DA Form 2627. Record of Proceedings Under Article 15, UCMJ. August 1984. DA Form 4004. Message Book M-210-B. 1 February 1977. DA PAM 25-30. Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms. 1 July 1999. DA PAM 746-1. Pallets and Storage Aids for Army Use. 28 October 1988. DD Form 458. Charge Sheet. August 1984. DD Form 1387-2. Special Handling Data/Certification. June 1986. DFAS-IN Regulation 37-1. Finance and Accounting Policy Implementation. 18 September 1995. DOD 4500.9-R Part III. Defense Transportation Regulation (Mobility). April 1997. FM 1-100. Army Aviation Operations. 21 February 1997. FM 1-111. Aviation Brigades. 27 October 1997. FM 1-112. Attack Helicopter Operations. 2 April 1997. FM 1-113. Utility and Cargo Helicopter Operations. 12 September 1997. FM 1-140. Helicopter Gunnery. 29 March 1996. FM 1-202. Environmental Flight. 23 February 1983. FM 1-301. Aeromedical Training for Flight Personnel. 29 May 1987. FM 1-500. Army Aviation Maintenance. 27 January 1995. FM 1-513. Battlefield Recovery and Evacuation of Aircraft. 20 May 1993. FM 1-564. Shipboard Operations. 29 June 1997. FM 3-3. Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance. 16 November 1992. FM 3-3-1. Nuclear Contamination Avoidance. 9 September 1994.
Bibliography-2
Bibliography
FM 3-4. NBC Protection. 29 May 1992. FM 3-5. NBC Decontamination. 17 November 1993.
FM 3-6. Field Behavior of NBC Agents (Including Smoke and Incendiaries). 3 November 1986. FM 3-7. NBC Field Handbook. 29 September 1994. FM 3-19. NBC Reconnaissance. 19 November 1993. FM 3-50. Smoke Operations. 4 December 1990. FM 3-100. Chemical Operations Principles and Fundamentals. 8 May 1996. FM 5-33. Terrain Analysis. 11 July 1990. FM 5-71-100. Division Engineer Combat Operations. 22 April 1993. FM 5-100. Engineer Operations. 27 February 1996. FM 5-100-15. Corps Engineer Operations. 6 June 1995. FM 5-170. Engineering Reconnaissance. 5 May 1998. FM 6-20. Fire Support in the AirLand Battle. 17 May 1988. FM 6-20-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps and Division Operations. 18 October 1989. FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Heavy). 5 January 1990. FM 6-20-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Light). 5 January 1990. FM 6-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire. 16 July 1991. FM 8-9. NATO Handbook on the Medical Aspects of NBC Defensive Operations. 1 February 1996. FM 8-285. Treatment of Chemical Agent Casualties and Conventional Military Chemical Injuries. 22 December 1995. FM 9-43-2. Recovery and Battlefield Damage Assessment and Repair. 3 October 1995. FM 10-27. General Supply in Theaters of Operations. 20 April 1993. FM 12-6. Personnel Doctrine. 9 September 1994. FM 14-100. Financial Management Operations. 7 May 1997. FM 16-1. Religious Support. 26 May 1995. FM 17-95. Cavalry Operations. 24 December 1996. FM 17-97. Cavalry Troop. 3 October 1995
Bibliography-3
FM 1-114
FM 17-98. Scout Platoon. 9 September 1994. FM 21-11. First Aid for Soldiers. 27 October 1988. FM 24-1. Signal Support in the AirLand Battle. 15 October 1990. FM 34-1. Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations. 27 September 1994. FM 34-3. Intelligence Analysis. 15 March 1990. FM 34-7. Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Support to Low-intensity Conflict Operations. 18 May 1993. FM 34-10. Division Intelligence and Electronics Warfare Operations. 25 November 1986. FM 34-40. (S)Electronic Warfare Operations(U). 9 October 1987. FM 34-60. Brigade and Battalion Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations. 15 April 1986. FM 34-80. Counterintelligence. 3 October 1995. FM 34-81. Weather Support for Army Tactical Operations. 31 August 1989. FM 34-130. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield. 8 July 1994. FM 44-8. Combined Arms for the Air Defense. 1 June 1999. FM 55-9. Unit Air Movement Planning. 5 April 1993. FM 55-10. Movement Contro. 9 February 1999. FM 55-15. Transportation Reference Data. 27 October 1997. FM 55-20. Army Rail Transport Units and Operations. 31 October 1986. FM 55-30. Army Motor Transport Units and Operations. 27 June 1997. FM 55-65. Strategic Deployment. 3 October 1995. FM 63-2. Division Support Command, Armored, Infantry, and Mechinized Infantry Divisions. 20 May 1991. FM 63-3. Corps Support Command. 30 September 1993. FM 63-23. Aviation Support Battalion. 6 June 1996. FM 71-3. The Armored and Mechanized Infantry Brigade. 8 January 1996. FM 71-100. Division Operations. 28 August 1996. FM 90-21. (JAAT) Multiservice Procedures for Joint Air Attack Team Operations. 3 June 1998. FM 100-5. Operations. 14 June 1993.
Bibliography-4
Bibliography
FM 100-6. Information Operations. 27 August 1996. FM 100-10. Combat Service Support. 3 October 1995. FM 100-15. Corps Operations. 29 October 1996. FM 100-20. Military Operations in Low Intensity Conflict. 5 December 1990. FM 100-103. Army Airspace Command and Control in a Combat Zone. 7 October 1987. FM 101-5. Staff Organization and Operations. 31 May 1997. FM 101-5-1. Operational Terms and Graphics. 30 September 1997. FORSCOM Regulation 55-1. Unit Movement Planning. 1 October 1997. Joint Publication 3-09.3. Joint Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Close Air Support. 1 December 1995. Joint Publication 4-01.3. Joint Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Movement Control. 21 June 1996. STANAG 2002. Warning Signs for Marking of Contaminated or Dangerous Land Areas. 26 November 1980. STANAG 2014. Operations Orders, Warning Orders and Administrative/Logistic Orders. 14 August 1991. STANAG 2019. Military Symbols for Land Based Systems-APP-6. 16 September 1986. STANAG 2020. Operational Situation Reports. 3 April 1967. STANAG 2022. Intelligence Reports. 16 December 1992. STANAG 2112. NBC Reconnaissance. 15 October 1976. STANAG 2399. Battlefield Recovery/Evacuation Operations. 6 April 1992. STANAG 2404. Joint Anti-Armor Operations. STANAG 2405. Helicopter Air-to-Air Combat. STANAG 2407. Helicopter Battle Damage Assesment and Repair. 22 September 1992. STANAG 2863. Navigational and Communications for Helicopters in Multinational Land Operations. 26 September 1988. STANAG 2946. Forward Area Refuelling Equipment. 19 July 1983. STANAG 3277. Air Reconnaissance Request/Task Form. 31 March 1978. STANAG 3281. Personal Locator Beacons. 3 April 1978. STANAG 3300. Standardized Aircraft Armament Terminology. 11 December 1996. STANAG 3627. Helicopter Day and Night Tactical Formation Flying. 8 October 1991.
Bibliography-5
FM 1-114
STANAG 3873. Electrinic Warfare (EW) in Air Operations-ATP-44(B). 31 October 1996, NED 1 April 1997. STANAG 7007. Search and Rescue Avionics System (SARAS). 25 March 1988. STP 21-1-SMCT. Soldiers Manual of Common Tasks Skill Level 1. 1 October 1994. TB 55-45. Certification of Military Equipment for Transport in AMC/CRAF Aircraft. 15 January 1995. TB 55-46-1. Standard Characteristics (Dimensions, Weight, and Cube) for Transportability of Military Vehicles and Other Outsize/Overweight Equipment. 1 January 1999. TB 55-46-2. Standard Transportability Characteristics (Dimensions, Weight, and Cube) for Military Vehicles and Equipment. 15 January 1999. TC 1-201. Tactical Flight Procedures. 20 January 1984. TC 1-209. Aircrew Training Manual Observation Helicopter OH-58D, Aviator/Aeroscout Observer. 9 December 1992. TC 1-210. Aircrew Training Program Commander's Guide to Individual and Crew Standardization. 3 October 1995. TC 5-400. Unit Leaders Handbook for Environmental Stewardship. 29 September 1994. TM 3-4240-280-10. Operations Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, ABC-M24 and Accessories and Mask, Chemical-Biological, Tank, M25A1 and Accessories. 15 March 1988. TM 38-230-1. Packaging of Materiel: Preservation (Vol I). 1 August 1982. TM 38-230-2. Packaging of Materiel: Packing (Vol II). 15 June 1977. TM 38-250. Preparing Hazardous Materials for Military Air Shipments. 1 March 1997. TM 55-603. Movement of Military Impediments by Commercial Carriers. 28 October 1977. TM 55-625. Transportability Criteria and Guidance for Loading and Unloading Multilevel Railcars at Military Installations in the United States. 15 August 1970. TM 55-2200-001-12. Transportability Guidance for Application of Blocking, Bracing, and Tiedown Materials for Rail Transport. 31 May 1978.
Bibliography-6
Index
A
actions on contact, 3-8 air assault security operations, 3-49 air assault operations, 3-49 air movement phase, 3-49 ground tactical phase, 3-50 landing phase, 3-50 loading phase, 3-49 staging phase, 3-49 fire support, 3-50 airborne division cavalry squadron, 1-6 air cavalry capabilities, 1-2 1-3 limitations, 1-2 1-3 reconnaissance techniques, 3-7 air cavalry platoon, 1-7 air cavalry team, 1-7 air cavalry troop (ACT), 1-6 air-ground integration, K-0 fundamentals, K-0 capabilities and limitations, K-0 K-1 standing operating procedures, K-1 K-2 C , K-2 K-4 maximizing available assets, K-4 employment methods, K-4 synchronization, K-5 K-14 AHT, 1-7 aviation unit maintenance troop (HHT), 1-6 Aircraft characteristics, B-0 AH-1 Cobra, B-2
2
AH-64A Apache, B-2 AH-64D Longbow Apache, B-2 CH-47D Chinook, B-3 OH-58A/C Kiowa, B-3 OH-58D Kiowa Warrior (KW), B-3 UH-1H Iroquois, B-3 UH-60A/L Black Hawk, B-3 aircraft survivability equipment (ASE), C-3 AN/ALQ-144, C-3 AN/APR-39, C-3 AN/APX-100, C-3 AN/AVR-2, C-3 fundamentals and threat considerations, H-0 tenets, H-1 aircraft hardening, H-2 jamming and decoying, H-2 tactics, H-1 signature reduction, H-1 warning, H-1 threat considerations, H-2 H-3 acquisition versus track, H-2 decreasing the probability of hit, H-3 engagement envelope, H-3 example threat system, H-2 threat engagement
sequence, H-2 time and space, H-2 tools, H-2 threat weapon sensors, H-3 infrared, H-4 optical/electrooptical, H-4 laser/directed energy weapon, H-4 radar, H-3 officer, 2-10 operational employment considerations, H-11 controls, H-18 mission planning, H-12 H-13 risk assessment, H-15 H-18 mission execution, H-18 situational awareness, H-18 systems, H-5 categories, H-5 aircraft signature reduction, H-5 situational awareness, H-5 active countermeasures, H-5 configuration settings, H-11 tactical operations officers and ASE electronic warfare officers, H-11 suites, H-5
Index-1
FM 1-114_________________________________________________________________________________
AH-1 ASE capabilities, H-8 AH-64 ASE capabilities, H-6 EH-60 ASE capabilities, H-7 OH-58D ASE capabilities, H-6 OH-58A/C ASE capabilities, H-7 UH-1 ASE capabilities, H-8 UH-60 ASE capabilities, H-7 system descriptions, H-9 AN/ALQ136(V)5, H-10 AN/ALQ144A(V)1/3, H-9 AN/ALQ156(V)2, H-10 AN/ALQ162(V)2, H10 AN/APR-39(V)1, H-9 AN/APR39A(V)1, H-9 AN/APR-39(V)2, H-9 AN/AVR-2/2A, H-9 M-130, H-10 air traffic services, 5-16 armored division cavalry squadron, 1-6 armored regimental aviation squadron, 1-4 air cavalry squadron (ACS), 1-6
alternate and rear command posts (CPs), 2-12 Army operations characteristics, 1-0 agility, 1-0 depth, 1-1 initiative, 1-0 orchestration, 1-1 versatility, 1-1 assault helicopter troop (AHT), 3-2 assembly areas (AAs), 2-12 2-13 AA operations, E-0 designation of AAs, E-0 responsibilities, E-0 E-1 occupation, E-2 reconnaissance, E-3 quartering party and advanced party operations, E-3 E-4 main body arrival, E-4 E-5 improvement, E-4 security, E-4 E-7 displacement, E-7 E-8 aviation mission planning system (AMPS), C-4
command sergeant major (CSM), 2-2 engineer officer, 2-4 executive officer (XO), 2-2 fire support officer (FSO), 2-5 first sergeant, 2-9 flight operations officer, 2-5 headquarters and headquarters troop (HHT) commander, 2-5 instructor pilot (IP), 2-9 intelligence officer, 2-3 squadron commander, 2-1 liaison officer, 2-6 maintenance officer, 2-9 operations officer, 2-3 pilot-in-command (PC), 2-10 platoon leaders, 2-8 regimental support squadron commander, 2-6 safety officer, 2-10 signal officer, 2-4 squadron maintenance officer, 2-6 squadron tactical operations officer, 2-7 supply officer, 2-3 surgeon, 2-6 team leaders, 2-8 battle damage assessment and repair (BDAR), 5-25
B
battle command and staff responsibilities, 2-1 AD officer, 2-4 adjutant, 2-3 air cavalry troop commander, 2-7 air liaison officer, 2-4 air mission commander (AMC), 2-8 ASE officer, 2-10 aviation unit maintenance (AVUM) troop commander, 2-4 chaplain, 2-4 chemical officer, 2-4
C
cavalry organizations, 1-3 chemical data sheet, 3-23 close operations, 3-63 main battle area (MBA), 3-64 security area, 3-63 combat support, 5-0 field artillery (FA), 5-0 mortars, 5-0
Index-2
__________________________________________________________________________________Index
naval gun fire support, 5-0 suppression of enemy ADs, 5-1 suppressive fires, 5-2 planned fires, 5-2 immediate fires, 5-2 fire requests, 5-2 fire support (FS), 5-3 close air support (CAS), 5-3 electronic warfare (EW), 5-3 EW suppression of enemy AD, 5-4 FS coordinating measures, 5-4 restrictive measures, 5-4 restrictive fire area, 5-4 no-fire area, 5-5 no-fire line, 5-6 restrictive fire line, 5-6 airspace coordination area, 5-7 permissive measures, 5-7 coordinated fire line, 5-7 FS coordinated line, 5-8 free-fire area, 58 CAS, 5-9 preplanned requests, 5-9 immediate requests, 5-9 ground and air alerts, 5-10 CAS target acquisition and targeting, 5-10 capabilities, 5-10 limitations, 5-10 CAS coordination and control, 5-11
engineer support, 5-11 AD planning and employment, 5-12 AD active and passive measure, 5-12 5-13 intelligence, 5-14 EW, 5-15 counterintelligence, 5-15 air traffic services, 5-16 combat service support (CSS), 5-17 aircraft recovery operations and BDAR, 5-25 aviation maintenance support structure, 5-24 FARP, 5-21 5-23 fundamentals, 5-17 operations in the ACT, 5-18 operations for the DCS, 5-18 operations for the RAS, 5-17 supply classes, 5-18 vehicle maintenance and recovery, 5-24 command and control (C ), 2-1 facilities, 2-10 techniques, 2-1 command and control communications, 2-14 purpose, 2-14 responsibilities, 2-15 restoration, 2-15 command, control, communications, and intelligence (C3I) enhancement, 2-25 lines of communication, 2-25 message and document delivery, 2-25 personnel and equipment transportation, 2-26 communications, 2-25 2-26, C-3, G-8 G-9
2
airborne target handover system (ATHS), C-3 retransmission, C-3 counterdrug operations, 4-4 counterintelligence, 5-15 course of action (COA), 3-9
D
defensive cover, 3-47 defensive covering force, 3-47 rear covering force, 3-49 defensive operations, 3-61 deep operations, 3-61 combined operations, 3-63 enemy, 3-61 mission, 3-61 terrain, 3-61 time, 3-63 troops, 3-61 3-63 digital communications systems, 2-26 AH-64D Longbow Apache (LBA), 2-27 aviation mission planning system (AMPS), 2-27 aviation tactical operations center (AVTOC), 2-28 close operations, 2-31 AH-64D in the close battle, 2-31 AH-64D in rear operations, 2-32 enhancements to reconnaissance operations, 2-29 enhancements to security operations, 2-30 improved data modem, 2-29 systems and equipment, 2-26 maneuver control system/phoenix, 2-29 OH-58D Kiowa Warrior (KW), 2-26
Index-3
FM 1-114_________________________________________________________________________________
role of contributing factors, I-2 techniques of risk reduction, I-3 fragmentary order (FRAGO), H-12 H-13
M
maintenance, 5-24 AVIM, 5-25 AVUM, 1-6, 5-25 depot, 5-24 5-25 direct support (DS), 5-24 general support (GS), 5-24 recovery procedures, 5-24 support, 5-24 unit, 5-24 mast mounted sight (MMS), C-1 means of communication, 2-15 commercial lines, 2-16 messengers, 2-15 radio, 2-16 sound and visual, 2-16 wire, 2-15 movement and rapid deployment, D-0 airlift, D-3 deployment, D-2 fundamentals, D-0 planning and preparation, D-1 rail movement, D-3 responsibilities, D-0 road march, D-4 D-18 sealift, D-4 training, D-18 unit movement references, D-18 D-19 moving guard, 3-43 advance guard, 3-43 flank guard, 3-43 rear guard, 3-43
E
employment, 3-1 EW, 5-3, 5-15 support, 5-15 attack, 5-15 protection, 5-15 environmental concerns and compliance, J-1 areas, J-6 awareness and compliance, J-1 compliance assessment system, J-1 factors, J-5 mission execution, J-3 risk assessment, J-4 J-5 training preparation, J-1 types of unit programs, J-3 unit activities, J-6 residual risk, J-15 risk impact value, J-6 J-14 risk reduction, J-14 unit level programs, J-2
H
hasty attack, 3-53 HHT commander, 2-5
I
intelligence, 5-14
J
joint air attack team (JAAT), G-1 advanced helicopter capabilities, G-9 advanced tactical aircraft (TACAIR) operations, G-9 briefing, G-10 briefing form format, G-11 purpose, G-1 communications, G-8 G-9 composition, G-2 G-3 conduct of operations, G-7 G-8 mission planning, G-3 G-4 employment, G-6 G-7 forward air controller, G-10 sequencing, G-4 G-6
F
feint, 3-60 FS, 5-3 forward area arming and refueling points (FARPs), 2-12, 5-21 forward assembly areas, 2-13 fratricide prevention, I-0 causes and effects, I-0 effects of fratricide, I-3 primary causes, I-0 I-1 primary contributing factors, I-2 risk assessment, I-3 risk assessment matrix, I-4 risk reduction measures, I-4 I-8
L
laser guided munitions copperhead artillery projectiles, C-5 laser guided bombs, C-5 light infantry division cavalry squadron, 1-6 light regimental aviation squadron, 1-4
N
NBC, 3-22
O
offensive cover, 3-46
Index-4
__________________________________________________________________________________Index
advance covering force, 3-46 flank covering force, 3-47 offensive operations, 3-51 attack position, 3-55 battle handover, 3-57 battle handover line, 3-60 deliberate attack, 3-54 exploitation and pursuit operations, 3-55 exploitation force, 3-56 feint, 3-60 hasty attack, 3-53 movement-to-contact, 3-51 passage of line, 3-58 C2, 3-60 order of movement, 3-59 organization, 3-59 security, 3-59 preassault fires, 3-57 pursuit force, 3-56 raid, 3-55 search and attack, 3-52 OH-58D KW, B-3 crew interface, C-0 data transfer system, C-0 video tape recorder, C-0 ANVIS display symbology system, C-0 MMS, C-1 thermal imaging sensor, C-1 television sensor, C-1 laser range finder/designator, C-1 video image cross link, C-1 weapon configurations, C-1 2.75-inch rockets, C-2 .50 caliber machine gun, C-2 air-to-air stingers, C-2
hellfire missiles, C-2 communications, C-3 navigation, C-3 ASE, C-3 deployability, C-4 AMPS, C-4 laser guided munitions, C-5 operations order (OPORD), F-1 F-3, H-12 OPORD brief, F-3 instructions, F-3 F-24 troop OPORD format, F-24 F-32 operations security (OPSEC), 2-25 organizations, 1-2
mobile subscriber equipment, 2-21 reconnaissance area, 3-16 3-18 in force, 3-19 landing zone/pickup zone (LZ/PZ), 3-19 3-21 nuclear, chemical, and biological (NBC), 3-22 chemical agent detection, 3-22 radiological monitoring, 3-22 3-25 survey, 3-26 route, 3-10 3-11 zone, 3-13 3-16 risk management, A-0 responsibilities A-0 A-1 management procedures, A-1 A-3 rules, A-3
R
radiological data sheet, 3-24 3-25 RAS, 1-3 rear operations, 3-64 retrograde operations, 3-65 delay, 3-65 retirement, 3-66 withdrawal, 3-66 reconnaissance operations, 3-4 fundamentals, 3-4 planning, 3-5 capabilities, 3-6 methods of reconnaissance, 3-6 aerial, 3-6 by fire, 3-6 dismounted, 3-7 regimental aviation squadron (RAS) and DCS, 2-16 external communications, 2-19 2-21 internal radio networks, 2-17 2-19 internal wire communications network, 2-16 2-17
S
security operations, 3-26 area security, 3-50 capabilities, 3-31 covering force operation, 3-45 air assault security operations, 3-49 defensive cover, 3-47 offensive cover, 3-45 RAS, 3-45 fundamentals, 3-27 continuous reconnaissance, 3-27 early warning, 3-27 enemy contact, 3-28 main body, 3-27 reaction time and maneuver space, 3-28 guard operations, 3-41
Index-5
FM 1-114_________________________________________________________________________________
ACS and ACT critical tasks, 3-45 missions, 3-41 planning considerations, 3-45 planning considerations, 3-28 purpose, 3-26 area security, 3-27 cover, 3-27 guard, 3-26 screen, 3-26 screen, 3-29 ACTM organization, 3-31 air combat operations, 3-31 aircraft rotation, 3-31 coordination, 3-32 critical tasks for ACT, 3-30 critical tasks for squadron, 3-29 method of maneuver, 3-37 3-39 moving screen, 3-35 offensive engagements, 3-31 positioning C and CSS assets, 3-32 rear area operations screen, 3-40 screening against enemy aircraft, 3-40 squadron planning, 3-31 stationary screen, subsequent screen line, 3-32 troop planning, 3-31 3-32 security (AA), E-5 obstacles, E-5 obstacle development, E-6 fighting positions, E-6
2
listening posts and observation posts, E-6 dismount point, E-6 indirect fire, E-6 AA reconnaissance and surveillance, E-6 displacement AA, E-6 friendly AD artillery, E-7 squadron mission, 1-1 stability and support operations, 4-1, 4-3 attacks and raids, 4-4 categories, 4-3 counterdrug, 4-4 employment guidelines, 4-2 humanitarian assistance and disaster relief, 4-5 insurgencies and counterinsurgencies, 4-4 military support to civilian authorities, 4-5 noncombatant evacuation, 4-4 peace enforcement, 4-4 peacekeeping, 4-5 principles, 4-2 show of force, 4-4 terrorism, 4-4 stationary guard, 3-41 advanced guard, 3-41 flank guard, 3-41 rear guard, 3-42 supply classes, 5-18 class I, 5-18 classes II, III, IV, VII, 5-19 class III, 5-19, class V, 5-20 class VI, 5-20 class VII, 5-20 class VIII, 5-21 class IX, 5-21 maps, 5-21 water, 5-19
T
TACAIR briefing format, G-11 tactical AA, 2-13 tactical command post (TAC CP) 2-11 tactical operations center, 2-10 future plans cell, 2-11 operations, 2-10 support cell, 2-11 task organization, 3-1 ACT, 3-1 AHT, 3-2 DCS, 3-1 general, 3-1 RAS, 3-1 employment considerations, 3-3 advantages and disadvantages, 3-4 terrorism, 4-4 troop communications, 2-22 network diagram, 2-23 reporting procedures, 2-24 radio and wire, 2-22 troop mission, 1-2 troop order guide, F-1 OPORD, F-1 F-3 OPORD brief, F-3 instructions, F-3 F-24 troop OPORD format, F-24 F-32 troop organization, 1-6 air cavalry platoon, 1-7 air cavalry team, 1-7 ACT, 1-6 AHT, 1-7 AVUM HHT, 1-6
Index-6
By Order of the Secretary of the Army: ERIC K. SHINSEKI General, United States Army Chief of Staff
Official:
DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 110714, requirements for FM 1-114.